Transcript for:
Notes on 'Initiation into Hermetics' by Franz Bardon

initiation into hermetics a course of instruction of magic theory and practice by franz bardon forward by ottie vote of over there is no doubt that everyone who has been searching for the true and authentic cognition in vain looked round for years if not even for lifetime to find a reliable method of training the arden desire for this noble aim made people again and again collect a mass of books from near and far supposed to be the best ones but which were lacking a great deal for real practice not one however of all the seekers could make any sense from all the stuff collected in the course of time and the goal aimed at so fervently vanished more and more in nebulous distances the one or the other did start to work on the progress after instructions so highly praised his goodwill and diligence never saw any satisfactory results apart from that nobody could reliably answer to his pressing questions whether or not just this way he had selected was the correct one for his individual case just at this time divine providence decided to help all those seekers who have been searching with tough endurance to find means and ways for their spiritual development through this book universal methods are given into the hands of mankind by a highest initiate who was chosen by divine providence for this special task without exaggeration can be said that never before these complete magical methods have been accessible for the public introduction by the author anyone who should believe to find in this work nothing else but a collection of recipes with the aid of which he can easily and without any effort attained to honor and glory riches and power and aim at the annihilation of his enemies might be told from the very inception that he will put aside this book being very disappointed numerous sects and religions do not understand the expression of magic otherwise than black art witchcraft or conspiracy with evil powers it is therefore not astonishing that many people are frightened by a certain horror whenever the word magic is pronounced jugglers conjurers and charlatans have discredited this term and considering this circumstance there is no surprise that magic knowledge has always been looked upon with a slight disregard even in the remotest times the magus has been regarded as one of the highest adepts and it might be of interest to learn that as a matter of fact the word magic is derived from this word the so-called sorcerers are by no means initiates but only imitators of the mysteries who are counting partly on the ignorance and partly on the credulity of the individual or a whole nation in order to reach their selfish aims by lies and fraud the true magician will always despise such practices in reality magic is a sacred science it is in the very true sense the sum of all knowledge because it teaches how to know and utilize the sovereign rules there is no difference between magic and mystic or any other conception of the name wherever authentic initiation is at stake one has to proceed on the same basis according to the same rules irrespective of the name given by this or that creed considering the universal polarity rules of good and evil active and passive light and shadow each science can serve good as well as bad purposes let us take the example of a knife an object which virtually ought to be used for cutting bread only which however can become a dangerous weapon in the hands of a murderer all depends on the character of the individual this principle goes just as well for all the spheres of the occult sciences in my book i have chosen the term of magician for all of my disciples it being a symbol of the deepest initiation and the highest wisdom many of the readers will know of course that the word tarot does not mean a game of cards serving mantical purposes but a symbolic book of initiation which contains the greatest secrets in a symbolic form the first tablet of this book introduces the magician representing him as the master of the elements and offering the key to the first arcanum the secret of the ineffable name of tetragrammaton the quabalistic yod he vow he here we will therefore find the gate to the magician's initiation the reader will easily realize how significant and how manifold the application of this tablet is not one of the books published up to date does describe the true sense of the first tarot card so distinctly as i have done in my book it is let it be noted born from the own practice and destined for the practical use of a lot of other people and all my disciples have found it to be the best and most serviceable system but i would never dare to say that my book describes or deals with all the magic or mystic problems if anyone should like to write all about this sublime wisdom he ought to fill folio volumes it can however be affirmed positively that this work is indeed the gate to the true initiation the first key to using the universal rules i am not going to deny the fact of fragment being able to be found in many an author's publications but not in a single book will the reader find so exact a description of the first tarot card i have taken pains to be as plain as possible in the course or the lectures to make the sublime truth accessible to everybody although it has been a hard task sometimes to find such simple words as unnecessary for the understanding of all the readers i must leave it to the judgment of all of you whether or not my efforts have been successful at certain points i have been forced to repeat myself deliberately to emphasize some important sentences and to spare the reader any going back to a particular page there have been many complaints of people interested in the occult sciences that they had never got any chance at all to be initiated by a personal master or leader guru therefore only people endowed with exceptional faculties a poor preferred minority seemed to be able to gain this sublime knowledge thus a great many of serious seekers of the truth had to go through piles of books just to catch one pearl of it now and again the one however who is earnestly interested in his progress and does not pursue this sacred wisdom from sheer curiosity or else is yearning to satisfy his own lust will find the right leader to initiate him in this book no incarnate adept however high his rank may be can give the disciple more for his start than the present book does if both the honest trainee and the attentive reader will find in this work all they have been searching for in vain all the years then the book has fulfilled its purpose completely author's note for introduction tetragrammaton literally means the four letter word it was a subterfuge to avoid the sin of uttering the sacred name yhvh yave or jehovah as it later became when the vowels of an other word were combined with the consonants of yhvh part 1 theory the picture of the magician the first tarot card interpretation of the symbolism below you will find the mineral vegetable and animal kingdoms expressed in a symbolic manner the female on the left side and the male on the right hand are the plus positive and the minus negative in every human being in their middle is to be seen a hermaphrodite a creature personifying the male and female combined in one as the sign of concinity between the male and the female principle the electrical and magnetical fluids are shown in red and blue colors electrical fluid being red magnetical fluid blue the head region of the female is electrical therefore red the region of the genitals is magnetical consequently blue as for the male it happens to be an inverted order above the hermaphrodite there is the globe as a sign of the earth sphere above which the magician is illustrated with the four elements above the male there are the active elements that of the fire in red and the airy element in blue color above the female there are the passive elements the water element in green and the element of the earth in yellow color the middle along the magician up to the globe is dark purple representing the sign of the akosha principle above the magician's head with an invisible ribbon for a crown there is a gold edged silvery white lotus flower as a sign of the divinity in the inside there is the ruby red philosopher's stone symbolizing the quintessence of the whole hermetic science on the right side in the background there is the sun yellow like gold and on the left side we see the moon silvery white expressing plus and minus in the macro and microcosm the electrical and the magnetical fluids above the lotus flower creation has been symbolized by a ball in the interior of which are represented the procreative positive and negative forces which stand for the creating act of the universe the eternal the infinite the boundless and the uncreated have been expressed symbolically by the word orm and the dark purple to black color the great secret of the tetragrammaton or the qabalistical yod he vow he quote by hermes tris magisto's device that which is above is also that which is below about the elements everything which has been created the macrocosm as well as the microcosm consequently the big and the small world have been achieved by the effect of the elements for this reason right from the beginning of the initiation i shall attend to these powers and underline their deep and manifold significance in particular in the occult literature very little has been said about the powers of the elements up to now so that i made it my business to treat this field of knowledge still unknown and to lift the veil covering these rules it is absolutely not very easy to enlighten the uninitiated so that they are not only fully informed about the existence and the activity of the elements but will be able to work with these powers in the future practically the whole universe is similar to a clockwork with all its wheels in mesh and interdependent from each other even the idea of the godhead as the highest comprehensible entity may be divided in aspects analogous to the elements details about it are found in the chapter concerning the god idea in the oldest oriental scriptures the elements are designated as tatwas in our european literature they are only considered on the ground of their good effects and in so far as we are warned against their unfavorable influence which means that certain actions can be undertaken under the influence of the tatwas or else must be omitted the accuracy of this fact is not to be doubted but all that has been published up to date points to a slight aspect of the effects of elements only how to find out about the effects of elements respectively the tattoos for any personal use may be sufficiently learned from astrological books i am penetrating far deeper into the secret of the elements and therefore i have chosen a different key which although being analogous to the astrological key as as a matter of fact nothing to do with it the reader to whom this key is completely unknown shall be taught to use it in various ways as for the single tasks analogies and effects of the elements i shall deal with them by turns and in detail in the following chapters which will not only unveil the theoretical part of it but point directly to the practical use because it is here that the greatest arcanum is to be found in the oldest book of wisdom the tarot has already been written something about this great mystery of the elements the first card of this work represents the magician pointing to the knowledge and mastery of the elements on this first card the symbols are the sword as the fiery element the rod is the element of the air the goblet as that of the water and the coins as the element of the earth this proves without any doubt that already in the mysteries of your the magician was destined for the first tarot card mastery of the elements having been chosen as the first act of initiation in honor of this tradition i shall give my principal attention to the elements four as you will see the key to the element is the panacea with the help of which all the occurring problems may be solved according to the indian succession of the tatwas it runs as follows okosha principle of the ether tagius principle of the fire wadu principle of the air aper's principle of the water pre-fevi principle of the earth in accordance with the indian doctrine it has been said that the four somehow gross attatwars have been descended from the fifth tattwa the akosha principle consequently okosha is the cause ultimate and to be regarded as the fifth power the so-called quintessence in one of the following chapters i shall inform the reader about this most subtle element okosha in detail the specific qualities of each element beginning with the highest planes right down to the grossly material level will be mentioned in all the following chapters by now the reader has surely realized that it is no easy task to analyze the great mystery of creation and word it in such a way that everybody gets the chance of penetrating the topic to form a plastic picture of it all the analysis of the elements will also be discussed and the great practical value of them underlined so that every scientist whether he be a chemist a physician a magnetizer an occultist a magician a mystic a quablist or a yogi etc can derive his practical benefit from it should i succeed in teaching the reader so far that he is able to deal with the subject in the proper way and to find the practical key to the branch of knowledge most suitable for him i will be glad to see that the purpose of my book has been fulfilled the principle of fire as it has been said before okosha or the etheric principle is the cause of the origin of the elements according to the oriental scriptures the first element born from okosha is believed to be tagis the principle of fire this element as well as all the others manifest their influence not only in our roughly material plane but in everything created the basic qualities of the fiery principle are heat and expansion in the beginning of all the things created must therefore have been fire and light and in the bible we read fiat lux there shall be light the origin of the light of course is to be sought in the fire each element and therefore that of fire two has two polarities that is the active and the passive one which means positive and negative plus will always signify the constructive the creative the productive sources whereas miner stands for all that is destructive or dissecting there are always two basic qualities which must be clearly distinguished in each element religions have always imputed the good to the active and the evil to the passive side but fundamentally spoken there are no such things as good or bad they are nothing but human conceptions in the universe there is neither good nor evil because everything has been created according to immutable rules wherein the divine principle is reflected and only by knowing these rules we shall be able to come near to the divinity as mentioned before the fiery principle owns the expansion which i shall call electrical fluid for the sake of better comprehension this definition does not just point to the roughly material electricity in spite of its having a certain analogy to it everyone will realize at once of course that the quality of expansion is identical with extension this elementary principle of fire is latent and active in all things created as a matter of fact in the whole universe beginning from the tiniest grain of sand to the most sublime substance visible or invisible the principle of water in the previous chapter we have studied the origin and the qualities of the positive element of fire in this chapter i am going to describe the opposite principle i say the water it is also derived from okocho the etheric principle but in comparison with fire it has quite contrasting qualities these basic qualities are coldness and shrinkage the point in question are also two poles the active one being constructive life-giving nourishing and protective whereas the negative pole similar to the one of fire is destructive dissecting fermenting and dividing as this element owns the basic quality of shrinking and contraction it has produced the magnetic fluid fire as well as water are operating in all regions according to the rules of creation the fiery principle would not be able to exist all by itself if it did not conceal inside as opposite pole the principle of water these two elements fire and water are the basic element with the help of which all has been created in consequence of these facts we have everywhere to reckon on two main elements moreover with the electrical and magnetical fluids which represent the contrasting polarities the principle of air another element derived from okosho is that of air initiated people do not regard this principle as a real element but they will grant it the role of a mediator between the fiery and the watery principles so that the principle of air will in a certain way establish the neutral equilibrium acting as a medium between the active and the passive activities of water and a fire through the interaction of the active and passive elements of fire and water the whole created life has become motion in its mediatorship the principle of air has assumed the quality of warmth from the fire and that of humidity from the water without these two qualities any life would be unconceivable these two qualities will also grant two polarities to the airy principle which means in the positive outcome the life-giving polarity and in the negative aspect the destructive polarity in addition to that let me say that the mentioned elements are not to be regarded as ordinary fire water and air which would solely represent aspects of the grossly material plane but in this case universal qualities of all elements are concerned the principle of earth it has been said of the principle of air that it does not represent an element proper and this affirmation goes for the principle of earth likewise now this means that out of the interaction of the three four set elements the earthy principle has been born as the last element which by its specific quality the solidification involves all the three elements it is this quality in particular which has given a concrete shape to the three or four set elements but at the same time the action of the three elements has been limited with the result of space measure weight and time having been born the reciprocal action of the three elements together with that of the earth thus has become tetrapolar so that the earthy principle may be labeled now as a four pole magnet the fluid in the polarity of the earthy element is electromagnetic all the life created can therefore be explained by the fact that all elements are active in the fourth that is the earthy element through realization in this element came out the fiat it shall be details concerning the specific influences of the elements in the various spheres and kingdoms such as the kingdoms of nature of animals and of human beings will be found in the following chapters the main point is that the reader gets a general impression about the workshop and the effect of the elemental principles in the entire universe the light light is established on the principle of fire light without fire is unconceivable and for this particular reason it is an aspect of the fire each fiery element can be converted into light and the other way round therefore light involves all the specific qualities such as shining penetrating expanding the opposite of light is darkness which has come out of the principle of water darkness has the contrasting specific qualities of the light without darkness light would not only remain quite unrecognizable but without darkness there would never be any light at all evidently light and darkness must have been produced by the mutual play of two elements consequently those of fire and water light in its outcome therefore has the positive quality whereas darkness has the negative one this interplay evidently is working in all regions or the ethereal principle several times while describing the elements i have said that they proceed from the ethereal principle accordingly the ethereal principle is the ultimate the supreme the most powerful thing something unconceivable the ultimate cause of all things existing and created to put it in a nutshell it is the causal sphere therefore akosha is spaceless and timeless it is the non-created the incomprehensible the indefinable the various religions have given it the name of god it is the fifth power the original power everything has been created by it and is kept in balance by it it is the origin and the purity of all thoughts and intentions it is the causal world wherein the whole creation is subsisting on beginning from the highest spheres down to the lowest ones it is the quintessence of the alchemists it is all in all karma the law of cause and effect an immutable law which has its aspect just in the okosha principle is the law of cause and effect each cause sets free a corresponding effect this law works everywhere as the most sublime rule consequently every deed proceeds from a cause or is followed by any result therefore we should not only accept karma as a rule for our good actions as the oriental philosophy puts it but its signification reaches farther and is a very deep one instinctively all men have the feeling that something good can bring good results only and again all the evil must end up with evil or in the words of a proverb whatsoever a man so earth that shall he also reap everybody is bound to know this law and to respect it this law of cause and effect governs the elemental principles too i have no intention to enter into details of this law which could be expressed by a few words as they are quite clear so that every reasonable man will understand them subject to this law of cause and effect is also the law of evolution or development thus development is an aspect of the karma law man about the body man is the true image of god he has been created in the likeness of the universe everything great to be found in the universe is reflected in a small degree in man for this reason man is signified as a microcosm in contrast to the macrocosm of the universe strictly speaking the entire nature manifests itself in man and it will be the task of this chapter to inform about these problems i do not intend to describe the physical occurrences in the body because everybody can find information about it in any respective work what i shall teach is to regard man from the hermetic standpoint and i shall enlighten interested people how to use the fundamental key i mean the influence of the elements on man in the right way a well-known maxim says a sound mind in a sound body the genuine truth of this aphorism presents itself immediately to everybody dealing with the problem of man there surely will arise the question what health is from the hermetic point of view not everyone is capable to answer this question at the first instant seen from the hermetic angle health is the perfect harmony of all the forces operating inside the body with respect to the basic qualities of the elements there need not prevail such a great disharmony of the element as to set free a visible effect which is called disease for disharmony in the form of sickness is already an essential disturbance in the workshop of the elements inside the body the main condition for the novice is to concentrate himself absolutely on his body the outwardly visible expression of the body resembles that of a beautiful garment and beauty in all its aspects is likewise an aspect of the divine nature beauty properly speaking is not only that which pleases us or appears to be sympathetic to our taste because sympathy or antipathy are dependent on the interaction of the elements genuine health is rather a basic condition of our spiritual rising if we like to live in beauty we must form our house our flat ore in this case our body beautifully and fill it with harmony according to the universal law the elements have to perform certain functions inside our body these are mainly building up the body keep it alive and dissolve it the positive part in the body the up building is therefore the business of the positive or active side of the elements the preserving part is brought about by the linking or connecting part of the elements that is the neutral whereas the destructive or dissolving part in the body is realized by the negative qualities of the elements it is obvious that the fiery principle in the active form with its electrical fluid will exert the active expansive building up influence the contrary will be the case in the negative form the watery principle in its active form will influence the building up activity in its negative form it will produce the disintegrating dissolving activity of all the fluids in the body with the principle of air rests the task of controlling the electrical fluid of the fire and the magnetic fluid of the water in the body keeping them in balance for this reason it has been characterized as the neutral or mediating element it has been said in the fundamental key about the forces of the principle of earth that it has the function inside the body to keep together the influences of all the three elements in the active form of the earthy elemental principle it has an animating vivifying invigorating influence and in the negative form it is the other way round the earthy principle is responsible for the thriving as well as for the aging of the body we could mention quite a lot of analogies with respect to the influence of the elements inside the body but let it be enough with the foregoing explanations adepts of all periods never described the effects of the elements in particular probably to avoid any misuse but they didn't know very well all about it they divided man in three basical conceptions attributing the head to the fiery principle the abdomen to that of water and the chest to the airy one as the mediating principle between fire and water how very right they were with their dividing man becomes obvious at the first look because all that is active or fiery takes place in the head in the abdomen it must be the contrary the watery the secretion the work of the saps etc the chest underlies the air and has a mediating part because here breathing takes place quite mechanically the earthy principle with its cohesive power or ability of holding together represents the whole of the human body with all its bones and flesh now the question will arise where and how akosha or the etheric principle occurs in the grossly material body in doing some deeper thinking everybody will be able to answer this question by himself for the etheric principle is hidden in its most grossly material form in the blood and in the seed and in the reciprocal action of these two substances in the vital matter or in the vitality as we have learned the fiery element produces the electrical and the water element the magnetic fluid each of these fluids has two pole radiations an active and a passive one and the mutual influences and interactions of all the radiation to four poles resemble a tetrapolar magnet which is identical to the secret of the tetragrammaton the yot he vow he of the quablists therefore the electromagnetic fluid in the human body in its emanation is the animal magnetism the odd or whatever name it has been given the right side of the human body is active electric providing the individual be a right hand one the left side is passive magnetic as for a left-handed person the contrary will take place the amount of power of this electromagnetic fluid is dependent on the capacitance that is the intensity of action of the elements inside the body the more harmoniously this action of the element is going on in the body all the stronger and purer this emanation will be with the help of certain exercises as well as by a correct attitude and an exact observance of these rules the capacitance strength and influence of this electromagnetic fluid or odd can be increased or diminished according to whatever necessity requires the way of doing it will exhaustively be illustrated in the practical part of the present work the electrical as well as the magnetical fluid in the human body have directly nothing to do with the kind of electricity or magnetism we know although a certain analogy exists this law of analogy is a very important factor in the hermetic science and the knowledge of it enables the adept to perform great miracles with the aid of this key the food contains the elements mingled with each other the result of taking in food is a chemical process by which the elements are preserved in our body from the medical point of view the taking in of any kind of food together with the breathing causes a process of combustion the hermitis sees far more in this process than just a simple chemical event he regards this combustion as the mutual dissolving of food just like the fire is kept burning by fuel therefore the whole life depends on the continuous supply of fuel that is the food and the breathing to supply every element with the necessary preserving substances a mixed food is advisable which contains the fundamental materials of the elements if we were to restrict our whole life to a one-sided kind of food only our body would without any doubt fall ill that means such a kind of food would produce a disharmony in the body by the disintegration of air and food the elements are provided with the supporting substances and this way their activity is maintained such is man's natural mode of life if any element is missing as it were the fuel all the functions depending on it are immediately affected if for example the fiery element in the body works excessively we feel thirsty the airy element makes us feel hungry the element of water causes a feeling of cold and the earthy element produces tiredness on the other hand every over saturation of the element causes reinforced effects in the body a surplus of fiery element creates a yearning for movement and activity if this be the case with the watery element the secretive process will be stronger any over saturation of the airy element indicates that we must be moderate in taking food at all an oversaturation of the earthy element affects the aspects of sexual life which must not necessarily find expression in the sexual instinct in the fleshly sense it is quite possible and this will especially occur in the case of elderly people that they feel a longing for increased activity and for productive agility in their active and passive polarity the electric and the magnetic fluids have the task of forming acid combinations in all the organic and inorganic bodies from the chemical point of view eventually from the alchemistic standpoint too in the active sense they are constructive and in the negative sense they are destructive dissolving and disintegrating all this explains the biological functions in the body the final result is the circulation of life which is brought into existence thrives ripens and fades away this is the sense of evolution of all things created diet a reasonable line of life maintains the harmony of the elements in the body as soon as a disharmony in the effective element becomes manifest the elements being extant in a weakened or a prevailing way special measures have to be taken as far as food is concerned to carry the elements back to their normal course or at least to influence them favorably in this respect therefore the most varying diets are prescribed for specific cases in times long past numerous observations led men to this opinion of which they ignored the exact reason if the disturbance of the elements is such as to render visible this disharmony it is no longer solely a disharmony but we have to deal with an illness this will mean that more drastical remedies will be necessary to re-establish the indispensable harmony providing we desire to bring the body back to its normal function and complete recovery all the curing methods known up to this day have been based on this fundament i desist from particularizing such methods as most of them are generally known the natural therapy employs thermic effects such as bathings poultices herbs massages etc the allopathist utilizes concentrated medicines which are causing the effects corresponding to the elements and destined to repair health the homeopathist brings to life the contrasting element according to the device similar simulibus curanta to achieve the balance of all that is in danger in conformity with the polarity laws the electro homeopathist by the use of his remedies influences the electrical and magnetical fluids directly to balance the disorderly elements according to the kind of illness by a suitable reinforcement of these fluids and so each curing method serves the purpose of restoring the disturbed equipoise of the elements by studying these influences of the elements on our body the magnetopathist or magnetizer has far more possibilities of influencing the body through his powers especially if he is capable to awake the electrical or magnetical fluid consciously in himself increasing and transferring it into that part of the body which has come to disharmony i have dedicated a special head of this book to the practical side of this treatment so far the total functions of the body have been stated in detail but each part of the body is also in analogy with the effect of the elements in the body influenced by a specific element which finds its expression in the polarity of the responsive part of the body it happens to be a very interesting fact that in the workshop respectively in the clockwork or mechanism i mean to say in the human organism some organs from the inside to the outside reciprocally only electrical fluid and from the outside to the inside they possess the magnetical fluid which affects the functions in the entire organism in an analogous and harmonious way in other organs the reverse process takes place the electrical fluid operating from the outside to the inside the magnetical one from the inside to the outside this knowledge of the polar emanation is called in the hermetic arthur a cult anatomy of the body and the knowledge of the effect of this occult anatomy is extremely important for every adept who wants to know his body to influence and to control it i shall therefore describe this occult anatomy of the human body with respect to the electrical and the magnetical fluid that is to say in the positive and in the negative sphere of action these arguments will turn to a magnetopathers great advantage because according to the center of the disease he will treat the sick part of the body either with the electrical or the magnetical fluid but this knowledge will bring great profit to everybody else too the head the four part is electric the back of the head is magnetic and so is the right side the left side is electric and so is the inside the eyes the four part is neutral and so is the background the right side is electric and so it is with the left side the inside is magnetical the ears fall part neutral back part also right side magnetical left side electrical inside neutral mouth and tongue four part neutral back part as well right side and left side both neutral inside magnetical the neck four part back part and right side magnetical left side and inside electrical the chest four part electromagnetical back part electrical right side and inside neutral left side electrical the abdomen four part electrical back part and right side magnetical left side electrical the inside magnetical the hands four part neutral back part also right side magnetical left side electrical the inside neutral the fingers of the right hand four and back part neutral right side electrical left side also the inside neutral the fingers of the left hand four and back part neutral right side electrical left side as well the inside neutral the feet 4 and back part neutral right side magnetical left side electrical the inside neutral the male genitals four part electrical back part neutral right and left side also the inside magnetical the female genitals four part magnetical back part right and left side neutral the inside electrical the last vertebra together with the anus fore and back part neutral right and left side as well the inside magnetical with the help of this occult anatomy and the key of the tetrapolar magnet the adept may compile further analogies if wanted the alchemist will recognize that the human body represents a genuine athena in which the most perfect alchemistic process the great work or the preparation of the philosopher's stone is visibly performed here with the chapter dealing with the body is finished i do not assert that all has been regarded but in any case with respect to the elements i mean to say the 4-pole magnet i have treated the most important problems and revealed the secret of the tetragrammaton in view of the body the roughly material plane or the material world in this chapter i will not describe the roughly material world the kingdoms of minerals vegetables and animals nor will i deal with the physical processes in nature because everybody has already learned at school that there are things such as the north and the south pole how rain originates how storms are brought about etc the incipient adept might not be so very interested in these occurrences he will rather endeavor to know all about the material world by means of the elements and their polarities it is needless to mention that on our planet there are fire water air and earth a fact absolutely clear to each reasonably thinking person notwithstanding it will be very useful if the adept becomes acquainted with the cause and the effect of the four elements and knows how to use them correctly according to the corresponding analogies on the other planes how it is possible to contact higher planes through knowing the grossly material elements will be reserved to a further chapter dealing with the practical use of magic at the moment it is important to know that on our earth the working of elements in the most subtle form is evolving off in exactly the same manner as in the human body by drawing analogies to the human body one will certainly find out how to draw the parallel to the elements and state that the analogy with the human body seems justified in the chapter relative to the body we have been discussing the mode of life and the functions of the elements with respect to the body and if the adept succeeds in using the elements in the most subtle form he will already be able to achieve wondrous things on his own body and not only this he can in all conscience affirm that nothing is impossible in this respect the earthy element implies the 4-pole magnet with its polarity and the effect of the other elements the fiery principle in its active form causes the vivifying principle in nature and in the negative form the destructive and disintegrating one the principle of water in its negative form is operating the contrary effect the principle of air with its bipolar polarity represents the neutral the balancing and the preserving essence in nature the earthy element according to its peculiarity of cohesion has as a basis the two great fundamental elements of fire and water together with the neutralization of the airy principle hence it must be regarded as the most grossly material element by the interaction of the fiery and the watery element we have as already mentioned in connection with the body got the magnetic and the electric fluid the two basic fluids originating according to the same laws in the body and having their mutual effects both these elements with their fluids are the cause of all that happens materially on our earth they influence all the chemical processes inside and outside of the earth in the kingdoms of minerals plants and animals hence you see that the electric fluid is to be found in the center of the earth whereas the magnetic one is on the surface of our earth this magnetic fluid of the earth's surface apart from the property of the principle of water or the cohesion attracts and holds all material and compound things according to the specific properties of a body which depend on the composition of the elements each object with respect to the electric fluid owns certain emanations the so-called electronic vibrations which are attracted by the general magnetic fluid of the entire material world this attraction is called the weight consequently weight is an appearance of the attractive power of the earth the well-known attractive power of iron and nickel is a little example respectively an imitation of that which is happening in a big measure on our whole earth what we understand on our earth as magnetism and electricity is nothing else but an appearance of the four-pole magnet for as we know already by an arbitrary pole changing electricity can be obtained from magnetism and in a mechanical way we get magnetism through electricity the transmutation of one power into another properly speaking is already an alchemistic or magic process which however in the course of time has been generalized so much that it is no longer regarded as alchemy or magic but is simply ascribed to physics for this reason it is obvious that the 4-pole magnet can be used also here according to the law concerning the problems of magnetism and electricity not only in the body as mentioned in the foregoing chapter but also in the grossly material world each hermeticist exactly knows that what is above is also that which is below each adept who knows how to employ the powers of the element or the great secret of the tetragrammaton on all planes is also capable to achieve great things in our material world things which the outsider would regard as miracles the adept however sees no miracles in them for backed by the knowledge of the laws he will be able to explain even the most remarkable curiosity everything on our earth all thriving ripening life and death depend on the statements made in these chapters hence the adept fully conceives that physic death does not mean disintegration passing into nothingness but what we consider as annihilation or death is nothing else but the transition from one stage into another the material world has emerged from the principle of okocho that is the known ether the world is also controlled and kept by this same principle therefore it is understandable that it is the transmission of the electric or the magnetic fluid on which are based all the inventions connected with the communication at distance through the ether such as radio telegraphy telephony television and all the other inventions to be achieved in the future with the aid of the electric or magnetic fluid in the ether but the fundamental principles and laws were are and will be always the same a very extensive and exciting book could be written solely about the effects of the various magnetic and electric fluids on the grossly material plane but the interested reader who has decided to walk onto the path of initiation and will not be deterred by the study of the principles will find out by himself all about the varieties of powers and properties the fruits and the insights he earned in the course of his studies will indemnify him amply the soul or the astral body through subtler vibrations of the elements through the electric and the magnetic fluid of their polarity the man proper the soul has proceeded from the akosha principle or the finer etheric vibrations in the same way as the elements are functioning in the material body the soul or the so-called astral body will behave the 4-pole magnet with its specific qualities connects or amalgamates the soul with the body this amalgamation takes place with analogy to the body by the electromagnetic influence of the elements we the adept call astral matrix or life this active behavior of the element or the so-called electromagnetic fluid of the soul this astral matrix or the electromagnetic fluid of the soul is not identical with the occultists aura i shall speak of later the astral matrix or the electromagnetic fluid is the connecting link between body and soul the fiery principle causes in the soul what is constructive the principle of water causes the animating the principle of air is balancing and the earthy principle causes what is thriving compound and preserving in the soul the astral body is performing exactly the same functions as the material body man has been fitted out with five senses corresponding to the five elements of which the astral body or the soul with the help of the bodily senses makes use to receive perceptions at the physical world this receiving and operating of the five senses through the astral and the material body is realized by our immortal spirit why this spirit is immortal this will be explained in a later chapter without any activity of the spirit in the soul the astral body would be without life and dissolve itself into its components as the spirit would not be able to operate without the intervention of the soul the astral body is the seat of all the qualities the immortal spirit has according to its development and maturity spirit has a different electric or magnetic fluid vibration which becomes patent in soul in the four temperaments outwardly in accordance to the predominant elements we distinguish the choleric the sanguine the melancholic and the phlegmatic temper the choleric temper comes from the fiery element the sanguine temper is due to the element of air the melancholic temper is born from the watery element and the phlegmatic one is ascribed to the earthy element to the strength and vibration of the respective element correspond in the various properties the strength vigor and expansion of the respective fluid vibrations each of these four elements which determine man's temper in the active form owns the good or good properties and in its passive form the contrary or the bad qualities it would be too prolix to inform here about the effects of the elements and it is better toy the incipient adept to find out himself further elf by his own meditation this manner also has a very special reason on the path to initiation here i shall cite a few examples only the choleric temper in its active polarity has the following good qualities activity enthusiasm eagerness resolution courage productivity etc in the negative form these qualities are gluttony jealousy passion irritability intemperance bent to destruction etc the sanguine temper in its active form shows capacity of penetrating diligence joy adroitness kindness clearness lack of grief cheerfulness optimism eagerness independence familiarity etc in the negative form continual feeling of being affronted contempt propensity to gossiping lack of endurance slyness garrosity dishonesty fickleness etc the melancholic temper in its active form respectability modesty compassion devotion seriousness decility fervor cordiality comprehension meditation calmness quick to give 1s confidence forgiveness tenderness aso in the negative form indifference depression apathy shyness laziness etc the phlegmatic temper in its active form respectability reputation endurance consideration resolution firmness seriousness scrupulousness thoroughness concentration sobriety punctuality reservedness objectivity infallibility responsibility reliability circumspection resistance self-assurance and so on in the negative form interpidity unscrupulousness misanthropy dullness tardiness laziness unreliability lackingism and so on the qualities of the temperaments according to the preponderant quality form the basis of the human character the intensity of these qualities shown outwardly depends on the polarity the electric or the magnetic fluid the total influence of the effects of the temperaments results in an emanation professionally called aura therefore this kind of aura is not to be compared with the astral matrix because between these two conceptions there is a thumping difference the astral matrix is the connecting substance between body and soul whilst the aura is the emanation of the action of the element in the various qualities having its origin either in the active or in the passive form this emanation in the whole soul produces a certain vibration corresponding to a certain color on the grounds of this color the adept can exactly recognize his own aura or that of another being with the astral eyes backed by this aura the seer can establish not only a man's basic character but he also can perceive the action or the polarity of the soul's vibration and influence it eventually i shall speak of these problems in a more detailed way in a separate chapter relating to introspection hence a man's temperament influences his character and both together in their effect as total result are creating the emanation of the soul or the aura this is also the reason for higher depths or saints always being represented in the images with a halo identical to the aura we have described besides the character the temperament and the activity of the electromagnetic fluid the astral body still has two centers in the brain the cerebrum being the seat of normal consciousness whilst in the cerebellum there is the opposite to the normal consciousness the subconsciousness as to their functions see chapter concerning the spirit as it has been said before according to the elements the soul is divided in exactly the same way as the body the psychic functions powers and properties also have their seat respectively in the soul and certain centers analogous to all the elements which the indian philosophy designates as lotuses the awakening of these lotuses is named kundalini yoga in the indian doctrine i desist however from a comment on these lotuses or centers because the student interested in this problem will find all the necessary enlightenment in the respective literature only slightly i will touch it and say that the lowest center is the so-called muladara or earthy center having its seat in the lowest part of the soul the next center is that of the water with its seat in the region of the sexual organs and designated in the indian terminology as swadesthana the center of the fire a center of the soul is in the umbilical region and is named manipura the center of the air as compensatory element is in the region of the heart and is termed anahata the center of the ether or principle of okocho is found in the region of the neck and is named vasuda another center that a volition and intellect is between the eyebrows and is called ajna as the supreme and most divine center is regarded the thousand-leaved lotus named sahasrara from which derive and are influenced all the other powers of the centers beginning at the top from the supreme center along the back down to the lowest earthy center like a channel runs the so-called susamna or the okosha principle already known to us liable for the connection and control of the entire centers later on i shall come back to the problem of the evocation of the snake power in the single centers in describing the soul the principal task will be to establish the connection of the element with their positive and negative polarities in the soul and give a neat idea of it one will see that the body as well as the soul with their effects are alive and working that their preservation and destruction are subject to the immutable laws of the four-pole magnet that is the secret of the tetragrammaton and governed by them if he who is to be initiated will attentively meditate about it he will win a clear idea not only of the bodily functions but also of those of the soul and come to a sound notion of the mutual interaction according to the original laws the astral plane the astral plane often designated as the fourth dimension has not been created out of the four elements but it is a density degree of the akosha principle consequently of all that up to now in the material world occurred is actually occurring and will occur and has its origin regulation and existence as said before okosha in its subtlest form is the ether well known to all of us in which amongst other vibrations electric as well as magnetic ones are propagating consequently this vibration sphere is the origin of light sound color rhythm and life in all things created as akosha is the origin of all existing things all that ever was produced is being produced and will be produced in the future is reflected in it therefore in the astral plane there is to be seen the emanation of the eternal having neither a beginning nor an end as it is timeless and spaceless the adept who sees his way about this plane may find everything here no matter the point in question be in the past the present or the future how far this perception will reach depends on the degree of his perfection occultists and spiritualists and most of religions name the astral plane the world beyond however the adept knows very well that there is no such thing as hence and beyond and feels no fear of death which concept is quite strange to him if by the disintegrating work of the elements or a sudden breakup the astral matrix which is the connecting matter between the grossly material body and the astral body has got loose then will happen what we commonly call death which however in reality is nothing else but a passage from the terrestrial world to the astral world backed up by this law the adept knows no fear of death being convinced that he will not approach uncertainty through his control of the elements besides many other things he also can achieve a slackening of the astral matrix which will result in a spontaneous separation of the astral body from the mortal frame thus he will be able to visit the remotest regions transfer himself into various planes in the form of his astral body this is the positive explanation of so many tales in which saints have been seen at the same time in different places and have even been working there the astral plane has various kinds of inhabitants first of all there are the deceased ones who having left the earth are abiding in the corresponding density degree according to their spiritual maturity which is designated by the various religions as heaven or hell the adept seeing only symbols therein the nobler purer and the more perfect an entity happens to be all the purer and finer will be the density degree of the inhabited astral plane little by little the astral body is dissolving until it has become suitable to the degree of vibrations at the respective step of the astral level or identical with it as you see this identification depends on the maturity and the spiritual perfection the entity concerned achieved on this earth besides the astral plane is inhabited by many other beings of which i am mentioning only some species here there are for example the so-called elementaries entities with one or only very few qualities according to the dominant vibrations of the elements they are living on the similar vibrations proper to man and transmitted by him into the astral plane among them there are some which have already reached a certain degree of intelligence and some magicians are using these low-powered beings for their selfish purposes another kind of beings are the larvae which have been brought into life consciously or unconsciously by intense sensorial thinking through the astral matrix they are not real beings but only forms thriving on the passions of the animal world on the lowest step of the astral level their instinct of self-preservation carries them into the sphere of those men whose passions are responsive to them they will try directly or indirectly to raise and kindle the passion slumbering in man if these forms are succeeding in seducing men to give into their suitable passion they are feeding and thriving on the emanation of this passion produced in man man laden with many passions will attract a host of such larvae in the lowest sphere of his astral plane a great fight takes place and in the problem of magic this fact plays an important role more about it is to be found in the chapter dealing with introspection there are also other elementaries and larvae which can be produced in the artificial magic way as to further details see in the practical part of this book another kind of beings the adept often has to deal with in the astral plane must not be overlooked namely the beings of the four pure elements in the element of fire their name is salamander in the airy element they are the silfids in the water element they are called mermaids orandins and in the element of earth there are the gnomes or goblins these beings represent as it were the connection between the astral plane and the earthly elements how to establish the connection with these beings how to control them what can be achieved with their help all this will be reserved to the practical part of the present book to which i shall dedicate the special chapter magic of the elements furthermore there is a host of other beings such as satyrs wood maidens water goblins etc who could be specified even if all this sounds like a fairy tale on the astral plane the previously described beings are the very same realities as all the other earthly beings the adept clairvoyant eyes can see all of them if he desires so and is able to establish the connection with them so excluding any doubt of the existence of these beings right from the beginning that is why the adept has to ripen first and learn to examine before being able to judge the spirit it has been said before that man has been created in the image of god and consists of body soul and spirit the preceding chapters have made it evident that body and soul serve only as a veil or garment for the spirit the spirit is the immortal part and the image of god it is not easy to define something divine immortal imperishable and to put it into the correct terms but here as well as with any other problem the key of the four-pole magnet will be a great help for us from the supreme prototype okosha original source of all beings has preceded the spirit the spiritual ego with the four specific elemental qualities proper to the immortal spirit which was created in god's image the fiery principle the impulsive part means the will volition the airy principle shows up in the intellect mind the watery principle respectively in the life and the feeling and the earthy principle is representing the union of all the three elements in the consciousness of the ego all the other qualities of the spirit are based upon these four original principles the typical part of the fifth say the etheric principle okosho manifests itself in the highest aspect in the faith and in the lowest form in the instinct of self-preservation each of these mentioned four elemental principles has many other aspects corresponding to the law of analogy of the polarity or the positive and negative elements all of them together form the ego or the spirit for this reason we can make responsible the fiery principle for strength power and passion memory power of discrimination and judgment are ascribed to the airy principle conscience and intuition to the principle of water egotism and the instincts of self-preservation and propagation to the earthy part of the spirit it would be too long to quote all the properties of the spirit with regard to the elements the incipient adept can enlarge these qualities by serious studies and deep meditation with respect to the analogous laws of the four-pole magnet this happens to be a very meritorious work which never ought to be neglected because it will lead to great success and secure results these three chapters relating to body soul and spirit have represented man in his most perfect form by now the disciple ought to have realized how very important it is to know one's own microcosm for the initiation and especially for the magic and the mystic practice as a matter of fact for the whole of the secrets most of the authors from sheer ignorance or for other cogent reasons have omitted this extremely important part the foundation the mental plane as the body has its earthly plane and the astral body or the soul owns the astral plane the spirit too has its own plane the so-called mental plane or mental sphere this is the mental sphere with all its virtues both these spheres the material as well as the astral one have been born from the okosha or original principle of the respective sphere through the four elements and also the mental sphere is built upon the same foundation and therefore likewise a product of the orchestra principle of the spirit similar to the spirit developing in a four-pole magnet by corresponding work and showing an electromagnetic fluid analogous to the astral body on account of the effect of the elements as a secondary phenomenon of the polarity on the outside the mental body develops in the mental or spiritual sphere just in the same way as the astral body through the electromagnetic fluid of the astral world forms an astral matrix the so-called astral odd the electromagnetic fluid of the mental world forms a mental matrix linking the mental body to the astral body this mental matrix or the mental odd the so-called mental substance is the subtlest form of okosho which controls and preserves the spiritual activity in the astral body at the same time this mental substance is electromagnetic and is regarded as leader of the ideas to the consciousness of the spirit from where it is put into activity through the astral and the roughly material body so this mental matrix or the mental odd with its double pole fluid is the subtlest substance we can imagine in the human body simultaneously the mental sphere is the sphere of thoughts which have their origin in the world of ideas consequently in the spiritual orchestra each thought is preceded by a basic idea which according to its property accepts a definite form and arrives to the consciousness of the ego through the etheric principle consequently the mental matrix as expression of the thought in the shape of a plastic picture therefore man himself is not the founder of the thoughts but the origin of each thought is to be sought in the supreme akosha sphere or the mental plane man's spirit as it were is the receiver the antenna of thoughts from the world of ideas according to the situation in which man happens to be the world of ideas being all in all each new idea new invention in short all man believes to have created by himself has been brought out of this world of ideas this production of new ideas depends on the maturity and attitude of the spirit each thought involves an absolutely pure element especially if the thought implies abstract ideas if the thought is based on several combinations of the ideal world different elements are effective in their form as well as in their mutual emanation only abstract ideas have pure elements and pure polar emanations as they descend directly from the causal world of an idea from this cognition we may draw the conclusion that there are pure electric pure magnetic indifferent and neutral ideas from the standpoint of their effect according to the idea each thought in the mental sphere has its own form colour and vibration through the tetrapolar magnet of the spirit the thought arrives at the consciousness from where it is forwarded to realization each thing created in the material world consequently has its cause in the ideal world through the thought and the spiritual consciousness and is reflected therein if the point in question is not exactly an abstract idea several forms of ideas can be expressed such thoughts are electric or magnetic or electromagnetic according to the elemental property of the idea the material plane is bound to time and space the astral plane sphere of the perishable or mutable spirit is bound to space the mental sphere being timeless and spaceless the very same thing happens with all the mental properties the reception of a thought in the mental body through the link of the astral and mental matrix bound to space and time in the total form needs a certain amount of time to become fully conscious of this thought according to the mental maturity the train of thoughts is different in each individual the more advanced the more cultured man is the faster thoughts will develop in mind likewise as the astral plane is inhabited so is the mental plane too besides the ideal forms there are principally the deceased ones whose astral bodies have been dissolved by the element in the course of their ripening and allotted according to the degree of perfection to regions corresponding to their mental sphere besides the mental sphere is the sphere of the so-called elementals beings created consciously or unconsciously by man as a result of repeated and intense thinking an elemental being is not yet so much condensed to form or to assume any astral shape for itself its influence is therefore limited to the mental sphere the difference between an ideal form and an elemental lies in the fact that the ideal form is based on one or several ideas on the other hand the elemental is equipped with a certain quantity of consciousness and therefore with the instinct of preservation but otherwise it does not much distinguish from other mental living beings it can even take the same shape as the ideal form the adept often resorts to these elemental beings how to create such an elemental how to preserve it and how to utilize it for certain purposes this problem will be approached in the practical part of this book there would be still quite a lot to be said about the particular specific properties of some beings but all that we have pointed out previously should be sufficient to stimulate the work and contribute to a succinct enlightenment about the mental plane truth let us now leave the microcosm i mean to say man with his earthly astral and mental body and turn to other problems which also are imminent to be solved by the incipient adept first of all there is the problem of truth a great many philosophers have often already paid a serious attention to this problem and we also will have to approach this task we shall deal here only with such kinds of truth we must be informed about thoroughly truth depends on the insight of each individual and as we cannot all of us have the same insight or perception it is impossible to generalize the problem of truth therefore from his standpoint and in conformity with the degree of his maturity each one will have his own truth providing he sees it quite honestly only he who knows and masters the absolute laws of the microcosm and the macrocosm is entitled to speak of an absolute truth certain aspects of the absolute truth will be surely acknowledged by everyone nobody indeed will doubt that there is life volition memory and intellect and will refrain from arguing about these facts no sincere adept will impose his truth to anyone who is not yet ripe for it the person concerned would do nothing else but regard it again from his own standpoint therefore it would be useless to argue with non-professionals on higher kinds of truth accepting people eager to search the heights of truth and beginning to ripen for it anything else would be a profanation and from the magic point of view absolutely incorrect at this point all of us will have to remember the words of the great master of christianity neither cast ye your pearls before swine lest they trample them under their feet to truth belongs also the capacity of correctly differentiating among knowledge and wisdom knowledge depends in all domains of the human existence on the maturity receptivity and understanding of the mind and the memory without regard to whether or not we have been able to enrich our knowledge by reading transmitting or other experiences there is a wide difference between knowledge and wisdom and it is much easier to win knowledge than wisdom wisdom depends not in the least on knowledge although both are identical up to a certain degree the source of wisdom is in god that is to say in the causal principle the akosha on all planes of the grossly material astral and mental world therefore wisdom does not depend on mind and memory but on the maturity purity and perfection of the individual personality wisdom could also be considered as a developmental stage of the ego therefore insights are not passed on through the mind but and this particularly through intuition or inspiration the degree of wisdom is therefore determined by the state of development of the individual this will not mean of course that we ought to neglect knowledge on the contrary knowledge and wisdom must go hand in hand the adept will therefore endeavor to get on in knowledge as well as in wisdom for none of the two must lag behind in development if knowledge and wisdom keep the same pace in the development the adept is enabled to grasp all the laws of the microcosm and the macrocosm not only from the point of wisdom but also from the intellectual side that is to say in a bipolar way namely to perceive and utilize them for his own development in all the planes we have already learned to know one of the numerous laws the first main key the secret of the tetragrammaton or the four-pole magnet being a universal key it can be used to solve all problems all laws all kinds of truth in short everything provided the adept knows how to use it properly as time goes on and his development unfolds and he is advancing in her metics he will be acquainted with many an aspect more of this key and be forced to accept it as an unchangeable law he will no more wander in darkness and uncertainty but he will carry a torch in his hand the light of which will penetrate the night of ignorance this brief summary will suffice for the adept to instruct him how to deal with the problem of truth religion the incipient magician will confess his faith to a universal religion he will find out that every religion has good points as well as bad ones he will therefore keep the best of it for himself and ignore the weak points which does not mean necessarily that he must profess a religion but he shall express or to each form of worship for each religion has its proper principle of god whether the point in question be christianity buddhism islam or any other kind of religion fundamentally he may be faithful to his own religion but he will not be satisfied with the official doctrines of his church and try to penetrate deeper into god's workshop and such is the purpose of our initiation according to the universal laws the magician will form his own point of view about the universe which henceforth will be his true religion he will state that apart from the deficiencies each defender of religion will endeavor to represent his own religion as the best of all each religious truth is relative and the comprehension of it depends on the maturity of the person concerned therefore the adept does not interfere with anybody in this respect nor will he try to sidetrack anyone from his truth criticize him to say nothing of condemning him at the bottom of his heart he may feel sorry for fanatics or atheists without showing it outwardly let everybody hold on to what he is believing and makes him happy and content should everybody stick to this maxim there would be neither hatred nor religious dissensions on this earth there would be no reason for disputes and all turns of mind could exist happily side by side quite a different thing is if a seeker dissatisfied by materialism and doctrines and longing for spiritual support will ask advice and information of an adept in such a case the adept is obliged to supply the seeker with spiritual light and insight according to his mental powers then the magician should spare neither time nor pains to communicate his spiritual treasures and lead the seeker to the light god since the remotest ages mankind has always believed in something beyond human understanding something transcendental he idolized no matter whether there was question of personified or unpersonified conceptions of god anything man was unable to understand or to comprehend was imputed to the powers above such as his intuitive virtue admitted them in this way all the deities of mankind good and evil ones demons have been born as time went on gods angels demiurges demons and ghosts have been worshipped irrespective of their having ever been alive in reality or their having existed in fancy only with the development of mankind the idea of god was shrinking especially at the time when with the aid of the sciences were explained phenomena ascribed before to the gods a lot of books would have to be written if one wish to enter into details of the various ideas of god in the history of the nations let us approach the idea of god from a magician's standpoint to the plain man the idea of god serves as support for his spirit just not to entangle himself in uncertainty and to get out of his depth therefore his god remains always something unconceivable intangible and incomprehensible for him it is quite otherwise with the magician who knows his god in all aspects he holds his god in or as he knows himself to have been created in his image consequently to be a part of god he sees his lofty ideal his first duty and his sacred objective in the union with the godhead in becoming the god-man the rise to this a blind goal shall be described further on the synthesis of this mystic union with god consists in developing the divine ideas from the lowest up to the highest steps in such a degree as to attain the union with the universal everyone is at liberty to abandon his individuality or to retain it such genie are usually returned to earth entrusted with a definite sacred task or mission in this rise the initiated magician is a mystic at the same time only performing this union and giving up his individuality he voluntarily enters into dissolution which in the mystic wording is called mystic death it is evident that true initiation knows neither a mystic nor a magic path there is only one initiation linking both conceptions in opposition to most of the mystic and spiritual schools which are dealing with the very highest problems through meditation or other spiritual exercises without having gone through the first steps at first this would be similar to somebody starting with the university studies without going through the elementary classes first the results of such a one-sided training in some cases are disastrous sometimes even drastic according to the individual talents the error is generally to be found in the fact that most of the matter comes from the orient where the material as well as the astral world is regarded as maya illusion and consequently paid little attention to it is impossible to point out details for this would overstep the frame of this book sticking to a carefully planned step-by-step development there will be neither a mishap nor a failure or bad consequences for the simple reason that ripening takes place slowly but surely it is quite an individual matter whether the adept will choose as his idea of god christ buddha brahma allah or someone else all depends on the idea in the initiation the pure mystic wishes to approach his god only in the all-embracing love the yogi too walks towards one single aspect of god the bhakti-yogi keeps to the road of love and devotion the raja and hatha yogi choose the path of self-control or volition the nyana yogi will follow that of wisdom and cognition let us regard the idea of god now from the magic standpoint according to the four elements the so-called tetragrammaton the unspeakable the supreme the fiery principle involves the almightiness and the omnipotence the area original principle owns the wisdom purity and clearness from the aspect of which precedes the universal lawfulness love and eternal life are attributed to the watery principle and omnipresence immortality and consequently eternity belong to the earthy principle these four aspects together represent the supreme godhead let us tread upon this path to this supreme godhead practically and step by step beginning from the lowest sphere arrive at the true realization of god in ourselves let us praise the happy man who will reach this still in his earthly existence let us banish fear of the pains for all of us will once reach this aim asceticism from the remotest times all religions sects terms of mind and training systems have regarded asceticism as a very important problem various systems of the orient turned asceticism into fanaticism causing great damages by exaggeration and wild excesses which were unnatural and unlawful the mortification of the flesh generally speaking is just as one-sided as developing one part of the body only neglecting all the other parts if asceticism serves the human body say in the pattern of a diet to get rid of slags and other impurities or save the body from illness and compensate disharmonies ascetic measures may reasonably be employed but beware of any exaggeration somebody doing hard physical work would indeed be very foolish to deprive the body of substances absolutely necessary for its preservation just because he is privately interested in yoga or mysticism such extremes would doubtlessly end up with serious and dangerous injuries to the health vegetarianism is not implicitly important for the mental progress or the intellectual development unless it is supposed to be a remedy to clean the body from slags a temporary abstinence from meat or animal food is indicated only for very specific magic operations as a sort of preparation and even then only for a certain period all this is to be considered with respect to sexual life the idea that by eating the meat of an animal the animal powers or faculties could be conveyed to oneself is nonsense and originates in a mentality ignoring the perfect and genuine primitive laws the magician does not pay any attention to such misconception in the interest of his mago mystic development the magician must be moderate in eating and drinking and observe a reasonable mode of life it is impossible to fix precise rules or prescriptions the magic way of life being quite individual each and all must know best what agrees or disagrees with them it is a sacred duty to keep the balance everywhere there are three kinds of asceticism one intellectual or mental asceticism two psychic or astral asceticism three physical or material asceticism the first kind has to do with the discipline of thoughts the second kind is engaged in enabling the soul through control of passions and instincts and the third kind is concerned with harmonizing the body through a moderate and natural way of life without these three kinds of asceticism which must be developed at the same time and parallel to each other a correct magical rise is unthinkable none of the three kinds may be neglected none of them may prevail to avoid any one-sided development further information about how to accomplish this task will be given in the practical training course of this book before bringing the theoretic part to an end which has illustrated the theoretic principles i advise everybody that this part should not only be read but must become the mental possession of the concerned person by means of intense reflection and meditation he who is going to be a magician will recognize that life is dependent on the work of the elements in the various planes and spheres it is to be seen in great and in small things in the microcosm as well as in the macrocosm temporally and eternally everywhere there are powers in action starting from this point of cognition you will find out that there is no death at all in the true sense of the word but everything goes on living transmuting and becoming perfect according to primitive laws therefore a magician is not afraid of death for he believes the physical death to be only a transition to a subtler sphere the astral plane and from there to the spiritual level and so on consequently he will neither believe in heaven nor in hell the priests of the various religions stick to these fancies solely to keep their kids to the point their moralizing serves only to provoke fear of the hell or the purgatory and to promise heaven to morally good people average people as far as they are religiously inclined are favorably influenced by such a point of view for from fear of hell they will try to be good but as to the magician he sees the purpose of the moral laws in ennobling the mind and the soul for it is in an ennobled soul only that the universal powers can do their work especially if body soul and mind have been equally trained and developed part two practice step one let us now turn to the practical side of the initiation we must always be aware of the fact that body soul and mind are to be trained simultaneously for otherwise it would be impossible to gain and maintain the magic equipoise in the theoretic part i already called the attention to the dangers possibly arising from a one-sided training it is not advisable to hasten development because everything needs time patience perseverance and tenacity are fundamental conditions of the development the pains taken in one's development will amply be rewarded whosoever is willing to enter the magic path should regard it his sacred duty to practice regular exercises he ought to be kind generous and tolerant with his fellow men but relentless and hard with himself only such a behavior will be followed by success in magic refrain from condemning or criticizing and sweep first before the own doorsteps do not permit anyone to look into your sanctuary the magician will always keep silent with respect to his way rise and success this silence grants the highest powers and the more this commandment is obeyed the more easily accessible will these powers be do manage it so that you spend as much time as possible in your rise or advance it is quite unnecessary to waste time with sitting four hours drinking beer and passing time in a trivial company time is running away like water never to come back again a certain amount of time ought to be provided for but it is very necessary to stick to it exceptions ought to be allowed only in quite inevitable cases man is subject to habits and once accustomed to a definite timetable for his exercises he will feel compelled to do his exercises in the same way as there is a want for the necessities of life such as eating drinking and sleeping it ought to happen in regard of the exercises which must become as it were a habit this is the sole way to attain a sure and full success there is no prize without diligence it is my ambition to arrange for the instructions as if they were meant for the busiest man he who has plenty of time on hand may be able to be occupied with two or more exercises at the same time magic mental training one thought control discipline of thoughts subordination of thoughts take a seat in a comfortable chair or lie down on a settee relax the whole body close your eyes and observe the train of your thoughts for five minutes trying to retain it at first you will find that there are rushing up to you thoughts concerning everyday affairs professional worries and such like take the behavior of a silent observer towards these trains of thoughts freely and independently according to the mentality and the mental situation you happen to be in at this moment this exercise will be more or less easy for you the main point then is not to forget yourself not to lose the train of torts but pursue it attentively be aware of falling asleep while doing this exercise if you begin feeling tired stop instantly and postpone the exercise to another time when you intend not to give in to tiredness the indians for example sprinkle cold water in their faces or rub it down the face and the upper part of their bodies to remain brisk and not to waste precious time some deep breathings before you begin will also do to prevent and keep from tiredness and sleepiness as time goes on every disciple will find out such little tricks by himself this exercise of controlling thoughts has to be undertaken in the morning and at night it is to be extended each day by one minute to allow the own train of thoughts to be pursued and controlled without the slightest digression for a time of 10 minutes at least after a week's training this space of time is destined to the average man if it should not suffice everyone can extend it according to his own apperception at all events it is advisable to go ahead very consciously because it is no use to hurry development being quite individual in men on no account go further before the preceding exercise is perfectly under control the attentive disciple will realize how at the beginning thoughts rush onto him how rapidly they pass before him so that he will have difficulties to recollect a lot of manifold thoughts but from one exercise to the next he will state that thoughts come up less chaotic moderating little by little until at last only few thoughts emerge in his consciousness arriving as it were from a far distance to this work of thought control the keenest attention ought to be given as it is very important for the magic development a fact everybody will realize later on himself providing the mentioned exercise has been thoroughly worked through and everyone has a complete command of it in the practice let us pass over to the mental training up to now we have learned to control our thoughts the next exercise will consist in not giving way in our mind to thoughts obtruding themselves on our mind unwanted and obstinate for instance we must be able not to occupy ourselves any longer with the tasks and worries of our profession when we come home from it and return to the family circle and the privacy all thoughts not belonging to our privacy must be set aside and we ought to manage to become quite a different personality instantly and just the other way round in our job all our thoughts have to be concentrated in it exclusively and we must not allow them to digress or wander say home to private affairs or somewhere else this has to be practiced time and again until it has developed a habit one ought to accustom oneself above all to achieve whatever one does whether in professional work or in privacy with full consciousness regardless of the point being a big or a trifle one this exercise should be kept for a lifetime because it is sharpening the mind and strengthening the consciousness and the memory having obtained a certain skill in this exercise you may turn to the following one the purpose will now be to hold on to a single thought or idea for a longer while and suppress any other thoughts associating and obtruding with force on the mind choose for this purpose any train of thoughts or ideation or a suitable presentation according to your personal taste hold on to this presentation with all your strength refuse all the other thoughts vigorously which have nothing to do with the thoughts exercising at first you will probably succeed only for a few seconds later on for minutes you must manage to concentrate on one single thought and follow it for 10 minutes at least if you succeed in doing so you will be fit for a new exercise let us then learn how to produce an absolute vacancy of mind lie comfortably down on a bed or settee or sit in an armchair and relax your whole body close your eyes dismiss energetically any thought coming upon you nothing at all is allowed to happen in your mind there must reign an absolute vacancy now hold on to this stage of vacancy without digressing or forgetting at first you will manage to do so a few seconds only but when practicing it often you will surely succeed better in it the purpose of the exercise will be attained if you succeed in remaining in this state for full 10 minutes without losing your self-control or even falling asleep enter your success failure duration of your exercises and eventual disturbances carefully into a magic notebook see details under the heading magic soul training such a diary will be useful to check your progress the greater the scrupulousness you use in doing so the more easily you will undergo all the other exercises prepare a working schedule for the coming day or week and most of all indulge in self-criticism magic psychic training one introspection or self-knowledge in our own mansion meaning our body and our soul we must at every moment find our way about therefore our first task will be to know ourselves each initiation system no matter which kind it be will put this condition in the first place without self-knowledge there will be no real development on a higher level in the first days of psychic training let us deal with the practical part of introspection or self-knowledge arrange for a magic diary and enter all the bad sides of your soul into it this diary is for your own use only and must not be shown to anybody else it represents the so-called control book for you in the self-control of your failures habits passions instincts and other ugly character traits you have to observe a hard and severe attitude towards yourself making of the black and white mirrors of the soul be merciless towards yourself and do not embellish any of your failures and deficiencies think about yourself in quiet meditation put yourself back into different situations of your past remember how you did behave then and which mistakes or failures occurred in the various situations make note of all your weaknesses down to the finest nuances and variations the more you are discovering all the better for you nothing must remain hidden nothing unrevealed however insignificant or great your faults or frailties may be some especially endowed disciples have been able to discover hundreds of failures in the finest shades disciples like these possessed a good meditation and a deep penetration into their own souls wash your soul perfectly clean sweep all the dust out of it this self-analysis is one of the most important magic preliminaries many of the occult systems have neglected it and that is why they did not achieve good results this psychic preliminary work is indispensable to obtain the magic equilibrium and without it there is no regular progress of the development to be thought of you therefore ought to vow some minutes time to self-criticism in the morning and at night if you have got the chance of some free moment during the day avail yourself of them and do some intensive thinking whether there are still some faults hidden anywhere and if you discover them record them on the spot not to forget a single one whenever you happen to find out any deficiency do not delay to note it immediately if you do not succeed within a week in discovering all your faults spend another week on these inquiries until you have definitely established your list of offenses having achieved this problem within one or two weeks you have reached a point to begin with a further exercise now by intensive thinking try to assign each fault to one of the four elements appoint a rubric in your diary to each element and enter your faults into it about some of the faults you will not feel sure which of the elements they are to be assigned to record them under the heading of indifferent in the progressing development you will be able to determine the element corresponding to your deficiency for instance you will ascribe jealousy hatred vindictiveness irratibility anger to the fiery element frivolity self-presumption boasting squandering gossiping to the element of air indifference laziness frigidity compliance negligence shyness insolence instability to the watery element laziness conscienceless melancholy irregularity anomaly and dullness to the element of earth in the following week you will meditate on each single rubric dividing it in three groups in the first group you will enter the biggest failures especially those which influence you strongest or happen at the slightest opportunity the second group will embrace faults occurring less frequently and in a slighter degree in the last group you are recording those faults which happen only now and again go on doing so with the indifferent faults too work conscientiously at all times it is worthwhile repeat the whole procedure with your good psychical qualities entering them into the respective categories of the elements do not forget the three columns here as well so for example you will assign activity enthusiasm firmness courage daring to the fiery element diligence joy dexterity kindness lust optimism to the air element modesty abstinence fervency compassion tranquility tenderness forgiveness to the watery element respect endurance conscientiousness thoroughness sobriety punctuality responsibility to the earthy element by doing so you will get two so-called astral psycho mirrors a black one with the evil psychic qualities and a white one with the good and noble character traits these two magic mirrors are correct occult mirrors and none but the owner has any rights to look into them at all let me repeat once more that the owner must endeavor to elaborate his magic mirrors precisely and conscientiously if in the course of the development he should remember any good or bad quality he can still record it under the respective heading these two magic mirrors will allow the magician to recognize rather exactly which of the elements is prevailing in his black or white mirror this recognition is absolutely necessary to attain the magic equipoise and the further development depends on it magic physical training one the material or carnal body hand in hand with the development of spirit and soul has to go that of the outwards i mean the body also no part of our ego must lag behind or be neglected right in the morning after getting up you will brush your body with a soft brush until your skin turns faintly reddish by doing so your paws will open and be able to breathe more freely besides the kidneys are exonerated for the most part then wash your whole body or the upper part of it at least with cold water and rub it with a rough towel until you feel quite warm sensitive people may use lukewarm water especially in the cold season this procedure ought to become a day's routine and be kept for lifetime it is so refreshing and removes tiredness in addition to this you should practice morning gymnastics at least for some minutes a day to keep your body flexible i shall not put up a special program of such gymnastic exercise as everybody can draw it up according to his age and personal liking what matters chiefly is to get your body elastic mystery of breathing breathing is to be given your very careful consideration normally each living creature is bound to breathe there is no life at all without breathing it is obvious that a magician ought to know more than the mere fact of inhaling oxygen together with nitrogen which the lungs absorb and exhale as nitrogen the lungs cannot exist without breathing and food all we need for our life and what preserves our life say breathing and food is tetrapola four elemental plus the fifth the vital element or okosha principle as we have said in the theoretical part about the elements but the air we are inhaling has a finer degree of density than the grossly material food has but according to the universal laws both of them have the same nature being tetrapolar and serving to keep the body alive let us therefore turn to breathing oxygen is subject to the fiery element and nitrogen to the element of water the airy element is the mediating element and the earth element is that which holds together the oxygen and the nitrogen the okosha or etheric element is the lawful causal or divine principle just as in the great universe the nature hear the elements two of their polarity the electric as well as the magnetic fluid by normal or unconscious breathing the body is supplied only with as much elemental substance as is necessary for its normal preservation here also the supply depends on the consumption of elemental substance quite different it is with conscious breathing if we put a thought an idea or an image no matter whether it be concrete or abstract in the air to be inhaled it will take in the okosha principle of the air concerned and convey it through the electric and magnetic fluids to the air substance this impregnate air substance when conveyed to the lungs through the blood vessels will play a double role in the first place the material parts of the elements are destined to preserve the body secondly the electromagnetic fluid charged with the idea or the image will lead the electromagnetic air colored with the idea from the bloodstream through the astral matrix to the astral body and from there to the immortal spirit through the reflective mental matrix and this is the solution of the secret of breathing from the magic point of view many theologies utilize conscious breathing for instructive purposes as for example the hatha yoga system without knowing the right process several people have suffered severe damages of their health a fact only to blame on the extreme breathing exercises asked for by this system especially when such practices have been realized without the guidance of an experienced leader guru in most of the cases the unexperienced reader has been persuaded to do these practice because they were promising a quick acquiring of occult powers if he wants the magician will reach this aim much more easily and sooner would the aid of the universal initiating system described so thoroughly and in all details in the present book consequently it is quite evident that it is not the quantity of the inhaled air that matters but the quality respectively the idea impregnating the air substance therefore it is not necessary nor even advisable to pump the lungs full with a lot of air putting a needle strain on them consequently you will do your breathing exercises slowly and calmly without any haste sit down comfortably relax the whole body and breathe in through the nose imagine that with the inhaled air health tranquility peace success or everything you are aiming at will pass into your body through the lungs and the blood the identic image of your idea must be so intense that the air you are inspiring is so strongly impregnated with your desire that it has already become reality you should not allow the slightest doubt about this fact to avoid weakening it will be enough to start with seven inhalings in the morning as well as at night increase the number of breathings gradually to one more in the morning and at night do not hurry or exaggerate for everything needs time in any case you should not proceed to the imagination of another desire different before the chosen one has not been completely accomplished in a pupil endowed with talent of a high order success will manifest itself at the earliest after seven days all depending on the degree of imagination and aptitude someone for the realization of his desires will need weeks even months because the kind of desires will also play an important role it is therefore advisable not to form egoistic wishes to begin with but confine them to the above-mentioned ones such as tranquility health peace and success do not extend breathing exercises to over more than half an hour later on a 10-minute standard will do for you conscious reception of food what has been said about breathing applies in the same way to taking nourishment here also the same elemental processes are going on as they happen to do in the air to be inhaled but the effect of the element is stronger and more material desires impressed on food have a considerable influence on the material plane where they are exposed to the most material emanations of the elements the magician therefore will do best to consider this aspect if he wants to achieve anything concerning his body or other material desires now sit down in front of your dish of food which you are going to eat and with the intensest possible imagination concentrate on your desire being embodied in the food and as effective as if it had indeed been realized already if you happen to be alone undisturbed and not watched by anyone hold your hands in a blessing manner above your food not having this opportunity at least impress your desire on the food you are taking in or close your eyes you may give the impression of saying a prayer before eating your meal a gesture which as a matter of fact is quite true then eat your food slowly but consciously with the intrinsic conviction that factually together with the food your desire is passing into your whole body down to the finest nerves the taking of food ought to be to you something similar to the communion of christians as it were a sacred act for the magic constitution it is not advisable to eat in a hurry all kinds of food and beverages are suitable for the magic impregnation with desires yet all the impregnate foods and drinks have to be consumed entirely and nothing should be left over do not read during a meal unfortunately a great deal of people are in this bad habit any kind of conversation is also undesirable one should eat only with the maintenance of one's desire it is to be noted that no opposite desire should associate for instance if you are aspiring after health through conscious or magic breathing you must not concentrate on success during your meal it is most advantageous to foster the same desire in breathing as well as in eating to avoid any opposite vibration or emanations in your body remember the proverb he who chases two hairs at the same time will never catch one who in conscious reception of food takes example in the eucharistic mystery will find an analogy to it here and remembering the words of our lord jesus christ take and eat for this is my flesh take and drink for this is my blood he will seize their true and primary meaning the magic of water water plays one of the most important parts not only in daily life being absolutely indispensable for drinking preparing food washing producing steam in factories etc but also in our magic development the watery element may prove to be a great factor as we have already stated in the theoretical part the watery element rules magnetism or the attractive force and it is just this property we shall utilize in the development of our faculties all the books dealing with animal magnetism emanation of odd and so on are acquainted with the fact that water can be magnetized or dized but far less it is known how to enlarge this quality or use it in a different way not only water but every kind of liquid has the specific property of attracting and according to the contraction holding fast no matter whether good or bad influences be concerned therefore we may consider the watery element especially the material kind of it as an accumulator the colder water is the greater is its accumulative capacity with its full specific weight namely at 39 degrees fahrenheit 4 degrees celsius above 0 it is most responsive this notion is not so decisive for the difference of receptivity of water or other liquids up to 43 degrees fahrenheit six degrees celsius above zero is so insignificant and so faintly visible that only a thoroughly trained magician can recognize these differences if by increase of heat water grows lukewarm its receptivity is rapidly diminishing between 97 to 99 degrees fahrenheit 36 to 37 degrees celsius it becomes neutral to magnetism attention here our concern is only with the specific properties of the attractive power and its practical value with respect to magnetism which results from the interaction of the elements as an undeniable matter of fact the impregnation through the akosha principle present in each substance consequently in physical water two with a desire can be operated in any object and at any temperature which so ever a piece of bread as well as a hot soup or a cup of coffee or tea might be loaded or charged magically but this charge does not depend on the accumulative capacity of the watery element but takes place through the causal principle of the fifth power of the elements and is brought about by the electromagnetic fluid of the element concerned it is important to pay attention to this difference to avoid errors for instance it is quite impossible to magnetize a dish of hot soup because the accumulating power of the watery element by the expansion of the heat present in the water is balanced or increased if it rises above 99 degrees fahrenheit 37 degrees celsius the soup however can be impregnated with the corresponding desire now let us regard the magic of water from the practical side every time you are washing your hands think intensively that by washing you wipe the dirt off your body not only but also the uncleanliness of your soul think of failure trouble dissatisfaction illness being likewise respectively washed off and turned over to the water wash yourself if possible under the tap so that the dirty water can run off immediately and think at this moment that your weaknesses too are flowing off together with this water if you have nothing else but a washbowl at your disposal do not forget to throw the water you were using away immediately so that nobody else can contact it afterwards you can also dip your hands into cold water for a little while and concentrate on the magneto-astral attractive force drawing all weaknesses out of your body and your soul be firmly convinced that all failures are passing into the water you will be surprised at the success of this exercise after a short time this water also is to be thrown away at once extraordinarily effective is this exercise if you can manage it in summer while taking a bath in the river when the whole body except for the head of course is beneath the water you can do this exercise also the other way round by magnetizing the water you are willing to use or by impregnating it with your desire remaining firmly convinced that through washing the power will pass into your body and the desire be realized he who has time to spare can combine both exercises by stripping off all evil in one water say under the tap or in a separate basin and then washing himself in another basin with the water impregnated with his desire in this case namely the first exercise when you are washing off the evil you have to utilize a soap female adepts besides the two possibilities aforementioned have a third opportunity they will concentrate their magnetism on the fact that water makes the face and skin look much younger more elastic and thus more attractive it is therefore advisable not only to wash the face but dip the whole face into the water for some seconds this procedure is to be repeated at least seven times in one turn a bit of borax may be added to the water for this purpose there is a further opportunity given to the magician which ought not to be overlooked i mean the magnetic eye bath in the morning the magician dips his face into a water which has been bald on the previous day using a half-filled washing basin and opens his eyes in this water he rolls the eyes in all directions repeating this exercise equally seven times at first he will have the sensation of a slight stinging in his eyes but this will disappear as soon as the eyes get accustomed to the exercise anyone suffering from a weak eyesight may add a thin decoction of eyebrite euphrate herber euphrasia to the water this eye bath makes the eyes resistant against changes of weather and consequently strengthens the visual faculty makes good the weakness of sight and the eyes become clear and shining do not forget respectively to magnetize the water destined to this purpose and to impregnate it with your concentrated wish advanced pupils who are training for clairvoyance are offered the opportunity here of promoting their clairvoyant faculties that is all for the moment about the material development and training of the body summary of all exercises of step one one magic mental training one thought control two discipline of thoughts three subordination of thoughts to one control of thoughts twice a day from one to ten minutes to two suppression of certain thoughts holding on to a self-chosen thought provoking vacancy of mind to three magical diarising self-criticism planning of thought trains for the day or the week ahead two magic psychic training one introspection of self-knowledge two making of the black and white mirrors of the soul with respect to the elements in three spheres of activity three magic physical training one habituation to normal and reasonable mode of life two setting up exercises three conscious breathing four conscious eating eucharistic mystery five magic of water the time limit for the completion of these exercises is fixed from a fortnight up to one month and is meant for people of average aptitudes those who have already practiced concentrating and meditating should get along with this space of time such as are not yet experienced at all will of course have to extend their training period success depending chiefly on the individuality of the people for the practice it would be useless for him to pass from one step to the next without having completed the foregoing one in such a way that he is well up in it end of the first step step two auto suggestion or the secret of subconsciousness before proceeding to describe the exercises of the second step let me explain the secret of the subconscious and its practical consequences in the same way as normal consciousness has its seat in the soul and is activated by the cerebrum in the body consequently the head subconsciousness is a property of the soul residing in the cerebellum that is the back part of the head with respect to the magical practice let us deal with the study of the psychological function of the cerebellum consequently the subconscious in every individual that is in his right senses the normal sphere of consciousness is intact that is he always and at any time is capable of making use of the functions of normal consciousness as it results from our investigations there is no power in the universe nor in man either which does not vary between opposites hence we may consider subconsciousness as opposite to normal consciousness that which in normal consciousness we subsume by the concepts of thinking feeling willing memory reason intellect is reflected in our subconsciousness in a contrary way practically speaking we can regard our subconsciousness as our opponent the incentive or the impulse to all that is undesirable such as our passions our failures and weaknesses is originating just in this very sphere of consciousness now to the pupil in the introspection falls the task of disclosing the work of this subconsciousness according to the key of the elements or the tetrapolar magnet this is a satisfactory task in as much as the pupil will acquire self-reliance by his own reflection or meditation hence subconsciousness is the incentive of all we do not wish for let us learn how to transmute this so to speak antagonistic aspect of our ego so that it not only does no harm but on the contrary will help to realize our desires subconsciousness needs time and space in the material world for its realization two basic principles valid for all things that have to be transmuted into reality from the causal world withdrawing time and space from the subconscious the opposite polarity will cease to bring its influence to bear upon us and we shall be able to realize our wishes through the subconscious this sudden elimination of the subconscious offers the key for the practical use of auto suggestion if for example we inculcate in the subconsciousness the wish of not giving in tomorrow or any other time to any of our passions say smoking or drinking alcohol subconsciousness will have time enough to put some hindrance directly or indirectly in our way in most of these cases mainly in presence of feeble or underdeveloped willpower subconsciousness will nearly always succeed in taking us by surprise or causing failures on the other hand if we exclude the concepts of time and space from subconsciousness while impregnating it with a desire only the positive pole of subconsciousness will affect us normal consciousness being equated and our impregnate desire must have the success we are expecting this knowledge and the possibilities related to it are of the greatest importance for the magical development and have therefore to be considered as far as self-suggestion is concerned the phrasing to choose for auto suggestion must always be expressed in the present and imperative form you should not say i shall stop drinking or smoking or so the correct form is i do not smoke i do not drink or else i do not like smoking or drinking and so on and so forth according to whatever you wish to suggest in a positive or a negative sense the key or clue to self-suggestion is to be found in the form of the phrasing it is that which always and in every respect has to be considered if you wish to do auto suggestion through subconsciousness subconsciousness is acting in the most effective and penetrating way during the night when man is asleep in the state of sleep the activity of normal consciousness is suspended subconsciousness working in its place the most appropriate time for auto suggestion receptivity therefore is the moment when the body is resting drowsily in bed that is immediately before falling asleep as well as immediately after waking up when we remain still in a sort of being half awake that does not mean that a different time would be quite unsuitable for self-suggestion but these two moments are most promising subconsciousness being most responsive then that is why the magician will never go to sleep in an emotional attitude such as anger depression worries which would have an unfavorable influence in his subconsciousness going on in the same train of thoughts he had fallen asleep with look here always go to sleep with peaceful and harmonious thoughts or ideas about success health and pleasant feelings before you are deciding for auto suggestion practice make up a small chain of wooden or glass pearls about thirty to forty if you have difficulties in procuring such a string of pearls a piece of ordinary string will do fine tie 30 to 40 knots in it and the little expedient for self-suggestion is completed it is only meant to avoid counting when you are reiterating the suggestive formula over and over and not to divert your attention this little gadget will also serve to make sure how many disturbances happened during a certain time when you were practicing concentration and meditation exercises all you have to do is to move a bead or a knot at every interruption the practical use of auto suggestion is very simple if you have worded that which you want to achieve in a precise sentence respecting the present and imperative form such as i feel better and better every day or i do not like smoking or drinking or i am healthy content happy then you may pass to the real practice immediately before falling asleep take your string of pearls or knots and whether in an undertone softly or in your mind only according to your surroundings repeat the phrase you have chosen and move one bead or not at every repetition until you arrive at the end of the string now you know for sure that you did repeat the formula 40 times the main point is that you do imagine your wish as being realized already and having actual existence should you not yet feel sleepy after the repetition of the entire string of beads engage yourself for a longer time with the idea that your wish has been accomplished and keep on doing so until you fall at last asleep with your desire still in mind you must try to transfer your desire to the sleep should you fall asleep while reiterating the formula and without having reached the end of the string for a second time the purpose will nevertheless be achieved in the morning when you are not yet quite up and have some time to spare you ought to reach for the string of pearls once more and repeat the exercise some people get up several times during the night for discharging urine or for some other reasons if so they can repeat this exercise as well and all the sooner they will attain their desired aim now the question is arising what kind of wishes can be accomplished by self-suggestion principally every wish can be fulfilled as far as mind soul and body are concerned for example refining of the character repression of ugly qualities weaknesses disorders recovery of health removal and promotion of various aptitudes development of faculties and so on certainly desires having nothing to do with the personality such as lottery prices and such like can never be fulfilled you should never pass on to choose a new wish formula before you are not absolutely satisfied with the result of the first one who is starting seriously and systematically in these exercises will soon be amazed at the favorable influence of auto suggestion and hold on to this method all his life magic mental training 2 concentration exercises on the first step of our magical mental training we have learned how to control and master our thoughts now let us go on to teach you how to raise the capacity of mental concentration in order to strengthen the willpower visual put some objects in front of you say a knife a fork a cigarette case a pencil a box of matches and fix your eyes on one of these objects for a while try to remember their shapes and colors exactly then close your eyes and endeavor to imagine a certain object plastically in exactly the same form as it is in reality should the object vanish from your imagination try to recall it again in the beginning you will be successful in this experiment for a few seconds only but when persevering and repeating this exercise the object will become more distinct and reappearance and disappearance will take place more rarely from one exercise to the next one do not be frightened by initial failures and if you feel tired change to the next object at the beginning do not exercise longer than 10 minutes but after a while you may extend the exercise up to half an hour little by little in order to check disturbances use the string of beads or knots described in the chapter about auto suggestion move one bead at every disturbance or interruption so you will be able later on to state how many disorders happened in the course of an exercise the purpose of the exercise is accomplished if you can hold on to one object without any interruption for five minutes if you have got to this point you may pass on imagining the objects with your eyes open now the objects ought to make the impression of hanging in the air and be visible before your eyes in such a plastic shape as to seemingly be tangible apart from the one object you imagined nothing else of its surroundings must be noticed check eventual disturbances with the aid of the string of beads here also if you have succeeded in holding onto any object hanging plastically in the air for five minutes without the least incident the task of the exercise has been fulfilled auditory after the visual concentration let us make an inquiry about the auditory concentration at the beginning the creative imagination has to perform a certain role it is as it were impossible to say imagine the ticking of a clock or something like that because the concept of imagination generally involves a pictorial representation which cannot be said about auditory concentration exercises for the sake of a better understanding we also say imagine you hear the ticking of a clock therefore let us employ this kind of expression now do imagine you are hearing the ticking of a clock on the wall you will succeed in doing so only for a few seconds at the beginning exactly as in the foregoing exercise but persisting in your exercise you will hear the sound more and more distinctly without any disturbance the string of beads or knots will benefit here also for checking the disturbances afterward try to listen to the ticking of a pocket watch or a wrist watch or the chime of bells tuned in various harmony you may also practice other auditory concentration experiments such as the sounding of a gong the different noises of hammering knocking scratching shuffling thunderclaps the soft rustling of the wind increasing to the howling of the storm the tunes of a violin or a piano and other instruments when doing these exercises it is most important to keep within the limits of auditory concentration not allowing for pictorial imagination should such an imagination emerge you must banish it immediately never must the chiming of the bell provoke the imagination of the bell itself this exercise is completed as soon as you are able to keep this auditory imagination for five minutes sensory another exercise is the sensory concentration try to produce the sensations of cold warmth gravity likeness hunger first tiredness and hold on to this feeling for at least five minutes without the slightest visual or auditory imagination if you have acquired the faculty of concentration in such a degree as to be able to produce any sensation you like and hold it fast you may pass on to the next exercise all factory now let us throw some light upon the olfactory concentration imagine you are smelling the scent of various flowers such as roses lilacs violets or other perfumes and hold on to this imagination without allowing a pictorial image of the respective flower to emerge try to practice the same with disagreeable smells of different kinds exercise this kind of concentration until you will be able to imaginarily bring about any scent at will and keep it for five minutes at least taste our last exercise will deal with the taste concentration without thinking of any food or drink or without imagining the same you have to concentrate on taste choose the thumping sensations of taste such as sweet bitter salt and acid to begin with having got a certain skill hearing you may carry out an experiment on the taste of diverse spices at the discretion of the novice if he has succeeded in producing any sensation of the taste chosen and holding onto it for at least five minutes the purpose of this exercise is fulfilled you will state that one or the other of the trainees will meet with smaller or greater difficulties in practicing these concentration exercises this means that the cerebral function with respect to the concerned sense has been neglected or imperfectly developed most of the teaching systems only pay attention to one or two at best to three functions concentration exercises performed with all the five senses strengthen your mind your willpower and you learn not only how to control all senses but also to develop and finally master them perfectly a magician's senses must all be developed equally and he must be able to control them these exercises are a paramount importance for the magical development and should therefore never be omitted magic psychic training too astral balance with respect to the elements in the first phase the pupil has learned how to practice introspection he has recorded his good and bad properties in accordance with the four elements and has divided them in three groups this way he has made two soul mirrors a good white one and a bad black one these two soul mirrors represent his psychic character now he must find out from these records which elemental powers on the good as well as the evil side are prevailing in him and endeavor to establish the balance of these elemental influences at all events without a balance of the element in the astral body or in the soul there is no possible magical progress or rise transmutation or refinement of the soul consequently we must next turn on this step to establish this psychic equipoise if the magician novice disposes of a sufficient amount of willpower he may pass on to master the passions or qualities which exercise the greatest influence on him should he not own a sufficiently strong volition he may start from the opposite side by balancing the small weaknesses first and fighting against greater faults and weaknesses bit by bit until he has brought them under control for mastering the passions the scholar is offered three possibilities by auto suggestion one systematical utilization of auto suggestion in the way we described previously by transmutation two transmutation of passions into the opposite good qualities attainable through auto suggestion or respectively through repeated meditations on and continuous assurance of the good qualities by fight or control three attention and volition by using this method you will not allow for any outbreak of the passion fighting it right in the bud evidently this method is the most difficult and appropriate for people only disposing of a good deal of volition or willing to achieve a strong willpower by fighting against their passions if the novice has time enough on hand and wishes to advance as fast as possible in his development he may use all the three methods the most profitable way is to orientate all methods towards one single direction for example conscious eating magic of water and so forth then success will not be far off the purpose of this step is the balancing of the elements in the soul the scholar ought therefore to endeavor quickly and surely to get rid of those passions which most hinder him from being successful in the magic art under no circumstances should he start with exercises belonging to the steps ahead before being absolutely possessed with the exercises at the second step and having booked a sweeping success especially in balancing the elements two the refinement of character should be aspired after during the entire course but as early as on this level faults rapidly gaining ground and bad qualities handicapping development in a higher order ought to be eradicated magic physical training 2. conscious poor breathing the tasks of the magical training of the body according to step one must be retained and ought to become a daily habit such as washing with cold water rubbing the body from head to toe athletic exercises in the morning magic of water conscious breathing and so on and so forth the second step training of the body orders a change of the breathing exercises in the previous step we have learned how to breathe consciously and convey the desire inhaled together with the air through the akasha principle to the bloodstream via the lungs in this chapter one i'm going to describe the conscious poor breathing our skin has a double function that is the breathing and the secretion therefore we may consider the skin as a second piece of lungs and as a second kidney of the body everybody will understand now for which important reason we have recommended dry brushing rubbing washing with cold water and all the other directions first of all this was intended to exonerating our lungs completely and our kidneys partially and secondly to stimulate the pores to a greater activity it is certainly superfluous to explain how very profitable all this is for the health from the magic point of view conscious poor breathing is of the utmost interest for us and therefore we shall pass on to practice instantly sit down comfortably in an armchair or lie down on a sofa and relax all your muscles try to think that with each inspiration not only your lungs are breathing that is inhaling air but the whole body is doing so be firmly convinced that together with your lungs simultaneously each single pore of your body receives vital power and conveys it to the body you ought to feel like a dry sponge witch when dipped into water sucks it in greedily you must have the same feeling when breathing in this way the vital power will pass from the etheric principle and your surroundings to yourself according to his character each individual will feel this entering a vital power through the pause in a different manner when after a certain amount of time and repeated exercises you are skilled in inhaling through the lungs and with the whole body simultaneously connect the two breathing methods to your desire inhaling that is breathing in health success peace mastering of passions or whatever you need most urgently the fulfillment of your desire imparted in the present and commandment moods is to be realized not only through the lungs and the bloodstream but through your whole body if you have attained a certain skill in this experiment you may also influence exhaling magically by imagining that at each breathing out you are secreting the opposite to your desire such as weakness failure trouble and so on if you have succeeded in exhaling and inhaling through your lungs and your whole body this exercise is completed conscious position of the body the next exercise will deal with the control of your body it needs a great skill to sit quietly and comfortably and therefore it is necessary to learn how to do it sit down on a chair in such a way that your spine remains straight at the beginning you are allowed to lean on the back of the chair hold the feet together so that they form a right angle with the knees sit relaxed without any strain of the muscles both your hands resting lightly on your thighs set an alarm clock to run off after five minutes now close your eyes and watch your whole body at first you will notice that the muscles are becoming restless in consequence of the nervous stimulus force yourself as energetically as you can to persevere to sit quietly however easy this exercise seems to be as a matter of fact it is rather difficult for a beginner if the knees tend to separate constantly you may tie the feet together with a towel or a string to begin with if you are able to sit without jerking and any special effort for five minutes each new exercise has to be extended one minute longer if you have managed to sit at least for half an hour quietly comfortably and without any trouble this exercise will be finished when you have arrived at this point you will state that there is no better position for the body to relax and to rest should anyone wish to use these exercises of physic carriage for the purpose of developing the willpower he may make out various carriages at his own discretion provided he be able to sit relaxed and comfortable without any disturbance at all for a full hour the indian yoga system recommends and describes quite a lot of such positions in the chapter of asanas asserting that one may win various occult powers by mastering them it must be left undecided whether it is on the strength of these positions of the body asanas that such powers are set free we need a certain position for our magic development no matter which one the simplest being that which we described above it is meant to reassure the body and strengthen the willpower body control in everyday life at will the main point will always be that mind and soul are in need of an undisturbed action of the body a problem to be discussed in special exercises further on those scholars who become very tired mentally as well as psychically in performing the exercises at the first and second steps and fall regularly asleep during the concentration and meditation exercises will do best practicing them in the aforementioned position the beginner ought to practice this sort of body control in his everyday life he will find a great deal of opportunity by observation and attention for example if you feel tired force yourself to do something else in spite of your tiredness irrespective of this being any hobby or a short walk if you feel hungry put off the meal for half an hour if you feel thirsty do not drink on the spot but wait for a while being used to hurry all the time try to act slowly and the other way round anyone being peter's slow coach should make a point of working fast it is entirely up to the scholar to control and force body and nerves by willpower this is the end of the second step exercises summary of all exercises of step two one magic mental training one auto suggestion or the unveiled enigmas of the unconscious two concentration exercises a visual optical b auditory c sensory d or factory e taste exercises concerning the elimination of thoughts negative state are continued and deepened here two magic psychic training may go astral balance with respect to the elements transmutation or refinement of character a by fight or control b by auto suggestion c by transmutation or transforming into the opposite quality three magic physical training a conscious poor breathing be conscious position of the body carriage see body control in everyday life at will before falling asleep the most beautiful and purest ideas are to be taken along into the sleep end of the second step step three knowledge daring volition silence these are the four pillars of solomon's temple that is the microcosm and the macrocosm upon which the sacred science of magic is built according to the four elements they are the fundamental qualities which must be inherent in each magician if he aspires to the highest perfection in science everyone can acquire magic knowledge by diligence and assiduity and mastery of the laws will lead him step by step to the supreme wisdom volition is the aspect of willpower which can be obtained by toughness patience and perseverance in the holy science and chiefly in its practical use he who does not intend to satisfy his sheer curiosity only but is in earnest willing to enter the path leading to the lofty heights of wisdom must possess an unshakable will daring he who is not afraid of sacrifices nor hindrances indifferent to other people's opinions who keeps his objective firmly in his mind no matter whether he meet with success or with failure will disclose the mystery silence the braggart who is talking big and exhibiting his wisdom will never be a genuine magician the true magician will never make himself conspicuous with his authority on the contrary will he do anything not to give himself away silence is power the more reticent he is about his knowledge and experience without segregating from other people the more he will be awarded by the supreme source who aims at acquiring knowledge and wisdom may do his utmost to obtain the aforesaid four fundamental qualities for nothing at all will be achieved in holy magic without these requirements now we'll follow the third step exercises magic mental training 3 concentration of thoughts with two or three senses at once in the second grade course we have learned how to practice sensorial concentration by training each sense on this step we shall widen our concentration power expanding from one sense to two or three senses at once i shall quote some examples with the help of which the skilled student will be able to arrange his own sphere of action imagine plastically a clock hanging on the wall with its pendulum swinging to and fro your imagination must be so perfect and so constructive as if there were indeed in factually a clock hanging on the wall try to perceive it and to hear its ticking on the wall hold on to this double imagination of seeing and hearing for five minutes in the beginning you will succeed in doing so for seconds only but by means of frequent repetition you will be able to hold on to your imagination for a longer while practice makes perfect repeat this experiment with a similar object such as a gong of which you must hear not only the sound but also see the person sounding it or try to imagine you see a brook and hear the rustling of the water or a cornfield stirred by the wind and you are listening to the whispering of the breeze now try for a change and look for similar experiments arranging them so that two or more senses are affected other experiments with optical and acoustic imageries may be composed where for example the eyes and tactual sensations sense of touch are engaged all your senses have to be quickened and trained for concentration you should make a special point of seeing hearing and feeling all of which is indispensable for progress in magic i cannot emphasize enough the high significance these exercises have for your development as a magician practice such exercises carefully and daily if you will be able to hold on to two or three sense concentrations at the same time for at least five minutes your task will be accomplished if you begin to feel tired during the concentration exercises stop and cease to go on postpone the exercises till a more favorable moment when you feel mentally and physically fitter beware of falling asleep during an exercise has evidenced early morning hours to be most suitable for concentration work as soon as you have attained a certain skill in the preceding concentration exercises and if consequently you are capable to engage two or three senses at one time for at least five minutes you may go on concentration on objects landscapes places choose a comfortable position again which for all concentration work is absolutely necessary close your eyes and form an imaginary picture in full plasticity of a well-known country part village place house garden meadow heath wood etc hold on to this imagery every trifle detail such as color light and form is to be kept exactly in mind all that you are imagining ought to be modeled in such plastic forms as to allow you to touch them as if you were present there factually you must not let anything slip nothing should escape your observation if the image becomes blurred or is about to vanish at all recall it again and all the more distinctly if you have managed to hold the plasticity of the picture fast for at least five minutes the task is achieved next let us try to apply the auditory concentration to the same imagery perhaps you were imagining a wonderful forest listen then at the same time to the warblings of the birds the murmuring of the brook the rustling of the wind the humming of the bees and so on if you did succeed in one imagery try a similar one you have arranged yourself this exercise will be fulfilled as soon as you are able to imagine any region place or spot you like and engage two or three senses at once for as long as five minutes if you have reached this degree of concentration try to do the same exercises with your eyes open whether fixing your look at one definite point or staring into vacancy the physical surroundings then must no longer exist for you and the imagery you chose is to appear before your eyes floating in the air like a fatam organa when you are able to hold such an imagery fast for five minutes exactly you may choose another one the exercise is to be regarded as fully completed if you will be able to produce any imagery you like with your eyes open and keep it with one or several senses for five minutes in all of your further concentration exercises you ought to proceed in the same way as after reading a novel when you unfold the images of the single events in your mind we have learned how to form representations of places and localities we know and have seen before already now let us try to imagine localities we never saw before in our life at first we shall do it with our eyes closed and if we succeed in doing so with two or three senses at once for five minutes let us reopen them the exercise is fully completed if we have indeed managed to keep this imagination for five minutes with our eyes open concentration on animals and human beings now let us pass over from inanimate objects such as places villages houses woods to living creatures we shall imagine various animals such as dogs cats birds horses cows calves chickens etc as plastically as we did before with our objects of concentration begin with your eyes closed for five minutes and later on with your eyes open mastering this exercise imagine the animals in their movements as much as a kitten washing itself or catching a mouse drinking milk or a dog barking running about a bird flying or picking food and so forth the scholar may choose such or similar scenes at his own liking first with his eyes closed and later on opening them if you manage doing it for five minutes without any disturbance the purpose is fulfilled and you may go on to the next exercise now concentrate on men in the same kind of way start with friends relatives acquaintances deceased people later imagine strangers you never saw before first their features only then the whole head and finally the fully dressed body always beginning with your eyes closed and opening them after a while you must have reached a minimum of five minutes before you pass over to the next exercise dealing with men in their movements such as walking working talking etc if you have noticed a success with one sense say visually add another sense for example trying auditory imagination so that you can hear the individual talking and imagine his voice endeavor to adapt imagination always to the reality for example the modulation of the voice slow or fast speech just as the person of your imagination actually does or did first with closed eyes then with the eyes open if you have booked any success in this field two concentrate your imagination on quite strange people retaining their different features and voices they may be people of both sexes and of any age which so ever after that imagine people of other races women men young and old children for example negros indians chinese japanese makeshift with books or magazines visits to a museum can also do for this purpose having managed all this and keeping the imagination for five minutes with the eyes closed as well as open your magic mental training of the third step will be complete all these exercises have required perseverance patience persistence and toughness to cope with the enormous difficulties of the task but those of our scholars who will master them will be much satisfied with the powers they won through these concentration exercises the next step will teach them how to deepen these powers such concentration exercises do not only strengthen the willpower and the concentrative faculty but all the intellectual and mental forces lifting the magic capacities of the mind on a higher level and besides they are indispensable as a preliminary practice for thought transference telepathy mental wandering television and clairvoyance and other things more without these faculties the magic disciple would never get on you ought therefore to make every effort to work carefully and conscientiously magic psychic training 3 inhaling of the element in the whole body before starting on the training for this step the astral equipoise of the elements in the soul has to be established by introspection and self-control unless you wish to do mischief to yourself if it is absolutely sure that none of the element is prevailing you ought to keep working on the refinement of the character in the course of the development but you might as well go on to work with the elements in the astral body the task of this step will be to acquire the basic qualities of the elements producing and dissolving them in the body at will we are already acquainted with the theory of the action of the elements let us deal with the practice fire fire with its expansion or extendability in all directions has the specific quality of heat and therefore is spherical let us then first of all acquire this quality and produce it at will in the body as well as in the soul in body control we chose an attitude allowing us to remain in a comfortable position free of any disturbance indians call this position asana for the sake of better understanding we shall also use this expression henceforth take in the asana position and imagine yourself in the center of the fiery element which in the shape of a ball envelops the whole universe imagine all around you even the entire universe being fiery now inhale the fire element with your nose and at the same time with your whole body poor breathing draw deep breaths regularly without pressing air or straining the lungs the material and the astral body ought to resemble to an empty vessel into which the element is being inhaled better to say sucked in with each breath the heat of the element has to be increased and pressed into the body with each breath this heat ought to grow more and more intense with every breath the heat and the expansion power must become stronger the fiery pressure higher and higher until you feel yourself at last fiery red hot this whole process of inhaling the fiery element through the body is of course a purely imaginary occurrence and should be exercised with the utmost plastic imagination of the element start on seven times inhaling the fire element and increase each exercise by one breath more an average of 20 to 30 breaths will do only physically strong pupils of a great willpower are allowed to exceed this number at discretion use the string of beads or not again to spare counting the breaths by moving one pearl or not with each inhaling in the beginning the imaginary heat will be perceived psychically only but with every repeated experiment the heat will become psychically as well as physically more perceptible from a rise of temperature outbreak of perspiration it can actually increase to a fever once the scholar has managed to establish the balance of the element in the soul such an accumulation of elements in his body can do him no harm having finished the exercise of imaginary accumulation of the fiery element you will through imagination feel the heat and the expansion of the fire and now you may start on the exercise in the opposite succession inhaling normally through the mouth and exhaling through it and through the whole body poor breathing the fiery element successively into the entire universe again the number of breaths done when exhaling the element has to correspond exactly to those of inhaling the fiery element for example if you began inhaling with seven breaths you also must exhale seven breaths this is very important because after finishing the exercise the scholar should have the impression that not the smallest particle of this element has remained in him and the sensation of heat produced in him must disappear again therefore it is advisable to use the string of pearls or knots for breathing in as well as for breathing out do the exercises with eyes closed at first and then with open eyes the tibet explorer and traveler alexandra david neal described in her books a similar experiment pretending it to be practiced by the llamas under the name of tumor which is however very imperfect for practical purposes chiefly for europeans and not at all suitable for any student of magic in the orient there are adepts who perform this exercise called sodona for years and are able to condense the fire element to such a degree that they walk about naked and bare feet even in the coldest season without being affected by the cold they can indeed dry wet towels which they are wrapping around their bodies in no time by accumulating the fire element they affect even their environs which directly means the surrounding nature as well so that they succeed in melting snow and ice not only around themselves but at a distance of kilometers such and similar phenomena can be produced by a european also if he can afford the necessary time for it for our progress in magic we need however master not only one but all the elements a fact which is absolutely correct from the magic standpoint so much for this air let us pass now to the exercises concerning the airy element what has been said about the fiery element applies in the same way to the airy element but for the fact that a different imagination of the senses has to be considered take up the same comfortable position close your eyes and imagine yourself to be in the middle of the mass of air which is filling the whole universe you must not perceive anything of your surroundings and nothing should exist for you but the air-filled space embracing the whole universe you are inhaling the aerial element into your empty vessel of the soul and the material body through the whole body breathing with the lungs and the pores every breath is filling the whole body to an increasing extent and with more air you have got to hold fast the imagination of your body being filled by each breath with air in such a way that it resembles to a balloon combine it at the same time with the imagination that your body is becoming constantly lighter as light as air itself the sensation of lightness should be so intense that finally you do not feel your body at all in the same way you did begin with the fiery element start now also with seven times inhaling and exhaling this exercise done you should again have the positive feeling that not the smallest particle of the air element has remained in your body and consequently you should feel in the same normal condition as before to avoid any counting take the string of beads again increase the number of breaths inspiration and expiration from one exercise to the next but do not overstep the number of forty by constant practice of this experiment adepts will succeed in producing phenomena of levitation such as walking on the surface of the water floating in the air displacement of the body and many more especially if one concentrates on a single element only but a magician is not satisfied by one-sided phenomena because this would not agree with his aims he wants to penetrate far deeper into the cognition and the mastery and achieve more water now follows the description of the practice concerning the water element take up your position you are accustomed to by now close your eyes and forget all around you imagine the whole universe is like an enormous ocean and you happen to be in the center of it through each whole body breath your body is filled with this element you should feel the cold of the water in your whole body if you have filled up your body with this element completely by inhaling seven times breathe out equally seven times again with each breathing out you withdraw the water element from your body so that not the smallest particle will remain in it at the last exhaling here again the string of beads may be a great help for you with each new exercise take one more breath the oftener you will practice this exercise the more distinctly you will feel the cold properties of the water element you ought to feel as it were like a lump of ice each of the exercises should not extend over more than 20 minutes as time goes on you ought to be able to keep your body as cold as ice even in the hottest summertime oriental adepts master this element in such a degree that they can perform the most astonishing phenomena straight away for example they produce rain during the hot or dry season and stop it again at will they can ban thunderstorms calm down the roaring ocean control all the animals below the water and so on such and similar phenomena are no miracles for a real magician who understands them perfectly earth all that is left to me is to describe the last element say that of the earth take up your routine position as you did before this time imagine the whole universe being the earth with yourself sitting in the middle of it but do not imagine the earth as a lump of clay but being a dense earthy material the specific property of this earthy material is density and gravity now you ought to fill your body with this heavy material begin again with seven breaths and increase one breath more with each new exercise you must manage to concentrate so much of the earthy material into yourself that your body seems as heavy as a lump of lead and almost paralyzed by the weight breathing out happens in the same way as it did with the other elements at the end of this exercise you ought to feel as normal as before the beginning the duration of this exercise is also limited to 20 minutes at the utmost this sadhana exercise is practiced by a great deal of tibetan llamas mostly in such a way that they begin meditating on a lump of clay dissecting it and going on to meditate again on it the genuine magician knows better how to approach this element in a much simpler way and master it without the help of such a difficult meditation process the color of the different elements may serve as a useful resort to imagination as far as fire is red the air blue water is greenish blue and the earth yellow grey or black colour vision or sensation is quite individual but not absolutely necessary anyone believing it to favor his work may make use of it in the beginning what chiefly matters in our exercises is the sensory imagination after a longer spell of exercises everybody should be able for example to produce heat with the fire element in such a degree that it can be demonstrated with a thermometer as a fever heat this preliminary exercise of element mastery is irremissible and needs to be given the utmost attention manifold is the kind of phenomena and a depth can produce say in controlling the earth element and it is left to everybody to meditate on this problem for himself mastery of the elements is the darkest chapter of magic about which very little has been set up to date because the greatest arcanum is hidden in it at the same time it is however the most important magical domain and he who does not possess the element will scarcely get on in magic science magic physical training 3 retaining of step 1 which has to become a habit the first step of this training course ought to have become second nature with you by now let us therefore go into greater details here the position of repose of the body is to be kept during half an hour the poor breathing of the whole body shall now be limited to certain single organs the beginner must be enabled to allow any part of his body to breathe at will through the pause one begins with the feet and finishes with the head the practice is as follows sit in your usual position and close your eyes transfer yourself with your consciousness into one of your legs it will not matter whether you start with the right or the left leg imagine your leg like the lungs inhaling and exhaling the vital force together with your pulmonary breath from the universe consequently the vital power is inhaled sucked in from the whole universe and exhaled secreted back again into the universe if you have succeeded in doing so after seven breaths turn to the other leg now do breathe through both the legs at once having been successful hearing as well start with your hands take one first then the other hand in order to breathe later with both hands at the same time if you achieve the desired result let us step up to the next organs such as genitals bowels stomach liver lungs heart larynx and head the purpose of this exercise will be accomplished if you have got each organ of your body even the smallest to do breathing this exercise is all the more important as it gives us the opportunity of controlling each part of the body charging it with vital power healing and restoring it to life if we have managed to do all this on our own person it is not difficult to act on other bodies by transference of consciousness which fact plays an important part in the magnetic power transference consequently in the magic art of healing pay please the greatest attention to this exercise accumulation of vital power another exercise of magic body training is the accumulation of vital power we have already learned how to inhale to and to exhale from the universe vital power through the whole body for breathing now let us pass to the accumulation of vital power its practice is as follows by breathing through the lungs and pausing the whole body sit in your customary position and inhale the vital force out of the universe into your body through the lungs and the pores of your whole body but this time do not give back the vital power to the universe do keep it back in your body when breathing out do not think about anything at all and breathe out the consumed air quite regularly and evenly with each new breath you feel how you are inhaling more and more vital power accumulating as it were storing it in your body you need to feel the pressure of the vital force like compressed steam in yourself and imagine the compressed vital power coming out of your body like heat waves from a radiator with every breath the forces of pressure and radiation increase spreading and strengthening by meters after repeated exercises you must be able to emit your penetrating vital power even for miles you must actually feel the pressure and penetration of your rays practice makes perfect begin equally inhaling seven times and increase to one inspiration more every day each single exercise should be limited to 20 minutes at the most these exercises have to be practiced mainly in such tasks and experiments as require a great and intense expenditure of vital force say the treatment of sick people telepathy magnetizing of objects and so on if the vital power is no longer wanted in this accumulated form the body must be brought back again to its original tension because it is not advisable to walk about in everyday life in an over dimension tension it would over strain the nerves and cause nervous irritation exhaustion and other bad side effects the experiment is broken off by giving the accumulated force back to the universe through imagination while breathing out by doing so you will inhale pure air only and breathe out the tension of the vital force until attaining the sensation of equipoise after a longer practice the magician will succeed in rendering the vital force at once as it were in an explosive manner to the universe similar to a bursting tyre this abrupt elimination should not be practiced before your body has got a certain resisting power in different parts of the body having acquired a certain skill you may go on to achieve the same experiment with the single parts of the body slowly as it were step by step mainly specialize on your hands adepts do the same with their eyes too and thus they can fascinate and get under the spell of their will not only one individual but a great number of them sometimes even crowds of people a magician who can manage all this with his hands is known then for having blessing hands that's on which the mystery of blessing or of putting hands on sick people depends the exercise of this stage will have answered to its purpose if you have learned how to accumulate vital power not only in the whole body but in each single part of it and emit the rays of this accumulated force directly to the outside when you master this exercise the third stage of the magic physical training will be at an end appendix to step three the scholar who has arrived at this point of his magic development will already observe a general transmutation of his individuality his magic faculties will increase in all the spheres as to the mental sphere he will have attained a stronger willpower greater resistance a better memory a keener observation and a clear intellect in the astral sphere he will notice that he has become calmer and steadier and according to his aptitudes he will further develop the faculty still slumbering in him in the material world he will persuade himself that he feels healthier fitter and a sort of rejuvenated his vital force will by far surpass that of his fellow men and he will achieve a great deal in everyday life by means of his emissive power for example he will be able to free any room he is living in from unfavorable influences and fill it with his vital power instead he will be able to treat sick persons successfully even at remote distances because he can emit his rays for miles besides his emissive force allows him to charge objects with his desire the scholar then will find out for himself when and where he can best utilize his magical faculties but never ought he to forget that magic powers can be used for good as well as for egoistic purposes remember the quotation thou shalt reap what thou art sown let always be your final goal to do noble things and to make man better the technique of magnetism presents all possible variations of which we are going to show you some space impregnation through pulmonary and poor breathing of your entire body you inhale vital force pressing it with all your imagination into your whole body so that it as it were becomes dynamically radiant your body is something like the radiant energy the focus or let me say an individual sun with every inhaling you enforce the compressed vital power as well as the radiant energy and fill the room you live in with the aid of this radiant power the room must be literally sunlit with repeated and persistent exercises it is even possible to illuminate the room in darkness or at night to to such a degree that objects can be perceived not only by the experimenter himself but also by layman because it is possible in such a way to materialize the light of the vital force in the form of real daylight which properly speaking is a simple imagination exercise this phenomenon alone will of course not satisfy the magician who knows very well that vital force has a universal character being not only the carrier of his ideas thoughts and desires but also the realizer of his imagination and that he can attain all things through this vital power as for realization it depends on the plastic imagination if the experimenter has filled his work room with his radiant energy he ought to imagine what he wishes to attain for example all astral or magic influences existent in the room shall disappear and dissolve or the magician himself shall feel sound and safe in the room as well as all people coming in besides the magician may impregnate his rooms with the desire of being benefited in all his works by inspiration success etc advanced magicians screen their rooms from unwelcome people by rendering them restless and uncomfortable as soon as they enter the room so that they turn unwilling to remain in there such a room then is loaded or impregnated with protective or alarming ideas but it is possible to load any room in a more subtle way so that anyone who should enter the room without a special permission will feel sort of paralyzed and thrown back you see a magician is offered a lot of possibilities and with the help of these instructions you can find out other methods more the magician can give back the accumulated vital virtue to the universe when breathing out leaving the radiant or illuminating force in the room only with the aid of his imagination but through this same imagination he also can suggest the vital force from the universe directly to the room without accumulating it before by his physical power especially if he has got some practice in accumulating vital force this way he can impregnate a room even with his own desires imagination combined with willpower and faith and firm conviction knows no bounds these experiments of the magician do not depend on one definite room he may impregnate two or more rooms at the same time and load or charge an entire house with his vital force and radiant energy according to the aforesaid method as imagination knows neither time nor space he can do all this at the remotest distance as time goes on and his technique is improving he will be able to load any room whatever and wherever but with regard to his ethical development he will never make wrong use of his faculties but do noble things only and his power will be illuminated full practice makes perfect appendix to step 3 biomagnetism let us deal with another specific property of the vital energy which is a particular relevance for the magic work as we have already seen each object each animal each human being each form of ideas can be charged with vital force and the corresponding desire of realization the vital force however has the property of accepting any also strangers ideas and feelings influencing or combining them the concentrated vital force therefore would soon mingle with other ideas a fact which would reduce the effect of the impregnated thought or even scuttle it if the magician did not provoke a reinforced tension by frequent repetition thus reviving the desire or the idea but this often means loss of time and is not very favorable to the final success the desired influence will persist only as far as the tension is effective in the desired direction then the vital force will dissolve mingle with other vibrations and the effect is fading away by and by to prevent this a magician ought to be well acquainted with the laws of biomagnetism the vital force accepts not only an idea a concept a thought or a feeling but also involves time ideas this law respectively this specific property of the vital virtue must be considered when working with it or later on with the elements therefore when impregnating desires with the aid of vital energy remember time and space in magic work you have above all to consider the following rules working in the akosha principle is timeless and spaceless in the mental sphere you operate with the time in the astral sphere you work with the space shape color in the material world you work with time and space simultaneously in the light of some examples i am going to explain the functions of biomagnetism with the help of your vital force charge a room with the desire that you feel well in it enthrall this force with the desire that as long as you live in the room the influence should persist continue renewing and keep doing so even when you left the room and are absent for some time should anyone else enter your room ignoring that there is an accumulation of vital force he will feel very comfortable in your dwelling now and again you can reinforce the density and power of your radiant energy in your room by repeating the desire if you live in a room influenced in such a favorable way the stored vital force will always exert a good influence on your health consequently your body the vital force in this room has the desire vibration of the health if however you intend to do occult exercises in this room which have nothing at all to do with health following another thought vibration you will not book the same good results as in an unloaded room or in a room you have charged with a desire responsive to your idea therefore it is always advisable to load the room with the thought vibrations corresponding to your respective works and experiments so for instance you might charge a ring a stone or any other object with the wish that the person wearing it should be favored by fortune and success now there are two possibilities of fixing and timing the first method consists in fixing the vital virtue on the stone or the metal with your imagination and your concentrated wish timing it so that the force shall remain forever in it drawing even further force from the universe to bring fortune and success to the person concerned as soon as she will wear the object you may of course load the object you chose for a short time only if you like so that the influence is broken off as soon as the purpose aimed at is attained the second possibility is called the universal loading which is operated in the same way including however the concentrated wish that as long time as the object ring stone jewelry exists the bearer of it should be benefited by fortune success etc such universal loadings performed by an adept will keep their virtues and their effects for centuries as we have learned from the history of the egyptian mummies such fixed forces continue acting for thousands of years if a talisman or an object destined and loaded for a definite person individually falls into the hands of someone else he will not experience the least influence but if this object returns to the true owner this influence will go on acting now let me describe another field where vital force is active namely that of healing magnetism if a magician treats a sick person no matter whether personally by magnetic strokes or by putting on hands or at distance that is by imagination and willpower he must exactly observe the law of time if he wants to be successful the routine manner of magnetizing is as follows the magnetizer with the aid of imagination makes his vital force flow out of his body mostly from his hands into the sick person this method supposes the magnetizer to be positively sound and to have a surplus of vital force unless he will bring into danger his own health i am sorry to say that i have seen bad cases where the magnetizer by excessive transfer of his own vital force suffered so heavy damages of his health that he faced nearly a complete nervous breakdown apart from the other side effects such as diseases of the heart and so on such consequences are unavoidable if the magnetizer spends more force than he is able to restore especially if he is treating several patients at once this method presents another disadvantage namely the magnetizer with his own force transfers his own psychic vibrations and character traits onto the patient influencing him indirectly in a psychic way too therefore every magnetizer is supposed and required to be of a noble character yet if a magnetizer has a patient whose character properties are worse than his own he indirectly will draw the evil influences of the patient on himself which is disadvantageous for the magnetizer at all events the magnetizer however who has been trained in our cultism does give the patient not all the vital force of his own body but draws it from the universe and makes it stream into the patient's body directly through his hands together with the concentrated desire of health with both methods magnetizing has to be often repeated if one wants a quicker success for disharmony or diseases suck in and consume the transferred force very rapidly and are as it were greedy of a further supply of force so that the treatment has to be repeated soon to avoid the state growing worse it is otherwise with the magician the patient feels relieved only when the magician has been psychically opened that is if he has accomplished a dynamic accumulation of vital force in his own body and emits light rays of vital force the magician can employ many methods successfully but always must he maintain the imagination combined with the desire concentration wishing that the patient be better and better hour by hour from day to day some methods will follow the use of which will help a magician in the treatment of diseases above all he must be well versed in the diagnosis of diseases and their symptoms he will gain this knowledge through a careful study of the respective literature anatomical knowledge is absolutely indispensable he will not be so careless as to treat diseases necessitating a rapid chirological intervention or infectious diseases but in such cases he will be able to accelerate the healing process and contribute to suit the pains beside the medical treatment he can manage doing so even at a distance very serviceable it would be if physicians specialize themselves on this field and besides the allopathic art learn to employ the magic practice therefore the magician should only treat such sick persons as are recommended for this kind of treatment directly by a physician or work together with a physician to avoid to be regarded as a quack or a charlatan he should follow his calling from pure love of his neighbors and not for the purpose of earning money or as a means of enriching himself do not climb upwards on credulities of mankind hold on to the ideal of goodness and blessing will not fail ideally coloured magicians will help sick persons without them knowing anything this kind of help is the most blissful let me at some of the most conventional methods a magician can make use of without risking to endanger his health and nervous system before approaching a sick person's bed do seven breaths at least through the lungs and pores accumulate an enormous amount of vital force drawing it from the universe into your body and let this vital force shine like a sun in the brightest light try by repeated inhaling of the vital force to produce a radiant energy of 10 yards at least around your body which corresponds approximately to a vital force of 10 normal persons you ought to feel as if your accumulated vital force were lighting up like a sun if in such a radiance you happen to be close to a patient we will instantly experience a relief a sensation of ease and if not afflicted by an ill too painful he will feel an immediate alleviation you transfer the accumulated radiant energy quite individually to the patient and it is left to you to act as you like a skilled magician need no magic strokes nor put up hands all that being only auxiliary manipulations supports as it were of the utterance of his will it will suffice completely if the magician seizes the patient by one eventually by both hands and begins to work with imagination he may keep his eyes open or closed during this operation if he wants he may look straight at the patient but he need not do it directly here it is exclusively the imagination which is working but during the whole act of power transference the magician may also sit by the patient without contacting him personally imagine that the radiant energy surrounding you will stream forth into the patient's body and with your imagination as it were be pressed into it penetrating and eliminating all the pores of the sick person let your willpower order the compressed radiant energy to bring about the recovery of the patient all the time you have to be absolutely convinced that the patient is feeling better from one hour to the next one that he does look better every day and you must also order the radiant energy not to escape from the body before the patient has fully recovered loading the body of a patient quantitatively with the radiant energy which in a sound person means a radiant range of one yard one meter you will be able to bring about recovery in a surprisingly short time in proportion to the kind of illness do repeat the loading after a while reinforce the tension of the concentrated radiant energy and you will be very surprised indeed at noticing the wonderful success you have accomplished first of all the radiant energy cannot escape because you did fix it ordering it to renew itself continually secondly you did fix the time so that the body should feel better from hour to hour from day to day and thirdly you have proportion to the power the space corresponding to the circumference of the body at this point it should be recommended to fix the power of radiation about one yard one meter outside the body which is equal to the radiation of a normal human being with this method you have now fulfilled the main condition of the material law of time and space while using this method the magician will notice that his radiant energy which he transferred to the patient does not diminish but keeps on lighting up in the same intensive manner as before this is to impute to the fact that the vital power accumulated in the body renews itself automatically similar to communicating pipes instantly replacing the radiated power it is therefore quite obvious that a magician is able to treat hundreds of patients without ruining his mental strength or his nerves a different method has to be used if the magician is pressing the vital power directly into the patient's body or into the sick part of the body only by way of the pause together with the imagination of renewing itself constantly from the universe till the moment of complete recovery is reached here the imagined desire of completing recovery is limited to time and space as well but this method is only practiced with patients whose nervous system is not yet wholly exhausted and can consequently bear a certain pressure of the accumulated vital power with a well-trained magician of course the accumulated vital forces as it were materialized already that means it is condensed material power which can be compared to electricity this method in comparison with the others is the most popular because it is very simple and exceedingly effective a very peculiar method is to let the patient inhale one's own radiant power emanation with the help of the imagination presuming the patient to be able to concentrate he can do so by himself otherwise the magician has to perform the imagination instead of the patient in practice the occurrence is as follows your radiant energy is emitting up to a range of 10 yards 10 meters as you happen to be near the patient he is actually swimming in the light of your radiation which has been impregnated with the desire of recovery the patient on whom this power has been concentrated will be firmly convinced that he is inhaling your radiant energy with every breath and will get well he must imagine intensively that the healing power will remain in him and that he will go on feeling better and better even when the magician will no longer be near him presuming the patient to be unable to concentrate or in the case of sick children you imagine yourself that the patient with every inhaling accepts your own radiation of vital power conveys it to the blood and will bring about a complete recovery here also you will have to concentrate on the wish that the force inhaled by the patient should keep on working positively in him this has been an example of vital force transference from the magicians to another body by breathing we can rely here on the word of the bible when our lord jesus christ was touched by a sick woman in the hope of recovery our lord did feel the diminution of his vital power and he remarked to his disciples i have been touched working with vital power and magnetism one has to consider time and space with a view to this fact i have quoted several examples concerning the treatment of diseases and i could still mention quite a number of methods for treating sick people from the magnetic standpoint the magician for example is capable to take up a connection with the mind of a sleeping patient and to realize various methods of treatment in the patient's body apart from treating the sick with vital power he can also cure them magically with the help of the elements magnetism and electricity the detailed description of all the methods and possibilities of treatment would certainly fill a very voluminous book in this work i am only going to point out single procedures of treatment with regard to time and space that is magnetism high adepts and saints who have trained their imagination to such a perfection that all their imageries are realized immediately in all planes do not need methods anymore such people have only to express any kind of desire and it will be realized the very same moment summary of all exercises of step three one magic mental training one concentration of thoughts with two or three senses at once two concentration on objects landscapes places three concentration on animals and human beings two magic psychic training one inhaling of the element in the whole body a fire warmth b air lightness sea water coolness d earth gravity three magic physical training one retaining of step one which has to become a habit two accumulation of vital power a by breathing through the lungs and pores in the whole body be in the different parts of the body appendix to step three three impregnation of space for reasons of health success etc four biomagnetism end of step three step four before describing the difficult exercises at the following step i wish to point out again that the scholar is not allowed to hurry in his development he ought to take sufficient time for this purpose if he wants to achieve a real success on the road to magic he must be absolutely firm in all the exercises at the previous steps before turning to the following ones magic mental training 4 transplantation of consciousness i shall describe here how to transplant our consciousness outwards we must understand how to transplant our consciousness optionally into every object animal and human being into objects sitting in your habitual position fix your eyes for a short while on one of the objects and inculcate the shape color and size of it firmly into your mind now imagine yourself being transmuted in this object you must feel in a way as the object itself and adopt all its properties you have to be quite certain of the fact that you are fastened to the spot you have been put unable to abandon it but through an outside influence you have also to consider the purpose of the object after being transmuted into it imaginarily you should even be capable by intense concentration to regard your surroundings from the point of this object and to grasp its relationship to other objects for example supposing the object happens to be on the table you feel the relationship to this table as well as to all the other things on the table including the room in which the objects happen to be having managed this exercise with one object you can gradually turn to the other things the exercise is fulfilled if you have managed to connect each object you did select to your consciousness so that you have adopted the shape size and quality of the object and that you can remain in it for at least five minutes without any interruption it must be possible for you to overlook and forget your body completely having managed this task you can choose bigger objects like flowers plants shrubs trees etc for your concentrative transmutation of consciousness consciousness knows neither time nor space it is consequently an akosha principle nobody should be deterred by the unusual kind of the exercises and by eventual failures at the beginning patience perseverance and tenacity will soon lead to the success aimed at the scholar will learn later what significance these preliminary exercises have for the further magical work as soon as one is able to manage transplanting consciousness into inanimate objects the exercises with living objects will follow into animals it has been said before that consciousness is timeless and spaceless and it is not necessary while doing the exercises with living creatures to have the object concerned directly before our eyes by now the scholar should be trained so far as to be able to imagine any creature he likes to let him therefore transplant his consciousness in the imagination of a cat a dog a horse a cow a goat etc the kind of the experimental object does not matter it might as well be an ant a bird or an elephant at first one begins with the imagination of the animal in the motionless condition later on walking running creeping flying or swimming corresponding to the kind of object in question the scholar must be capable to transmute his consciousness in any form he likes to and be active in it as well he must endure at least four or five minutes without interruption if he wishes to regard this exercise as being mastered adepts who have been practicing this exercise for years are capable to understand any animal and handle it by their willpower in connection with this fact all we need is to remember the legend of werewolves and other tales in which wizards transmuted themselves into animals but fairy tales and legends have a far deeper significance to the magician there is no doubt that these are cases of the so-called black magicians who adopt all sorts of animal shapes in the invisible world not to be recognized while doing their wicked work the good magician will always condemn such actions and his spiritual faculties allow him to see through such creatures and to recognize the real figure of the artificer our preliminary exercises do not serve to induce the scholar to wicked deeds but to prepare him for the higher magic where he will have to adopt higher divine forms into which he will transplant his self-consciousness if one has been trained during the exercise to the point to be capable of adopting any kind of animal shape with the consciousness and if one can manage to maintain this imagination for five minutes without interruption the same exercise has to be practiced on human beings interhuman beings for the beginning select acquaintances friends members of the family whose imagination you are able to keep in mind without discrimination of sex and age one has always to be very sure about how to transplant the consciousness into the body so that one feels and thinks oneself as being the imaginary person from well-known people one may turn to strangers never seen before and therefore to be imagined finally you may choose people of different races and colors as experimental objects the exercise is ended if you manage to transplant your own consciousness for at least five minutes into one of the imaginary bodies the longer the spell of this achievement is the more profitable it will become this particular exercise gives the magician the power to connect himself with every human being not only to know his ideas and feelings developing in the consciousness of the imaginary person his past and his presence his way of thinking and acting but even to influence him according to his own liking but still with the proverb in mind what man is sowing he will harvest so the magician will never use his influence for anything bad or force people to act against their own will he will use the great power over every human being given him through these exercises for the good only and the blessing will never fail the magician will learn from these facts why the oriental scholar bestows the highest worship to his master by worshiping the master he connects himself instinctively with the master's consciousness and so being influenced indirectly his progress will be far more certain and faster as well it is quite obvious that the oriental training methods regard a master guru as absolutely necessary for the development of the scholar the well-known tibetan anchor is based on the same fundament but in the inverted order the master connects himself with the scholars consciousness and transplant power and enlightenment to him the same thing happens in the case of the mystics the point in question being the so-called pneuma transfer magic psychic training 4 accumulation of elements in the whole body in this chapter we shall amplify the work concerning the elements we have learned to take in the element by breathing through lungs and pores and to perceive its specific qualities in our whole body now we shall charge single parts of the body with any element we like which can be executed in two different ways the magician should manage both methods the first one is as follows in single parts of the body in the same way as described in step three through inhaling with lungs and pores you are breathing the element into the whole body and accumulate it there that means you are breathing out thoroughly without any imagination at all while inhaling connect your imagination of feelings with the specific quality of the element fire forming the idea of heat water that of cold air of lightness and the earth of gravity you have to begin with inhaling seven times instead of dissolving the accumulated element giving it back to the universe through imagination lead it to that part of the body you chose by compressing the specific quality of the element and fill the concern part of the body with it you should feel the compressed element with its specific quality much stronger in the single part of the body than in the whole body similar to the steam producing a higher pressure when being compressed the flesh the bones and the skin of the single part of the body have to be penetrated with the element consequently if you are feeling the specific quality of the element enormously strong in the loaded part of the body let it be dissolved with the help of your imagination throughout the whole body and by breathing out as described in step three let it stream forth and bad to the universe this exercise has to be done with each of the elements alternately with every external and internal organ with the exception of the brain and the heart do never accumulate any element in these two organs at all neither in your own case nor in the case of other people to avoid damages only a master who is perfectly experienced in managing elements may allow himself a certain accumulation in the heart and brain without ruining himself he knows his body and has got it well in hand every organ the heart and brain as well are suited for the supply of elements with their specific qualities but of course without any accumulation the beginner should always avoid to accumulate elements or vital power neither in the heart nor in the brain especially if he is not yet able to observe the functions of the different organs with the help of clairvoyance by performing an accumulation of elements or vital power in the whole body the brain and the heart are getting used to the general accumulation because in this case the tension is not related to one organ only but is expanding over the whole body it is very important indeed to manage the accumulation of elements and vital power in the hands and feet very well because this will be of manifold use in the practical application of magic the keenest attention should be paid to the fingers a further possibility of withdrawing an element from an organ of the body is not to lead back the accumulated element into the body and to deliver it through the poor breathing to the universe but with the help of the imagination one can return through the pause the whole element to the universe at once from the organ this process is quicker a magician naturally must be capable to manage both methods and must understand how to handle them quite at will the second method of element accumulation in any part of the body is to transfer one's own personality with the consciousness into one part of the body and allow it similar to the breathing through the pores to inhale and to breathe out the element which is inhaled with every breath stays there while you are breathing out thoroughly as soon as you are feeling that a sufficient amount of the element has been accumulated in the inhaling part of the body do set it free again while you are breathing out that means give it back to the universe from where you have drawn it this process is quite simple and quick but it requires a perfect transplantation of the consciousness on the other hand the accumulation of vital power in a certain part of the body has to be managed very skillfully indeed when perfectly acquainted with this practice you can proceed to a further step production of element harmony in regions of the body we all know that the human body is divided in four principle regions corresponding to the elements for the sake of a better understanding we shall repeat it the feet up to the thighs rump bone including the genitals correspond to the earth the abdominal region with all the internal organs such as bowels milt gall liver stomach to the midriff correspond to the water element the chest the lungs and the heart to the neck correspond to the air element and the head with all its organs to the fire element the task of the next exercise is to load the different regions of the body with the corresponding element the practice is as follows take up your favorite position asana by breathing through the lungs and pores inhale the earth element with its specific property of gravity into the earth region of the body from the feet along the genitals to the rump bone inhale the earth element seven times breathe out thoroughly filling the earth region thus with the element influencing it keep the earth element in the earth region and inhale the water element seven times into the water region that is the abdomen without breathing it out so that this region remains equally filled with its own element then turn to the next element and fill the chest by inhaling the air element seven times and leaving this element without breathing it out in its own region now it is the turn of the head region which you are also filling by inhaling the fire element seven times exhale the empty breath and the head region will remain also filled with the fire element all the regions being loaded with the corresponding elements remain about two to five minutes in this position and then begin with the dissolving of the elements one begins where one did finish in our case evidently from the head with the fire element by empty inhaling seven times and all together seven times breathing out the fire element into the universe the head region being disengaged from the element the next region we have to look at is the one of the air after that the region of the water and finally the one of the earth until the whole body is free from the accumulation of elements if you did achieve a certain skill with this exercise you may still extend it by not only filling the different body regions with the elements but accumulating the elements in these regions the process is the same as just described that is you begin again with the earth element and finish with the fire element of dissolving is equal to the one of the previous experiment these exercises are of great importance because they are establishing the harmony between the material as well as the astral body and the universal rules of the elements if the magician should ever get into disharmonies through any peculiar circumstances all he has to do is practice these exercises and he will immediately redress the harmony he will experience the comforting influence of the entire universal harmony not only for a few hours but for days which is creating and keeping in him the feeling of peace and happiness the harmony of the elements in the body offers other more advantages of which i shall mention only a few first of all the scholar is protected against the pernicious influences of the negative side of the elements the very moment the scholar has achieved a magical equipoise he is standing in the center of all events and will be aware of all the laws all the constitutive moments and processes taking place in the universe in the true perspective the scholar is spared from many illnesses producing an effective balance on his own karma and thus on his fate he becomes more resistant against any dangerous influence he is cleaning his mental and astral aura strengthening his mental and astral matrix he is reviving his magical faculties and his intuition will become of universal character his astral senses will be refined and his intellectual capacities will rise magic physical training for rituals and their practical applicability bearings asanas the exercises of the first step should have become a habit by now those of the second step have to be enforced and deepened according to time and opportunity one ought to have the capacity of sticking firmly to any asceticism one has imposed upon oneself without having to fight temptations or even to succumb to any of them the exercises of the third step are to be deepened as well one has to manage the position of the body so far as to endure the asana seat for hours without feeling the slightest disturbance nervousness tension or convulsion the power of radiation has to be enforced deepened and must become more expansive that means more dynamic which has to be accomplished by imagination and deep meditation the magician has to learn the practical use of the radiant power for any purpose and in any situation he must reach such a degree of perfection that any desire which he is transplanting into the radiant power is realized instantly in this manner he will be enabled to help suffering people in cases of illness and accidents and thus bring great blessing to himself postures of the fingers madras now we shall go on to a further chapter also rather unknown up to date concerning positions of the body gestures and positions of the fingers generally known as ritual the fundamental principle of rituals is based on confirming an idea a train of thought by an external mode of expression or the other way round producing a train of thought by a gesture or an action which we shall designate evocation in hermetics this maxim is standing for the entire magic ritual it is stated hereby that not only any idea can be expressed by an action but can also be bound to a certain task this refers to any creature as well anything not receiving and bearing a special name symbol or external mark is without significance all the magical processes and rituals are based on this primordial thesis every religious system has its special cults since the remotest times the only difference is that nothing but a very small part has been accessible to the masses whilst most of it has been kept strictly secret and reserved only to high priests and adepts every ritual answers a certain purpose regardless whether the point in question be the ban witchcraft of tibet or the gestures of fingers performed by the barley priests at their cults in the orient or the exorcism ritual of magicians the synthesis will always remain the same at a trial the hand with three fingers risen for the oath as confirmation of a truthful statement may also be regarded as a magical gesture from the christian point of view the risen fingers are symbolizing the trinity each of the numerous lodges and sects has its own rights the lodges of the freemasons for example are all bound to a fixed sign word and touch a lot could be said about this problem from the historical point of view for practical magic respectively the magical training however studies like these would be absolutely useless it is of no importance at all to the genuine magician if he reads books about the particular way in which any other magician is drawing his magical circle regarding it as a symbol of infinity divinity and purity planting his genie and angels in it for the sake of protection or else how a llama is painting his mandola and sets up his thatigato's as a symbol of protective deity he does not need such strange directions because he knows very well they are only a mental support for the mind in this fourth step the magician will learn how to produce his own rituals cults gestures and manipulations of the fingers all this depends a great deal on his individuality and perception many a magician has achieved more with the most primitive rituals than a philosophic speculator with all his complicated performances of his cult it is not possible to give an exact direction in this matter and the scholar will have to act intuitively and must understand how to express the ideas trains of thoughts and everything he would like to be realized by a suitable gesture position of fingers or by a ritual he will certainly not try to express a blessing gesture by a clenched fist ready to attack he will compose his individual unceremonious ritual according to his situation and position which he is using when nobody is watching him there are magicians who are performing rituals unnoticed being in the middle of the biggest crowd by movement of their fingers in the pocket of their coat in conformity with the elements they are using the analogy of the five fingers by imputing the forefinger to the fire the thumb to the water the middle finger to the okosho the ring finger to the earth and the little finger to the air the right hand represents the positive elements and the left one the negative elements may this small example be sufficient gesticulations do learn to give quite individual signs to different ideas but keep silent about them because if anybody else should use the same sign for the same idea he would weaken it by the derivation of its strength bind and fix your personal desire which you wish most eagerly to be realized to your own small ritual or gesticulation best of all gesticulations of the fingers and imagine that your desire is being realized by this gesture or that it has been realized already the rule of the present imperative formula is valid here as well the imaginary realization in connection with the gesture or the right has to be performed at the beginning with the feeling of assurance self-confidence and self-reliance and with the unshakable faith in success at first the ritual as well as the imagination have to be used later on dealing with only the imagination of the desire and its realization you will be induced without even noticing it automatically to use the gesture or the ritual having arrived at this point that a desire has become an automatic function of your imagination the process will go on in inverted order you perform the ritual or the gesture and the imagination or the power in question will automatically release their effect this is the real purpose of the ritual the position or the gestures of the limbs and the fingers as soon as the ritual has become self-acting with the imagination it will be sufficient to perform the ritual only to achieve the effect or influence you have been wishing for a comparison very near to the point is offered by a fully charged battery which needs nothing else but the correct contact to produce the current at any time by repeating the imagination with the selected gesture or ritual a power reserve is formed in the causal sphere of the akosha principle which will adopt the necessary vibration electromagnetic fluid colour sound and all the analogies corresponding to the desire or purpose we can rightly assert that they are blood particles of its entire condition if this power reservoir has been loaded by frequent repetition the mere ritual will produce the discharge of one part of this reservoir bringing about the necessary effect in this way it is therefore profitable not to talk about otherwise somebody else could easily draw up the power by the same ritual and accomplish the effect naturally at the sacrifice of the originator certain lodges let their beginners perform rituals by which such a power reservoir is loaded automatically the higher adepts would get in this case a cheap additional allowance and could work with it effortless but as soon as the scholar is making progress and is capable to obtain it by himself already he will be advised to use this ritual as little as possible evidently some people will come to the conclusion that several of the political movements or parties are performing an indirect magical action with the gesture of salute and supply in this manner the general reservoir with more however small parts of the vital power by the constant repetition we all shall remember the salute of the german nsdap consisting in a lifting of the hand and certainly representing a certain gesture of power but if such an increased collective power reservoir is misused for greedy and questionable purposes this mentally strained power is turning against the founders because of its polarity decay and destruction will follow apart from the fact that the curses of the numerous absolutely innocent victims partly pining in dungeons partly sentenced to death or sent to hopeless battles in the field will invisibly produce an opposite polarity which will also contribute to the decomposition of the power reservoir the same law works in all the rest of cult practices no matter whether they happen in religions sex or lodges the miraculous healings in places of pilgrimage have the same fundamental base the devoted believer is drawing up the spiritual power from the okasha principle accumulated there by the worshippers as a result of their firm faith and unshakable confidence and the miraculous effect is carried out in this manner the well-trained magician will always find the sole true explanation for such and similar phenomena by this knowledge of the universal laws using his knowledge of the polarity laws he could without any doubt grasp all the power from the cult reservoir by force and produce healings or other ostensible miracles at any time he wanted to the magician on a high ethical level would regard such deeds as a sort of stealing and therefore will always refuse to lower himself to do it because he has many other possibilities at hand this shall be mentioned only by the way and we shall turn back again to the rituals it has been said before that any idea every desire and every imagination can be realized by a ritual no matter which of the planes material astral or mental be concerned only the time of realization depends first on the mental maturity and secondly on the diligence of using the rituals the magician will best choose such rights as he can use for a lifetime that means rituals of a universal character the fewer desires he has all the sooner he can book the success supposing the rituals he chose do not function at first effectively enough he should not sub-join with others in the beginning he ought to be satisfied with one at most three rituals having arrived at this step of development the magician will understand perfectly to check on the right measure and he will also know how much he is capable to load summary of all exercises of step four one magic mental training transplantation of consciousness a into objects be into animals c interhuman beings two magic psychic training one accumulation of elements a in the whole body b in single parts of the body with the help of two methods two production of element harmony in the appropriate regions of the body a fire head b air chest c water abdomen d earth rump bone genitals feet three magic physical training rituals and their practical applicability a gesticulations gestures b bearings c postures of the fingers end of the fourth step step five the wise archimedes once said show me one point in the universe and i shall lift the globe off its hinges very few people probably know that this sentence is concealing a great occult mystery namely the secret of the fourth dimension as we all remember from our school days everything having a shape a stone a plant animal man in short every body owns length width and height definitions familiar to us if in the middle of a form for example a spherical form we imagine a double crossing on the crossing spot we get a point the so-called depth point an archimedes certainly did have this point in mind because it is actually the point of beginning the starting point the nucleus of every form regarded from this point every form is symmetrically objective that means it happens to be in its true equilibrium this is the base of the mystery of the fourth dimension hence the concept of time and space of timelessness and spacelessness and therefore also the secret of space magic the scholar is advised to meditate very intensively about this problem and he will be able to open up profundities he never dreamed of and a high intuition will be his reward in association with the magical mental training of the fifth step we shall speak about the space magic magic mental training 5 space magic with all the previous exercises the scholar has achieved a certain capacity of concentration and he has learned to transform his consciousness at will or to adjust it to any form and he will be capable to see father and deeper the instructions of the fifth step shall show us how to transplant the consciousness into the center of any form beginning with the tiniest atom to the highest universe in this manner the scholar does not only learn to understand and interpret every form from its center he will also be taught to master it from the center the faculties acquired by means of the following exercises are of a very great importance for the magic because in this manner only the mental balance can be established at any time this mental balance is the specific fundamental property of the akasha or causal principle of the mind let us therefore turn immediately to the practical exercises take up your customary position now put some larger objects in front of you perhaps a solid ball a die a cube etc it will be profitable to select first objects with full contents do fix your eyes for a short time on one of these objects close your eyes and transfer your consciousness to the depth point that is to the center imagine yourself being and feeling right in the center of the object the transplantation of your consciousness has to be so close that you forget your body entirely this exercise is very difficult indeed but practice will make perfect nobody should be scared away by failures in the beginning but keep on working diligently man being accustomed to three dimensions only some difficulties will occur at first but they will diminish from one exercise to the other and gradually one gets accustomed to concentrate on being in the depth point of any object if you have been successful to stay for at least five minutes with your consciousness in the center of the object you chose you may go on to the next object after achieving the same good result select different objects for exercising but this time unsymmetrical ones each time you must go so far that you transfer your consciousness in the center of any object and feel yourself as small as a poppy seed even as an atom if you can manage this without any disturbance go ahead to the next exercise seizing the dimension and shape of the object from your depth point the smaller you feel yourself and the more your consciousness is shrinking all the bigger the circumference or the width of the object will appear to you from your point of view the selected object represents a whole universe and you must hold on to this feeling as long as possible once you have managed this exercise free from disturbances with a symmetrical object as well as with an unsymmetrical one you can turn to another object you may believe this exercise well performed if you can book the same good success with any object whichever after numerous exercises of the depth point transference you will attain the capacity to look through any object and you will intuitively recognize the material as well as the mental structure of such an object at the same time you will obtain the faculty to influence every object from the nucleus to load it magically at will and thus to impregnate the mental sphere of every object with your desire we have learned in the fourth step to master this problem through the accumulation of vital power from outwards to inwards and this step will teach us to do the same but in a manner far more impressive from inwards to outwards a magician has to obtain the same effect with animals and human beings he must also manage it with objects which are not directly before his eyes consciousness knows of no bounds at all therefore he can practice transference to the farthest distance as soon as the scholar has reached this point he can start on transferring consciousness into the fourth dimension of his own body the microcosm that means into the akasha principle of his own being the practice is as follows you are sitting quietly in your familiar position with your eyes closed transfer your consciousness exactly into the middle of your body i mean the pit of your stomach the solar plexus you must feel yourself as a mere dot as an atom in the center between the outer spine and the frontal pit of the stomach this center is the lowest point of your body try to stay there with your consciousness at least for five minutes you may use an alarm clock to check the time regard your body from this point the more diminutive you imagine yourself the bigger you will perceive the circumference of your body which will appear to you as a big universe at this point meditate as follows i am the center of my body i am the determining power therein difficulties in the beginning should not discourage the scholar even if he does manage it at first for a few seconds only by constant exercises the second will become minutes the limit for staying in this depth point is five minutes working through this step the scholar should be able to transfer himself at any hour and in every situation into this depth point that means into the akasha principle from there perceiving and influencing all that concerns his being this consciousness transference into the own akasha principle is the genuine magical state of trance and represents the preliminary stage of the connection with the cosmic consciousness i shall describe the practice relating to this linking up to the cosmic consciousness in a further chapter the magical trance should not be mixed up with the state produced by spiritualistic mediums provided we have to do with genuine psychical phenomena and mediums of integrity mostly a lot of mischief is done in this line to mislead credulous people the real spiritualistic mediums bring about their trance whether with the help of a prayer a hymn or some other meditation or conversely through a sort of passivity emptiness of the mind conjuring up by this a spontaneous displacement shifting of the consciousness in this state it is possible for elementals deceased people and certain low beings to induce the astral body together with the material body to manifestations and other undertakings such experiments are to be regarded as a sort of obsession from the hermetic point of view even then if the beings in question should be good ones the true magician naturally does not doubt the performance of such experiments if they are to be taken very seriously but he will feel very sorry indeed about these mediums for the magician himself can consciously form connections with beings in quite a different way being fully aware of what he is doing particulars will be given in a special chapter magic psychic training five projection of elements outward through one's own body accumulated through the solar plexus the practical instructions at the fourth step have taught us to draw the four elements from the universe into our body to accumulate these elements first in the whole body and afterwards in every single part of it thus producing a tension of elements which let us call dynamide the body became more elastic with respect to the tension of elements from one exercise to the next one and more capable of resistance against the effect of pressure this lesson will bring us further step by step and teach us to project and manage the element outwards because without the outward projection of elements any work in practical magic is inconceivable we have to give our keenest attention to practical work sit down in your usual position inhale through lungs and pores and with the help of the imagination press the element of fire into your whole body you are inhaling the fire element with the specifical property of heat and you are exhaling empty breaths if the warmth in your body seems to be very strong consequently if there is a sufficient accumulation of this element let escape the element through imagination from the solar plexus and fill the entire room you are in at this moment with the fire element while you empty the element from your body you should have the feeling that your body is completely delivered from it and the accumulated element has diffused itself in the whole room similar to the procedure you followed in the impregnation of a room with vital power repeat the accumulation and evacuation several times and by each emptying you will accumulate the fiery element all the more in the room as soon as you are free from the element yourself you ought to feel how the element is amassing in the room and get the sensation of the room becoming very warm after some exercising the warmth in the room will become not only a subjective but a real matter of fact and any person magically trained or not entering this room is actually bound to feel the warmth a thermometer does indicate how far we are capable to condense our imagination with respect to the fire so that factually a materially perceptible warmth can be produced in the room the success of this exercise depends entirely on the willpower and the plastic imaginative faculty it is not absolutely necessary in this step to bring about such an amount of physical warmth that it can be measured with a thermometer but supposing a magician takes a keen interest in working in this more spectacular way he can specialize himself in this problem with the help of these instructions the genuine magician however will not be satisfied with such an insignificant phenomenon and rather prefer to further his own development because he is firmly convinced that he can obtain much more as time goes on the exercise of the outward space projection of the element is fulfilled as soon as the magician can distinctly feel the warmth in the room once he has got so far he has to set free and pour out the accumulated fire element into the infinity that is the universe again where it is dissolving spherically in all directions the magician can now leave the room any time he likes to without dissolving the element once it has been loaded with it he can also confine the element to the room for any period of time just as he did before with the impregnation of a room all the success depends on his willpower and imagination on the other hand it is not exactly advisable to leave a room filled with a certain element for a very long time because beings belonging to the element in question like to do their pranks in such an atmosphere usually at the cost of the master you will find more about this in the chapter concerning the work with element ghosts something different should be mentioned at this point supposing the magician to do his exercise in the open air that is in an unlimited space he will have to proportion a certain space no matter how big for himself with the help of the imagination there are no bounds for the imagination neither here nor there in the same way as the scholar did his exercises with the fire element he has to work with the other three elements and next to the fire he should take up the air after that the water and finally the earth the termination of the exercises belongs to the scholar himself and depends on his time and opportunities he can deal with one element one day with the next one the following day and so on or he can accumulate the first element in the morning the second at midday the third in the evening and the fourth element next morning scholars who have plenty of time at their disposal and also sufficient willpower can go through all the four exercises by turns these scholars of course will make an enormous progress in mastering the elements a scholar who does control all the four elements in this direction may continue accumulated through the hands the previous exercise has taught the magician how to accumulate the element inhaled through the solar plexus outwards in the space in the following exercise he will learn how to emit an element accumulated through breathing with lungs and pores into the space not only through the solar plexus but through the whole body poor breathing thus producing an accumulation of elements in space this has to be practiced with all the elements the dissolving and scattering into the universe has to be performed in exactly the same manner as described in the previous exercise as soon as the scholar masters this exercise as well he will proceed to performing this exercise not with the whole body but with some limbs or parts of the body only hands and fingers are usually engaged in magic consequently the scholar ought to devote his full attention to them he must accumulate the element by poor breathing in one hand or both of them in such a manner that through a sheer motion of his hand as by flash he emits the element from his hand into the selected space impregnating it instantly repeated practice makes perfect here as well the scholar should practice this exercise on all the elements and master it then he may continue sit like you always do in your customary position inhale the fire element through the lungs and pause of your whole body and accumulate it there until you get the sensation of heat again now imagine the accumulated fire element forming a fiery ball of a diameter of four to eight inches ten to twenty centimeters in the solar plexus this compressed ball must be so fiery and shining as to be very similar to the sun now imagine this ball moving out of its sun network and floating free in the air thus floating in the space the ball ought to be imagined white hot and radiating heat stick to this ball imagery as long as you possibly can if you happen to come near it with your hands you must feel the heat radiating conclude this exercise by dissolving the ball slowly in the universe or by blowing it by a sudden explosion into the nothingness both methods should become familiar to you you have to deal in the same way with the elements of air water and finally with the earth element for the sake of a clearer imagination while dealing with the air element give the ball while compressing it a sky blue color the imagination of water will prove much easier for you should you however have difficulties with doing so imagine it in the beginning as a spherical lump of ice you will certainly have no troubles at all to think the earth element a ball of clay when you have practiced this exercise with all the four element balls and are sure to master it turn to form different shapes of the elements according to the same method at first choose simple forms like cubes pyramids cones etc the exercise is fulfilled as soon as you manage to condense any element you have accumulated in your body in any form and to project it outwards outward projection without passing through the body only if the previous exercise can be managed perfectly the next one can be taken up an exercise which is dealing with the projection of elements directly from the universe the practice is as follows you are sitting in your asana position breathing calmly and without any effort do imagine that you are drawing the fire element out of the endless space the universe and fill with it the room you are living in imagine the universe in the shape of an enormous ball from which you are drawing the fiery element in all directions right to your room remember that the fire element coming from the primary source is the most etheric and subtle and the more you are pulling it down to you the more it will become dense material and hot you are bound to feel the heat on your own body during this exercise the more the compressed and accumulated element is being condensed in the room the stronger will the heat grow you should actually have the sensation of being in a baking oven now dissolve the element again by your willpower and imagination into the infinite repeat the same procedure with the air element drawing it out of the ball shaped universe down to you from all directions filling and condensing your room with it performing this exercise correctly you ought to have the sensation of floating in an endless ocean of air free from any gravity and attractive power in a room filled in the just described manner you should feel as light as a balloon afterwards you may dissolve the condensed air element again in its primary substance in exactly the same way as you did with the fire element do likewise with the water element imagine you are drawing this element down to you out of an endless ocean at first in a sort of cold vapor which you are condensing more and more the nearer you are bringing it to your body and your room fill the whole exercise room with this cold vapor and try to imagine yourself to be right in the centre of this illusory water element you must feel icicled a sort of cold which causes as it were goose pimples on your material body the moment you are feeling this cold dissolve the water element again in its original form and let it stream away into nothingness in this manner the magician is capable to cool and refresh his room in a few moments even in the hottest summer days now try the same experiment with the earth element draw out of the universe a grey mass which similar to clay is becoming browner and browner the nearer you are bringing it down to yourself fill your room entirely with this heavy mass by doing so you ought to experience the heaviness and cohesive power as well as its pressure on your own body having got the earth element under control through this feeling dissolve it again into its original material as you did with the other elements by now it is quite evident that the drawing down and materializing of the elements is happening exactly there where we concentrated it without the element we are just working with passing through the body everything is evidently occurring outside our body the magician is supposed to master both methods perfectly because in some special magical tasks he will need an element which has been materialized through his body for example in cases of healing sick people or creating subservient ghosts and elementals on the other hand he will now and again need the direct universally condensed element mastering this practice two he is qualified to go ahead the next exercise will be to draw an element out of the universe however not to fill a space as described in the previous exercise but to condense a self-selected form similar to these exercises where forms of the element had been condensed in solar plexus and kept outside the body sort of floating in the air but with the difference that the forming of the shape does not take place inside of the body but immediately during its floating in the air consequently the magician must know exactly how to produce a fireball a ball of air such a one of water and an earth ball if he has achieved this performance faultlessly he has to shape different forms from the elements floating in the space and let these forms dissolve again in the universe after some time all the time he ought to feel the specific property of the element he is working with quite distinctly he should be able to induce even a layman or ignorant people to see and feel the element in question these are high achievements indeed results of great effort in this line in short during the course of these exercises the scholar should have learned to condense every element of the universe and understand to compress it into any form he likes to magicians trained in this line can condense an element to such a degree that it becomes a material power that's why you can lighten a fire with the help of the fiery element at the greatest distance at first practice imaginary drawing a fiery ball down from the universe directly without having it passed through the body and compress it to a small bead so much as to grow a glowing spark put this spark in a cotton plug which has been soaked in easily in flammable liquids like ether petrol or alcohol a second spark is to be prepared in the same way with the air element and the very moment both sparks are touching the cotton plug it will catch fire and begin to burn having succeeded in this little trick the magician can make an attempt with the wick of an ordinary candle and later on with a paraffin lamp he can do this near and far apart from it he can also confine a spark to and enclose in a normal tumbler or a bottle and fling a water spark into this container as quick as a flash as soon as these two sparks are touching each other both elements will explode and the glass or the bottle will break off in a thousand chips the magician can compose such artifices by himself because he knows and masters the rules the genuine magician will not waste his time with such dallying he does know very well that he could produce as well as stop phenomena such as lightnings thunder rain heavy thunderstorms by means of the elements all these forces which strike the layman as wondrous manifestations are for the magician things that go without saying and it is entirely up to himself whether he likes to specialize in the line of phenomena or prefers to continue with his magical development it is also a well-known fact to him that the oriental farcas only by mastering the elements accomplish their genuine mango tree miracle from seed to fruit within one hour's time besides the learner has the possibility of controlling the material condensation of an element physically by throwing the condensed form of an element into a glass of clean or even better sterilized water and repeating this action several times he will state that with fire the taste of the water will appear sort of asidulous with air swedish with water astringent dry and with earth musty this occurrence can be tested chemically by dipping a small stripe of litmus paper into the prepared water if the water has been impregnated very thoroughly one will notice that an acid reaction will occur on the litmus paper when the active elements namely fire and air are concerned while in the case of water and earth the reaction will be an alkaline one who would not be reminded of the wedding at kana where our law did transform the water into wine only such a high adept as jesus christ did accomplish this miracle not by the influence of elements from the outside but by mastering the akosha principle of the water being transformed from the inside at this point i shall finish the mastering of elements as far as the magical training of the soul in step four is concerned nobody is expected to advance before he has not been working thoroughly through all the exercises and tasks the exercises are all going hand in hand inter depending on each other i take it for granted that it will not enter anybody's mind to stick to single exercises and methods only the result would be faithful to the health of the person and the success would never come these facts have to be considered very carefully but he who does perform one exercise after the other scrupulously can proceed with a clear conscience and can work on the magical development at full blast magic physical training five preparation for passive communication with the invisible ones in this step i shall quote some exercises which render possible a deliberate passive communication with the invisible ones from the magical point of view in a certain way the methods resemble the spiritualistic ones but the magician will soon notice that he is not training himself to become a person without any will of his own called a medium by the spiritualists the magician may not become a plaything of uncontrollable powers on the contrary he directs his powers consciously and also learns to use them deliberately in this respect he considers the laws of the invisible world as well as those of the physical world to further the passive communication with invisible beings there are recommended mainly the levitation exercises with the purpose to magically prepare any part of the body in such a manner that such beings can manifest themselves with the help of levitation let us begin with the practice at once release of the own hand do sit comfortably in front of a table and put your hands on it perform an accumulation of vital power in your right hand and concentrate on the fact that you are able to manage your hand and your fingers solely with your mere willpower that is not with the help of the muscles let the accumulated vital power diffuse in the universe afterwards by the way of the imagination now begin with the proper levitation exercise accumulate the airy element in the forefinger of the right hand and concentrate on the forefinger becoming as light as the air next try to imagine that you are lifting the forefinger with the help of your willpower leaving the hand with the other fingers quiet and motionless on the table you must have the feeling that it is not your muscles are lifting the finger but that your willpower is doing so as soon as you have managed to get the finger upward let it drop again by your willpower should you stop to concentrate while the finger is still aloft it would drop instantly one could try this only to establish how far the willpower or the muscles are intervening in it if you are capable to levitate the forefinger of the right hand optionally with the own willpower you can proceed in the same manner with the other fingers the levitation exercise is fulfilled as soon as you can lift and drop all the fingers of the right hand at your own will now proceed in the same way with your left hand and its fingers having managed this as well try to lift the whole hand this way first the right hand and afterwards the left one provided you can notice a success after several exercises go ahead by lifting the hand that will not only up to the elbow but right to the upper arm you can extend these exercises and lift both hands at once with the help of your willpower should the magician decide to extend these exercises over the whole body he would succeed after a while without any doubt in raising his whole body by his willpower he would be capable to walk upon the water without sinking down he could even ascend into the air with his whole body and accomplish numerous other similar actions just as it pleases him it is obvious of course that he would have to practice these exercises for many years in order to gain the aforesaid success grand adepts do manage without any difficulties to produce such phenomena without being forced to do such exercises for years because it all depends again on the magical maturity and development never will any magician of a high standard perform phenomena of that kind without an urgent reason and least of all to satisfy the curiosity of other people at our stage of development we shall be content to move the hands and fingers according to our own will having reached this point we shall turn to a different preparatory exercise which is absolutely necessary for the passive communication with the invisible ones and i shall demonstrate the practice as follows sit down again in front of a table on which your hands are resting calmly now try to imagine plastically that your spiritual right hand is protruding from the physical one put the psychical hand close by the physical one or let it glide through the table on your knees you have to regard the imaginary spiritual hand as your real one in the carnal hand there is now occurring a mental vacuum which has the shape of the external hand do think at this moment that the carnal hand is quite harmless being thus in the fourth dimension the akasha principle if you did manage this for a short while go back again with your mental hand into the carnal one and finish the exercise repeat this several times until you succeed in exteriorizing the hand as described for at least five minutes you can work on the other hand in the same manner as soon as you have managed this very well you are prepared to take up the communication with the invisible ones we can see by now that the magic preparation is very different from the one of the spiritualists who behave passively in so far as they take a pencil in their hands and write or paint whether the messages which are asked for by the medial writing or painting of the spiritualists are actually coming out of the fourth dimension or the way they call it from the world beyond or whether they originate only in the subconsciousness of the medium in question is entirely left to the judgment of the magician a hand which has been exteriorized according to our method has really been transplanted in the fourth dimension and can be seen by any being of that sphere which wants to use it to send messages to our material world as soon as the beginner has done these exercises he is enabled to communicate with the beings of the fourth dimension the magician will first of all try to come into contact with his guardian genius his spiritual guide to whom he has the closest relationship every scholar of magics is fully aware of the fact that the divine providence at the hour of his birth has given him a being with the purpose to watch over its protege to guide and to inspire him in accordance with the development and the karma this being can be a deceased person or else an intellectual entity not yet embodied on this planet this being takes care of the spiritual comfort of the protege mostly up to the puberty period the more man is maturing intellectually the less attention does the spiritual leader pay to him especially in cases of people who do not even remember their guide the contact is loosened more and more a lot could be said about the ranks of such guardians and their activity as well but this would overstep the frame of this work the magician certainly has got the faculty to communicate with his guide to learn all he wants to know and to receive everything he is in need of he may be quite sure provided he be honestly interested in the whole problem enabling his character and working hard on his magical development that his guide will try first to make himself known to him therefore the scholar should aspire to come into contact with his guardian genius here follows now the necessary practice preparation of the fingers with help of the pendulum etc take a sidereal pendulum it does not have to be a special pendulum a ring or a small object will do likewise even a nail if nothing else is conveniently near which is to be tied to a silk thread twist the end of the thread several times around your forefinger the pendulum is swinging about eight to twelve inches twenty to thirty centimeters free in the air sit down in front of a table and put both your hands on it the elbow of the hand holding the pendulum is to prop on the table the pendulum is swinging free above the table top about 0.8 to 1.2 inches two to three centimeters the elbow remains propped up the hand is to keep upright put a glass of water a vas or any tinkling object about two to two point eight inches five to seven centimeters sideways of the pendulum or behind it as soon as you have finished all the preparations according to these instructions exteriorize your mental hand from the one holding the pendulum and put the mental hand close by the carnal one having done so develop a state of trance in yourself for a few moments the way you have been instructed in the chapter about mental training by recognizing yourself with your consciousness in the center of the navel therefore you are now in the fourth dimension passive communication with the own guardian genius in this condition do call your guide and asked him in your mind he might manifest himself to you with the help of your magically prepared hand keep silent and observe the pendulum beseeching the guide at the same time to indicate with one stroke of the pendulum on the glass at no with two strokes perhaps and with three strokes at yes you will be very astonished indeed to notice that the pendulum is beginning to move giving the requested strokes sensitive people will even notice that the hand holding the pendulum has been moved by a strange hand you will probably have the feeling as if your own hand had become a glove with a strange hand in it which is moving the pendulum other persons again will not notice anything at all but have the sensation instead that the desire is guiding the mind indirectly moving the muscles of the hand and hence causing the pendulum to sway to and fro this outcome is absolutely individual and depends on the aptitudes supposing the first attempt to produce the communication with the spiritual leader should fail there is no need of being discouraged after a few more attempts every scholar will certainly succeed in bringing about the communication once the connection has been established one can ask questions to the leader whether mentally or allowed which will be answered with yes or no or with perhaps the questions ought mainly to concern the leader himself for example if he is willing to manifest himself or if he was already embodied on this planet and such like as soon as the contact with the help of the pendulum has been brought about one can use a planchette instead of waiting for the strokes on the glass this gadget is a circular disc which one has to divide in sections marking each of them with a letter of the alphabet a small circular blank is left in the center of it the pendulum will point out single letters and by spelling the letters one will receive messages from the leader in detail after achieving a good result one can arrange for a bigger plan shed containing the entire alphabet numbers sections with yes no and uncertain perhaps days and hours in the center remains again a blank to start from for performances with this planchette the pendulum will be replaced by a small liqueur glass with ink watercolor or indelible pencil trace an arrow serving as a pointer on the leg of the glass now take the lower part of the glass between your forefinger and middle finger and allow the glass to be moved on the letters by the leader's hand the peak of the arrow will then indicate the respective letter to operate an easier gliding motion of the glass one can set the planchette underneath glass because the small liqueur glass will naturally move about much more smoothly on the glass base the scholar may find out for himself such and similar appliances he will also find many constructive observations in the spiritualistic literature all that matters is satisfaction of the most urgent needs of the moment with deceased people and other beings a further method is to beseech the leader to lift the forefinger of the magically prepared hand do ask him to lift the finger once if the answer is no twice in the case of uncertain and three times if the answer is yes noticing a success with the forefinger try it with the other fingers too one will notice that there is always a certain finger that is particularly easy to get on with one scholar might be more efficient in lifting the forefinger another using the middle finger or the ring finger one ought to stick to that finger which is moving best this of course depends on the flexibility the magician will appreciate this method very much because it will enable him to operate a passive connection with the invisible world either with his leader or with a deceased person even in a situation where a planchette or a pencil cannot be used for example in a party out of doors and so on he can even hold this hand in his pocket and get replies of yes or no being in a vast crowd especially if he has acquired a certain skill in this matter having managed all these experiments one can take up the mediumistic writing the method is as follows put a sheet of paper in front of you and take a pencil between thumb and forefinger like you do for writing now push a rubber ring not too tight over your thumb forefinger and middle finger you can manufacture this ring by cutting it off a bicycle tire the purpose of the ring is not to have to concentrate entirely on the holding of the pencil now induce a trance in yourself call your spiritual leader prepare your right hand magically for him in the described manner and beseech him to write with the help of the right hand in the beginning you will notice only some uneven lines later on illegible words and after some exercising words and sentences will come about if one sheet of paper has been filled with writing change it for a new one you can get a reply to every question by constant exercising you will acquire such a skill that the medial writing does not cause any difficulties at all in this manner you will be enabled to call deceased friends relatives and members of your family with whom you want to go in touch the magician will be convinced that there is no such thing as hence and beyond that there are only the different degrees of density in the fourth dimension where the diverse beings exist and death will not mean the end of everything to him but a passing over to the fourth dimension finally i should like to remark that there are several kinds of medial writing according to the aptitudes which i shall mention briefly one the automatic mechanical method in this case the hand moves absolutely automatically without the magician knowing what he wants to write or what the spirit concerned is going to write messages in foreign languages will also be received even in languages the magician himself does not know and has never heard before paintings and drawings can be created as well two the inspirational method the most frequent here the messages will be given in a sort of thinking aloud inside or outside the own personality in this case one practically knows beforehand what the being is about to write by frequent repetition this inspiration will become a loud thinking and listening in the passive communication one will perceive messages from the depth of the soul or from outside of the own self three the intuitive method where you have the feeling as if you did the writing yourself any questions will be answered instantly but oneself appears to know the answer to the question this is a kind of clear knowledge the hand writes words and sentences in full consciousness without the person hearing anything or being inspired in any way the methods can also appear in a mixed kind for example half automatic and half inspirational or intuitive and inspirational all together which of the methods will be the dominant one will only be known after a long spell of exercising each of the methods is good and reliable provided you are using it honestly and candidly practice makes perfect now i should like to give a comment with regard to the questions one is going to ask the beings and to the answers one can expect first of all the magician is supposed not to boast of his exercises and results the more silent he is keeping about his communication with the invisible ones the better for him furthermore when choosing the questions to be asked you always have to consider that the beings you are contacting are subject to laws different from those we have to deal with on this physical plane besides beings which had been living before on this earth will soon lose their orientation because our physical plane is tri-dimensional depending on time and space which does not occur in the sphere of the fourth dimension only highly developed beings are capable to give correct information about time events future etc consequently the magician will first inquire about the home of those beings and rather prefer messages about the fourth dimension for the sake of his own education later on as soon as the scholar has developed his spiritual senses he will no longer need the passive communication with the invisible ones because he is himself able to achieve anything such a being could inform him about the passive communication only serves the purpose to be convinced of the existence of another world which everybody will enter and live in after passing away summary of all exercises of step five one magic mental training space magic two magic psychic training projection of elements outwards a through the own body accumulated through the solar plexus b accumulated through the hands especially dynamically through the fingers three magic physical training preparation to the passive communication with the invisible ones a release of the own hand b preparation of the fingers with the help of the pendulum the pencil the planchette etc passive communication a with the own guardian genius b with deceased people and other beings end of the fifth step step six before i am going to describe the exercises at the sixth step i shall underline once more that all the previous exercises have to be under perfect control in order to keep the balance in the higher degree of development two it would be absolutely useless to skip one of the steps or to omit and neglect one of the exercises any gap would become very perceptible and the scholar would have great difficulties to make up for one or the other problem in his development consequently the main condition for success remains an excellent basic training magic mental training 6 meditation on the own spirit in this step we are faced with the meditation on the spirit i have already been talking in detail about the mental sphere and the mental body hence the spirit in the theoretic part of this book it is worthwhile to have a look now at the functions of the own spirit with respect to the four elements differentiating these functions which can be achieved by special meditation the properties of the spirit in conformity with the four elements are as follows the will is subject to the fire principle the intellect with all its parallel aspects as there are intelligence and memory underlies the principle of air the feeling with all its aspects belongs to the water principle and the consciousness with all its aspects establishing the connection of all the three elements is subordinate to the earth principle look inward as into your own spirit observe yourself and the functions of the spirit and meditate on it you must know how to imagine each of the functions corresponding to the element if you manage to distinguish the functions of the spirit that is if you have got a clear impression about it you may continue this preliminary exercise is very important because it will enable the magician to influence these functions with the respective element on the mental plane in himself as well as in others to master and strengthen or to eliminate them another exercise is to ascertain oneself of the whole mental body in the astral body and together with it in the material body similar to a hand in a fine silk glove which is put into a thick glove your hand ought to feel both gloves the same thing is supposed to occur in the whole mental body you should feel your spirit in the fine astral body and this one again in the material body this feeling is the spirit meditate on this problem at any suitable opportunity as soon as you are quite sure that your spirit is captivating the astral body as well as the material one feeling and moving it and that it is as it were your spirit which performs all the actions through the two wraps you can again go one step farther becoming conscious of the senses in the spirit everybody whether consciously half consciously or nearly subconsciously is executing some action suggested by an inner or an outer impulse without himself paying any attention to it the next exercise will teach you to accomplish actions fully consciously little acts in the beginning later on great ones and you ought to try to extend the duration of each conscious action the wording consciously does not mean that one is all attention with the spirit but with the imagination and the feeling that the spirit with the help of the soul and the material body is accomplishing the action for example if i am walking along the road i do not think about the fact that i am walking but that my spirit is walking and moving the astral and the material feet the same thing happens to the arms and all the other parts of the body if you are able to accomplish any action in this way for at least 10 minutes you are mastering the exercise perfectly the longer you can endure this without side effects such as fits of dizziness feeling of tiredness disturbances of balance all the better for you for this particular reason it is advisable to begin first with small actions over a short spell of time and to extend them until you get used to the attitude and can extend them as long as you like to this experiment is very important because it will give the scholar the possibility to accomplish any action in mental as well as astral connection with the material body according to his working with the mental or the astral sphere such an action is called the magic action the scholar will certainly understand now why magic rituals never show any success with persons who have not been initiated or who have not been trained in magic because people like these do not own the capacity of executing the ritual magically that is they are not prepared to work in connection with the material stuff in a mental and astral way let us take the example of a magnetizer putting his hands on a patient's body or performing magnetic strokes but without allowing his mental and astral hand to emanate at the same time nor imagining that the mental force is pervading and influencing the spirit the astral power doing the same to the astral body of the patient and the material power influencing the material body this magnetizer will never achieve anything else but a partial success because the patient does indeed consist of all the three components namely the body the soul and the spirit that goes without saying for the magician that the mental body is only influencing the mental sphere or the spirit in the same way as the astral body affects the astral sphere only that is the soul and the material body concerns the material world only this law has to be respected hence it is necessary for the magician to adopt a mental as well as a psychic disposition in order to perform actions whether a spirit or in connection with the soul once he has understood this problem very well and mastering the practice perfectly he can advance in his development the next task will deal with the magical training of the senses first of all a very important preliminary exercise similarly to the previous exercise you are realizing in this one as well that not your material i see everything but that it is the spirit which perceives all with the help of the astral and the physical eyes do meditate on this problem as often as possible you will have to imagine at least for five minutes that the spirit is looking through the physical eyes and does actually see the longer you are able to endure this all the better for you you will become a master here as well by constant repetition of this experiment having achieved a success in this exercise with the eyes turn to the ears by realizing that it is not your physical ear that is receiving the sound waves but that the mental ears are perceiving everything with the help of the astral and the material eyes if you can book the same result as you did in the case of the eyes continue in the same manner with the senses and imagine that the spirit with the help of the astral body and this one again with the aid of the material body is feeling objects cold warmth etc practice this experiment diligently until you can master it over the same period with the eyes the ears and the feeling should you wish to develop special faculties try it also with the other two sense organs the olfactory sense and the taste but the keenest attention should be paid to the three aforementioned sense organs that is seeing hearing and feeling which are most useful for practical magic if you achieved good results in the mental ascertainment of the senses try to adjust your spirit to two of the senses at the same time as you did in the concentration of the senses begin with the eyes and the ears if you manage to bring it about four at least five minutes without any interruption to adjust your spirit to three senses at once that is to seeing hearing and feeling if you can manage this as well you have indeed made progress in your magical development this preliminary exercise is very important for the so called clairvoyance claire hearing and clear feeling and ought to be mastered perfectly the scholar will find the principal exercise in the seventh step of this course magic psychic training six preparation to master the orchestra principle in the fifth step we learned how to project the elements outwards now we shall go further and learn how to master the akasha principle with respect to the elements it has been mentioned in the theoretic part that the elements are originating in the akasha principle by which they are dominated and kept in the correct balance two a magician who after a long time of exercising has achieved good results with the elements will also be capable to control the finest principle that is the astral ether the exercise is as follows take up your usual posture asana and close your eyes imagine you happen to be in the center of an unlimited space here is no above nor below nor any sideway this unlimited space is filled with the finest energetic matter the universal ether ether is colorless but to our senses it appears to be of an ultraviolet near black violet color and this is the color in which we do imagine the etheric matter you are inhaling this etheric matter and convey it deliberately through the pulmonary breathing to the blood if you have achieved a certain skill in doing so execute the same operation with consciously breathing through lungs and pores as you did in the accumulation of the vital power but with the one difference that you inhale the colored ether and fill your whole body with it instead of with the vital power deliberate induction of trance with the help of okocho performing this exercise you have to retain the feeling of being united to the entire infinite space you have to be as it were completely secluded from the world it is necessary to become familiar with this unusual state of mind in any case you ought to avoid to loose your consciousness and to fall asleep supposing you do feel tired better break up the exercise immediately and choose another time when you are more fit after some successful exercises in the whole body poor breathing with okocho you can go ahead we have heard that akosha is the primary source that means the sphere of all causes any deliberate cause may be such as a wish a thought any imagination created in this sphere together with the dynamic concentration of willpower unshaken faith and fullest conviction is bound to be realized with the help of the elements regardless of the level or sphere on which the realization has to be necessarily performed this is one of the greatest magic mysteries and a universal key for the magician who will understand its range only later on in the course of his development the scholar should always keep his mind on his own ethical development which will certainly help him to do good and noble deeds only our next exercise will be to win absolute control of the element with the help of the akosha principle in all the three realms the exercise is as follows you are sitting in your usual position inhaling through the lungs and all pores a stream of okosho and filling the whole body with it at this point i should like to mention that okay cannot be accumulated in the same way as vital power at the very inhaling you must imagine that you are starting the control of the four elements consider that you have already got the faculty of mastering the elements and that they will fulfill everything you are ordering or wishing for no matter on which plane the realization of your desires has to happen you ought to feel with every breath your mastery of the elements the faith and the confidence in your control of the element has to be unshakable and imperturbable you must not allow yourself the faintest doubt anyone who is working scrupulously through all these exercises will gain the absolute control of the element after more or less exercising a magician who has established the magical balance with respect to the elements in himself having ennobled his character and having acquired the highest virtues and ideals will very soon attain this power he will feel his faith becoming as firm as a rock and will be absolutely sure of his conviction which is excluding any doubt at all on the other hand a person who has not been working scrupulously enough or scholars who did skip any steps and neglected exercises will feel doubtful about one problem or the other and the influence of the one element which is keeping him in check most of all will not tolerate to be mastered now and here the scholar will realize why such a high value is set on scrupulousness and endurance in the execution of the exercises there is no gap allowed to spring up in the process of development otherwise the scholar would fall behind and some of the problems could only be set right under the greatest difficulties mastering the element with an individual ritual from okocho a scholar who is perfectly sure of his mastering the element will soon notice that he is capable of projecting the elements on all planes outwards as well as inwards very easily so that all seems to be a child's play to him having arrived at this point the magician can turn to transferring the power of the element into a suitable ritual i have been talking already about this problem in detail in the chapter about the rights the magician forms any ritual after his own liking by means of finger positions and gestures of the hands into which he is transferring the power according to his magical development he will certainly dispose of a sufficient amount of intuition so that he can compose the ritual suitable to the element in question he provides it with a self-selected word formula and links it to a certain sound corresponding to the element it is quite impossible to make a mistake here because these rituals are absolutely individual purely personal therefore rights which the magician did compose for this purpose are not to be imparted to anyone else another person could attain the same success in mastering the elements by using these rituals which of course would happen at the cost of the magician's power who actually did compose the rights supposing a person that does not dispose of the magical maturity makes use of such rituals he would certainly suffer great damages and bring ill fate to other people too for whom the rights had been used be therefore very careful and select a kind of rights only which you can use in a large crowd as well without anyone observing it for example a ritual with a finger position in your pocket the genuine magician will always regard this warning as fully justified first of all the magician must try to compose one ritual for an element of the astral sphere with which he is putting the virtue of one element in operation and at the same time a second ritual with the help of which he can dissolve this power again instantly if he likes to in the same way he ought to operate with the other three elements thus creating by his power eight rights for the astral sphere and eight for the material production as well as soon as the rights did become in a way automatic by a long spell of exercising and repeating it will be sufficient to use the ritual only which will make the element start working immediately according to the purpose to be accomplished if the magician wishes the effect to be cancelled it will be enough to use the necessary revoking right this method should become a habit which renders performance easy and possible without any effort or imagination at all before i did mention that the magician is capable to achieve everything through the action of the elements in the astral as well as in the material world to obtain this state of maturity a great amount of patience endurance and tenacity will be required even then when the scholar is developing more and more on higher levels he ought to work the mastering of the elements until he really becomes a true master and provided he be possessed by high ideals and wants to do good deeds only to help mankind the divine providence will bless him endowing him with unexpected faculties to make the most of them magic physical training six in this step any special training of the body is no longer necessary but we shall practically use all the occult powers which the scholar has obtained in the course of the exercises provided he did follow all of the methods scrupulously and the practices did really become habits the scholar can of course deepen the exercises to obtain a better success it is impossible to describe the entire practice of magic which a scholar could master eventually because it would comprehend another volume i will only select some of the most interesting facts from the lot in the meantime the scholar has matured so much that he will succeed in the practice of lower magic without any exception especially if he aims at high and noble ideals only deliberate creation of beings elementals in contrast to thoughts living with their forms in the mental or spiritual sphere the elementals are entities with a certain degree of intelligence deliberately created by a magician such elementals are capable of fulfilling certain tasks on the mental plane and obviously they may be looked at as obedient servants of the magician who can create for himself a whole flock of such servants according to the purpose he aims at through the creation of elementals of the so-called elemental magic type the magician can accomplish everything in the mental sphere without any discrimination of his own or a strange sphere i will only quote a few examples just because of the great variety with the help of the elementals the magician can influence the mind of any other person optionally he can strengthen or weaken man's mental and intellectual faculties he can protect himself or others against foreign influences transmute friendships in animosities or the other way round he can produce a favorable atmosphere in associating with his fellow men and he can bring under his control anybody's will which is not yet developed or profiled the businessman can enlarge the number of his customers and in many other ways the elementals can be a great help for him the genuine magician will always be inspired by good and noble intentions and keep the altruistic motive in mind if he is aiming at the highest level of magical maturity the practice of creating elementals is very simple and an affair of the magician's imagination but the following rules must be considered one the elemental has to be given a form corresponding to the desire one wishes to be fulfilled the form is to be created by intensive imagination two the form the so-called vessel or housing has to be given a name of some sort everything existing whether in a particular shape or shapeless does have a name if it has no name it does not exist three the task is to be impressed on the elemental with the help of the willpower and the imaginative faculty that means an authoritative order has to be given with respect to the kind of effect to be produced here as well the present or imperative form formula must be retained in exactly the same way as i did describe it in the chapter dealing with subconsciousness four the effectiveness is to be impressed on the elemental regardless whether it be question of a permanent or restricted effect these four fundamental rules are to be respected at any rate if one intends to work successfully with elementals i will render the practice even more understandable and an illustrative case may show how it can be done supposing the magician intends to enforce somebody's memory or any other intellectual faculty with the help of an elemental the procedure is as follows the magician imagines a large universal ocean of light from the luminous matter of which he shapes an enormous ball of light compressing and hence accumulating it more and more with the help of his imagination until this ball has the size of approximately 12 to 20 inches 30 to 50 centimeters by this accumulation of light the ball has become similar to a radiating sun now the magician impregnates this light ball with the desire and the firm conviction that it will exhibit the same power and quality as is supposed to revive and reinforce the desired mental faculty such as memory eloquence etc in the respective person as soon as the magician has shaped this mental sun or ball he must give it a suitable name say lucius or the like besides he is fixing the time when this ball is to affect the mental sphere of the person with terms like these you ought to work in the mental sphere until the person concerned has attained the desired faculty in such a way that this faculty has become a habit having fixed the time the magician orders the elemental to dissolve in and return to the ocean of light as soon as it has fulfilled its task expressing it magically birth and death of the elemental are fixed in exactly the same manner as man's or any other being's fate is considering the fact that an elemental knows neither time nor space it may be directed to the mental sphere of the respective person it's sending off is happening quite suddenly as if the connecting link between the own person and that elemental were torn at the same moment one turns to another job one ceases remembering the elemental which had just been created one may also accompany the breaking up with a certain farewell gesture just as one did while creating it all this is entirely left to the scholars discretion who at his present state of development should be quite capable to give such and similar instructions himself the more detached from the magician such an elemental is the more effective it will be in the mental sphere of the person for whom it was created it can work independently in the mental sphere and will not be restricted in any way by the magician's mind now and again it is advisable to reload the elemental to give it a greater power of expansion this is achieved by calling the elemental by the name given to it back from the mental sphere of the person concerned rendering it more dynamic through a new accumulation of light and sending it off again as soon as the elemental has fulfilled the required task it will dissolve itself in the ocean of light this example should suffice to give the magician a rule of conduct how to create elementals the experiment described here is very often used by adepts to the purpose of inspiring and strengthening scholars of a lower standard larvae let us now turn to another rather similar topic which makes us acquainted with the so-called larvae the difference between an elemental and a lava is basically the fact that an elemental is created deliberately by the magician whereas the larvae form themselves involuntarily in the corresponding mental sphere as the result of a strong psychical excitement no matter which kind of excitement this happens to be the stronger the excitement is the more mental material a person is subsiding all the stronger denser and more viable the larvae will become especially in the case of a regular and frequent repetition of the same psychical excitement this involuntary formation of larvae occurs in any human being magically trained or not young or old intelligent or not regardless whether the person knows or ignores it if the psychical excitement is fading due to the fact that no attention at all has been paid to the upsetting affair the larva too will disappear by and by until finally dissolving itself consequently there will be in the mental sphere a constant bringing forth and dying of larvae naturally at the costs of the mental matter of each human being we are causing these events by our own psychical excitements the reasons therefore can be very different usually fear grief sorrow fright hatred and envy and such like producing them the shape which the lava shows depends on the cause of the psychical excitement and is always symbolic anyone who knows something about symbolism will be able to get a clear idea about this problem for example a thought of love will always be symbolized by a heart a thought of hatred by an arrow or a flash etc in spite of the fact that the larvae these undesirable mental inhabitants cannot be seen by the normal human being they do still exist and the well-trained magician can perceive them on the mental plane in sensitive or excitable persons the mental matter is much more separable and the reproduction of larvae is obviously easier and more intense such people wreck themselves their health especially their nerves but they also damage their intellectual faculties and involve other highly suggestible people too all kinds of mass psychosis are originating here there is no need of describing mass psychosis in detail because everybody will have made his observations and experiences regarding this problem evidently the lava is becoming all the stronger the more one is returning to the cause of the psychical excitement and the more attention one is paying to it any lava being condensed very strongly will always show a great deal of self-preservation instinct and will try to prolong its duration of life as far as possible for this reason it stimulates the mind of the given person trying at every opportunity to draw his attention to the cause of excitement and to revive it constantly such a well-fed lava can become fatal to a sensitive or emotional individual and numerous mental disturbances such as persecution mania and similar are the result of it how many people are living under the erroneous supposal to be haunted and destroyed by black magicians whereas they are in fact victims of their own fancies or putting it correctly victims of the lava they have been creating themselves people like these will usually find out all about this problem not before they have left their mortal frame only very few persons are actually haunted magically think of the numerous innocent inquisition victims of the past no doubt that there is a certain advantage for the average man in that the old order has changed yielding place to a new one for if a man's belief is bad it will not be improved by burning but one has thrown out the child together with the bath water without touching on the root of the matter and without verifying the higher laws the magician will now realize why there has been laid such a stress on the importance of introspection control and mastering of the thoughts at the beginning of the practical part of this work supposing he did not get the thoughts under the control of his willpower in the course of his development he would unconsciously create larvae which might become fatal to him sooner or later phantoms next i am going to describe another group of entities existing in the mental sphere namely the group of the phantoms or phantasms the difference between a lava and a phantom is as follows a lava is quite unconsciously adopting a shape in the mental sphere appropriate to the motive of a single or repeated psychical emotion whereas a phantom accepts a certain form originating in the fantasy of man exactly in the same way as it happens to be with the larvae the phantom is likewise reinforced revived and animated by the repeated education of the picture regardless of whatever the matter might be and it will be capable of influencing not only the mental or astral plane but also the material level two examples may serve to illustrate this topic a very remarkable example is the so-called magic persecution mania which i shall describe from two points of view with reference to the phantoms there are certain human beings with an innate scowl or with demonical features and whose outward appearance consequently gives the impression of black magicians but who probably have not the faintest idea of any human science to say nothing of magic at all it is sufficient for any easily suggestible emotionally excitable or rather conceited person to meet with such a type of man whether in business or in personal concern and our test subject as we shall call it will instantly have the sensation of a strong dislike and antipathy towards the antagonist it can happen now that our type is exhibiting a whimsical behavior without wanting to do so nor even knowing about it the first thought entering that test subjects mind will be that he is facing a black magician maybe for some reason or the other this test person is not thinking too highly of this type of man and the first step towards self-suggestion has already been done sooner or later small awkward everyday incident will occur the test person is met with the cause of these incidents will never be cleared up but the blame for them will simply be set on our type of man from now the attention is stirred up one is watching one's own self and the picture of the type becomes more distinct one begins already feeling persecuted the eyes grow more glittering his appearance reveals itself in dreams the picture becomes more vivid emerges eventually even in broad daylight and finally one does constantly live under the impression of being persecuted at every turn with the help of a very lively imagination the picture can be condensed to such a degree that it becomes visible even to other similarly sensitive persons feeling persecuted in this manner our test person may be argued into anything even the worst the picture continually working on his mind he is looking for help begins to pray and does his best to scare away this terrible influence he gets a nervous breakdown becomes gradually insane and ends up whether by committing suicide or else in a mental hospital for the rest of his life the phantom has fulfilled its task how terrific is the shock however if such a spirit must convince itself in the mental sphere that it has been committing a well-organized magic suicide what a bitter disappointment our tight man of course has not the faintest idea of what happened indeed and never will he realize that he was nothing else but a means to an end his face his conduct were only the form the pattern from which our test subject created the destructive being the phantom whose victim he became in the end such and similar sad examples do happen more frequently than you would believe sometimes faster more drastically in other cases more slowly furtively insidiously but should you dare to tell such a persecuted person the truth he would never believe it because the phantom knows well how to hinder its victims from escaping if the divine providence's guiding hand leads such an unhappy persecuted person to a genuine magician who is finding out the phantom's trickery he will face a very difficult task to convince the victim to lead him the right path and to teach him a different normal mode of thinking at certain times especially if the victim is completely under the spell of a phantom the helper will have to interfere very firmly indeed now and again even drastically to restore the mental balance of the individual the second example shows the same occurrence but with a different motive underlying we have to deal here with a phantom of eroticism the birth of such a phantom if one may use the expression of birth at all takes place in the face the beautiful body of a living person sometimes only a photo a pornographic illustration or something similar with the purpose to provoke the lust the sexual instinct regardless of the person belonging to the female or the male sex provided anyone being in love have no opportunity at all of satisfying his personal longing the stronger and the more vehement this yearning will grow the stronger will at the same time the phantom's insinuations become because it is thriving entirely on thoughts of yearning the more the concerned person is trying to resist this unsatisfied love the more obtrusive the phantom will become at first it will turn up in dreams and allow his victim to revel in the most delightful transport of love a little later it will provoke the sexual instinct and allow sexual intercourse in the victim's dreams the pollutions produced in this way help the phantom to become denser and to influence the victim more and more because the sperm is representing the concentrated vital power which the phantom is sucking up like a vampire the point in question here is not the material sperm but the animal vital power accumulated in the sperm the victim is loosing the ground under his feet his willpower is diminishing and the phantom gradually wins the upper hand if fate is not so kind to such a one as to have him enlightened in good time and to find the right distraction for him the phantom's mode of action will result in more dangerous effects the person becomes confused stops eating the nerves are over excited and such like the love phantom can be condensed to such a degree by unsatisfied passion that it can adopt bodily forms seducing his victim to onanism and other artificial stimulation of the genital organs thousands of people have fallen victims of phantoms by committing suicide as the result of disappointment in love or unsatisfied passion this problem recalls the remembrance of true occurrences of the medieval incubi and succubi and the trials for witchcraft connected there with a very dangerous pleasure indeed in the light of the two foregoing instances the magician may observe the activity of the phantasms and he will be able to form such specters himself but do not forget sooner or later he always will run the risk of being influenced or mastered by them he knows what is happening in the normal average individual and how to produce these phantasms consciously in a magic way but never will he be induced to execute such practices himself always remembering the magic sentence love is the law but love under a strong will there is one theme left to be described that one of the phantasms or shadows phantasms are animate presentations of people already deceased i will pay particular attention to this theme to avoid many errors and enable everybody to sift the cha from the wheat as soon as a human being is leaving behind the mortal frame it is at once in the fourth state of aggregation usually called the world beyond without any mediating substance it is impossible for a being to operate on our tri-dimensional sphere just as a fish cannot swim without water the same thing prevails to beings already passed away to the world beyond remembering praising mourning the deceased any memory of or tribute to them will create and enliven imaginary pictures of the dead which as a result of frequent repetition have rather a long duration of life we call these pictures created by the living ones phantoms it is this kind of phantoms which manifest themselves in great numbers to the so-called spiritualists evokers diviners etc the spooks and hobgoblins also are nothing else but phantoms preserving condensing and thriving on the affection and attachment of the bereaved ones as it happens in the case of the shadows this can be stated without difficulties by citing in different places at the same minute a being which manifests itself in all directions at once through the so-called mediums which means nothing else but a manifestation of the dead person's phantom because phantoms can be created by hundreds it is very sad that these phantoms are always mistaken for the real dead persons by the spiritualistic mediums a lot of mischief self-deception and fraudulent is carried out just in this line one can observe for instance that one of the mediums is communicating with a famous leader or general a second one with an artist another with a saint on a different place with a pharaoh and immediately again with an angel therefore it is not surprising at all that this particular field of knowledge will meet with a host of opponents and mockers because of its amount of self-deception no wonder that a phantom has such a strong instinct of self-preservation as to present itself as a vampire to the medium or the whole circle and becomes indeed fatal to the nearest neighborhood as well all this does not mean of course that a genuine magician who is mastering the fourth state of aggregation that is the okosha principle would not be capable of taking up a communication with a deceased person or with an intellect not yet embodied i have quoted the practice already in the chapter about the media mystic writing apart from that any magician is able to form a housing a shape with the help of the imagination transferring it in the fourth state of aggregation and to persuade or even to force the true desired being to enter this form and manifest itself to the external world this practice belongs to the field of necromancy or conjuring magic and has nothing at all to do with the generally known spiritualism the genuine magician will use this practice in extreme cases only and he will not evoke a being away from its fear because anything a being of the fourth state of aggregation has to say or to fulfill in the material or astral world can be achieved by the magician himself through his maturity likewise summary of all exercises of step six one magic mental training one meditation on the own spirit two becoming conscious of the senses in the spirit two magic psychic training one preparation to master the akosha principle two deliberate induction to trance with the help of okocho three mastering of the element with the help of an individual ritual from the akosha posture three magic physical training one deliberate creation of beings a elementals b larvae c phantasms shadows d phantoms end of step six step seven magic mental training seven analysis of the spirit with respect to the practice in the sixth step the scholar learned to become conscious of the own spirit to act deliberately in the body as a spirit and also to use his senses consciously in this stage he will consciously pursue the properties of the spirit or of the mental body and use them as well here of course just like anywhere else the analogy of the element is to be considered it has been mentioned before that the fire element can be transformed into light and conversely without light there would never be any reception of color for the eyes consequently we could not use our eyes without the existence of light from this point of view it is quite obvious that the sense of visual perception is analogous to the fire element this element related to the spirit shows us a specific property the will the mental property belonging to the air element is the intellect with all its aspects and it is imputed to the hearing the water element of the spirit is expressed in the feeling or in life these three element principles of the spirit say fire air and water together are producing the earth principle of the spirit which shows itself in the specific quality of consciousness the okasha principle in its simplest form manifests itself in the conscience the magician will at once understand the great importance of this analogy if he has already developed so far as to achieve the magical equilibrium in the astral body by means of introspection the next task he will be asked to fulfill is to analyze his spirit and to find out which of the elements is predominant in his spirit in the case of people having a very strong will which does not mean stubbornness the fire element will of course be predominant if the intellect or the intelligent with all its aspects is prevailing in the magician spirit the element of air is supposed to be the stronger one in the case the magician should be above all an emotional character the water element will play the main part in him if he has a weak memory the consciousness will be affected very often and one can take it for granted that the prevailing element is that of the earth this classification serves to establish the efficiency of the element in the spirit and to arrange the development so that the weaker elements are balanced by suitable concentration exercises and deep meditation the magician must neither allow the fire principle nor the want of water air or earth to prevail and has to know how to classify his exercises in such a manner that the intensity of his work will neutralize the elements let me explain this problem in detail in the light of an example suppose the magician's intellect to be on a very high level his will being weak and not quite up to the maturity of his intellect then he must try to strengthen his volition by suitable concentration exercises which bring out the fire principle in the spirit he should mainly select exercises which are training the eyes that means exercises of optic imagination considering that the eye corresponds to the fire element but if the magician has a strong will and a weak intellect we shall come to the conclusion that he has to give his keenest attention to the hearing by imagination exercises that is he has to choose concentration and meditation exercises which are fully engaging the ear should however the magician own a strong will and a very good intellect his emotional life or his feelings somehow lagging behind then he will have to render his spirit more emotional which he can accomplish through such imagination and meditation exercises which influence the feeling very strongly if the magician should notice that his astral body as well as his mental body incline mainly towards the earth element say that his thoughts come very slowly in his spirit and that he gets the blues that is to point out that the earth element prevails and that first of all he must train his consciousness with the help of suitable exercises the magician has to develop his spirit to perfect harmony with regard to the elements and to choose exercises corresponding to the elements and at the same time to the senses so that the will or volition hence the fire the intellect hence the air the feeling hence the water and the consciousness hence the earth are enhanced and developed evenly the outcome of this description is the following schedule which i will quote for the sake of a synopsis the akasha principle developing from concentration there is no need of descending to particulars it is also superfluous to quote single exercises of concentration and meditation according to the specific qualities of the elements prevailing in him the scholar can easily compile them he will select imaginations of objects pictures etc for his concentration exercises if he has a weak will after all he went through these exercises already in the second step of this course the above harmony schedule is so to speak a signpost sort of a compass to find out which of the elements is preponderant and which of the exercises has to be taken up more intensively as a result or success of this hermetic classification the akosha principle will reveal itself to him magic psychic training 7 development of the astral senses with the help of elements and fluid condensers a very particular topic we shall deal with on this step concerns the development of the astral senses with regard to the elements the magician's astral senses have been trained and developed in any case in the course of all the preceding exercises nevertheless there is a need of an extraordinary drill in cases of only poor abilities for one or the other faculty because every human being is differently talented therefore it will be opportune to quote exercises here which enable the magician to develop the senses of the astral body fast and without difficulties in the magic mental training of the step six the scholar did learn to become conscious of his spirit and to act as a spirit through the astral body as well as through the material one in pursuance of this i will deal with one of the most fascinating problems namely that of clairvoyance numerous books have been published about this theme but the ones which came into my hands did not offer the slightest practical profit to any magician it is therefore very useful indeed to labor the field of clairvoyance very thoroughly generally speaking clairvoyant means the second site as it is popularly named or the power of seeing without the use of the eye events taking place at a distance actually or in the future or having taken place in the past or seeing deceased people very few authors describe this power from a psychological or from any other point of view and that is why it shall be our next task to very thoroughly study the phenomenon of clairvoyance first of all the magician will realize that there are various kinds of clairvoyance the principal kind is the inborn capacity of clairvoyant which its bearer has been granted whether in the invisible world already or which he brought with him from a former embodiment into his present existence this kind of clairvoyance is the best but very few human beings do enjoy it being hence hence-born clairvoyance who have developed this capacity to such a degree without any effort at all that they can practice it immediately a second kind of clairvoyance is the one which according to an involuntary shifting of elements in the spirit occurs spontaneously and is therefore to be regarded as a pathological symptom a shock in the case of severe illness can also cause the capacity of clairvoyance this happens usually in the case of people who lost their equilibrium as the result of a stroke a nervous breakdown or otherwise through a physical or psychical trauma where as a concomitant a kind of clairvoyant will occur in a more or less distinct form this sort of clairvoyance is naturally undesirable for the magician because it will sooner or later lead to a complete breakdown which not only implies a total loss of this power but is also detrimental to the health and very often the cause of an untimely death clairvoyant of this kind are very pitiable indeed even then if their success should be a convincing proof to this category belong all the persons who having a mediumistic predisposition were induced to clairvoyant by some beings nor is this kind recommendable to the magic practitioner because people like those usually end up in a lunatic asylum a great number of persons who have been taken to mental hospitals and who were meddling with problems of spiritualism without a reliable guidance can blame their hopeless condition on spiritualism and it does not matter in the least whether the motives of this study were earnest intentions or mere curiosity or whatever may have induced them another kind of bringing about clairvoyant which also belongs to this group is the forced production of this power with the help of drugs like opium hashish mezcal payetle soma etc this will be without any interest to the magician because most of these people will fall victims to the addiction to these dangerous drugs which paralyze the ethical and intellectual faculties the willpower and finally the nervous system injuring of course the health as well as the development by the millions such cases are recorded in the orient but they do occur in great numbers in the occident as well as in all the other civilized countries too the magician certainly has the opportunity as long as he has not achieved the necessary maturity of convincing himself of the existence of clairvoyance and other supernatural occurrences in one way or the other but usually and that is the worst of it he does not stop at this conviction he too may become a prey to intoxication and fall into the same condition in which so many drug-stricken persons are for this reason i will not describe any method in this work which would tempt the magician to experiment on such things but i shall only point out quite harmless methods which allow clairvoyance to occur automatically in conformity with the spiritual maturity and as a concomitant of the higher initiation another kind of clairvoyant is the one which is caused by impairment or temporary loss of a sense organ in the case of clairvoyance the organ concerned will be the eye most of the books teaching clairvoyance by staring at an object a magic mirror a crystal ball or a gems are obviously good but they are not adequate to everybody these expedients for the development of clairvoyance are useful only in the hands of a trained magician but they must not call forth clairvoyant by stimulating the nervous optics but they are meant only to serve as a mere aid to an eye that is already trained consciously from the magical point of view not a single dodge however highly praised or scrupulously executed is capable to produce the gift of clairvoyance this capacity depends one on the talents and two on the psychical and astral development and maturity of the magician further chapters in which i shall teach how to make fluid condensers will also include instructions for the production of magic mirrors and other appliances the magician ought not to forget that all the dodges and appliances mentioned here are nothing but poor expedients by no means however are they the real factor which produces the desired result the genuine clairvoyance i will finally mention the last kind of clairvoyance which occurs as a concomitant of the correct magical development and which is caused through the systematic display of the senses in this case the clairvoyant eyes i resolved to quote in this book a secret magical method which has not yet been mentioned in any other work up to now but which is exceedingly useful from the hermetic point of view as well as by analogy with the laws of the elements the practice of the development of the astral senses follows below the magic clairvoyance before i am going to describe the proper exercise i must promise that we have got to deal here with the aspect of the light as you know light is an aspect of the fire and therefore analogous to the will and the eyes consequently what is the point in this experiment is to intensify the imagination of the light that is to imagine the light optically to such a degree as to grant the success aimed at take up your asana posture and imagine you are imbibing the universal light in form and brilliant similar to our sunlight from the universe into your body whether through the pulmonary and poor breathing or imaginarily only regard your body as a hollow organ filled completely with this universal bright white light now concentrate the quality of clairvoyance into this light in the body that is imagine that the light is penetrating everything seeing everything and looking through everything neither space nor time is any hindrance to this light your conviction of this quality of the light has to be rock firm and not the faintest doubt is allowed to arise if you are a religious man it should be easy for you to believe that this universal light is representing a part of god who owns all the qualities described here as soon as you have sucked in the light into your body in this manner together with the quoted qualities and if you can inside feel its tension and penetrating power do accumulate the light with the help of your imagination from the feet and hands towards the head compressing the light to such a degree that it includes both your eyeballs you can also fill first one and then the other eye with the accumulated light as described here if this way should be more suitable for you there are magicians who develop an enliven clairvoyant in one eye only leaving the other eye free and undeveloped it is left entirely to the scholars judgment whether this pattern is worth imitating but as i see it it is far better to prepare both eyes equally for clairvoyance as soon as you have performed the accumulation of light in your eyeballs imagine that your eyes have got all the abilities concentrated in the light endure in this exercise for 10 minutes at least and if you are quite sure that your eyes which are imaginarily filled with the universal light have also accepted the quality of this light allow the light with the help of the imagination to disperse again whether directly from your eyes into the universal ocean of light or to enter your body in its original form and from there dissolving the universal light both the methods described here are equally good and the outcome will be the same the important point is that the eyes as soon as they are set free from the light will become receptive again in the normal way this is necessary for the simple reason that the astral eyes of the magician developed in this manner might not become oversensitive so that they would be unable to discern what the normal eyes or the clairvoyant ones are seeing supposing the magician did fail to dissolve the concentrated light his eyes would probably remain clairvoyant and he would hardly be able to distinguish between material and spiritual matters therefore he ought to have his power of clairvoyant well in hand and allow it to become effective only if he thinks it desirable by frequent repetition of this exercise the magician will achieve such a skill that he can allow his clairvoyant eye the so-called light eye to function in a few moments eyes prepared in this manner whether closed or open can see anything the magician wishes to whether in a crystal globe or a glass ball on a polished wardrobe or in a magic mirror his clairvoyant i will see everything the quality of the clairvoyant perception does then depend exclusively on the purity of his character an excellent remedy contributing to a quicker success and influencing very favorably on the physical eyes so that people suffering from a bad eyesight or stricken with an eye complaint can gain a profit not only from the magical point of view but from the sanitary one as well is the preparation of a magical ophthalmic fire lotion the following ingredients are necessary one a large bottle of distilled water available in any drugstore or dispensary to some chamomile flowers dried or fresh three some herba you frasier also fresh or dried four seven to nine thin ozia or hazelnut switches which you find in the open fields they add a strip of leaves to cut up even and to tie with a string at some spots then let the bunch of switches dry near the warm stove in the sun or in dry air 5. you will also need a piece of filter paper and a small funnel now you can begin to prepare the eye lotion pour 0.44 pint one quarter litre of aqua destilata distilled water into a clean container put it on the fire and when it begins boiling add two teaspoonfuls of the chamomile flowers and one teaspoon full of herbie euphrates let the hole boil up for a few seconds only take it off the fire and cover it with a lid after 10 minutes filter it into another clean container when the tea has cooled down take the bunch of ozia or hazelnut switches light the loose ends on an open flame and let them burn now dip the blazing ends into the tea by doing so the material fire element has been transferred into the tea which one can already regard as a fluid condenser i will write about this in detail in a further chapter now filter this fluid condenser through the filter paper funnel into another clean container this filtering is important to remove eventual chips fragments of charcoal and ashes produced by dipping the burning bunch into the liquid pour the tea into a bowl or a saucer and put it in front of you now do inhale the fire element through the lungs or pores or through both organs at the same time into your body and fill it entirely with this element at this projection there is no great attention to be given to the intensity of the warmth as you will feel it in any case but do not forget that the fire element has to be the bearer of your desire which you transfer to the fire element through your imagination after transferring your desire for having your material eye strengthened and your astral eye developed to the fire element in the same way as you perform the experiment of the light accumulation project the fire element whether by way of the solar plexus or one of your hands or your breathing into the liquid if you get the feeling that the projection is not sufficient repeat the experiment several times but no more than seven to nine times thereby the so prepared condenser will factually turn into a strong essence which has not only a very fine effect on the eyesight but also strengthens enlivens and develops the astral senses now lock up the fluid condenser in a clean bottle and keep it in a cool spot this ophthalmic fire lotion may be used for strengthening the eyesight or for magical purposes in the case of a weak eyesight one could drop this liquid condenser simply into the eyes without any hesitation because the two herb combination is anti-inflammatory and an itonic but for the magical practice that is the development of the astral senses it will suffice to moisten a piece of cotton wool wrapped in gauze or a strip of clean linen and to use it as a poultice during the experiment of animating the eyes with light later on as soon as the astral eyes are better developed the fluid condenser poultices can be omitted and it will be sufficient to perform the accumulation of light in the eyeballs after frequent repetition when the physical eyes are already developed by these light exercises one has only to direct the attention to the astral eye with the desire for being able to see with it apart from the duration of the experiment one might also use these poultices before going to bed to achieve an automatic effect during the night but there is a slight disadvantage the eyes and the eyelids would become super sensitive as a result of the intrusion of the fire element from the frequent use of the poultice it is therefore more serviceable to use the poultices for the duration of the exercises only the poultice is to be fastened with a scarf during the exercise to prevent it from falling off this magic operation is to be performed without the presence of other persons one ought to try to keep the poultice as well as the essence for a certain time so it needs not to be renewed from one experiment to the other and does not fall into the hands of incompetent people not even members of the family if the scholar has worked through all the foregoing exercises he will develop his eye for clairvoyance in an absolutely harmless way in a few months time when well talented even after a few weeks following the method described and recommended here and he will be capable to fulfill all the other tasks and operations still ahead of him in the knowledge of magic it is quite impossible to quote all the successes obtained with the different methods of clairvoyant mentioned here they are so manifold and so reasonably obvious that it must be left to the magician himself how far-reaching he will be able to train his astral eyes at all events he may be warned not to make boast of the abilities he did win or even worse to misuse them to harm his fellow men he ought to utilize them solely for the benefit of mankind time and space won't be a handicap to him and there will remain nothing at all concealed before him as far as his clairvoyant eyes are concerned the magical development of the astral clear hearing this development is very much in line with the one of clairvoyance the faculty of the astral clear hearing is based on the fact that one is able to hear voices even at the remotest distance and at the same time to understand the language of all beings at the beginning this faculty manifests itself in thinking aloud coming from the inside whether from the heart region or from the plexus solaris after a long spell of exercising the astral clear hearing will develop to such a perfection that one can distinctly perceive everything with the supernormal hearing similarly as if there were normal talking to anybody this faculty is also a privilege of all magicians and without it there would scarcely be any progress in magic for this particular reason this type of astral clear hearing has to be handled with the same carefulness as astral seeing and the exercise is destined therefore must not be neglected at any rate all that has been said about astral seeing about predisposition for it about pathological symptoms will turn out to be true as well for clear hearing and clear feeling in connection with this topic i am going to treat the aforementioned faculty let us turn without much ado to the practice of clear hearing for this exercise is required nothing else but a fluid condenser and a small piece of cotton wool make two small tampons from it in the size of the cavity of the ear moisten these cotton plugs a little with the fluid condenser and put both of them in front of you according to the instructions you were given for training the astral eyes you will work now with the air element filling your body with it by breathing through the lungs and pores the whole body like a balloon is assumed to be filled with air do imagine in this air principle the desire for the faculty of clear hearing in your astral body as well as in the material one provided you have the inward certainty that the air element has been sufficiently impregnated with your desire and with your imagination do project the prepared air element into the two small cotton plugs whether through the solar plexus one of your hands or your breath by compressing and accumulating the air element which fills your whole body to such a degree that it will adopt exactly the size of the two cotton wool plugs in front of you you may magically impregnate both of the plugs at the same time or one after the other with the entire amount of the element the main point of this experiment is the firm conviction and the unshakable faith that this faculty is developing swiftly in your case you can use as fluid condensers a strong decoction of chamomile flowers in distilled water take two tablespoonfuls of chamomile flowers for 0.2 pint 1 8 liter of water filter them after scalding and keep the liquid cool to prevent the fluid condenser from getting moldy by the way a moldy condenser is by no means ineffective but insanity did you load these two cotton plugs several times with the air element whether both of them at the same time or each one separately put both into your ear so that they are completely crammed now introduce the akosha principle into your entire head imaginarily transfer yourself with your consciousness to the ear region and do imagine the faculty of the absolute clear hearing imagine the akosha principle introduced into your ears is instantly producing the absolute clear hearing power in yourself after a long time of meditating and concentrating to this effect dissolve the akosha principle again in the universal orchestra free your ears from the cotton wool plugs and keep them very well because they must not be touched by somebody else in case the plug should fall into the hands of incompetent persons you will have to prepare new ones for yourself otherwise it will be sufficient to remove the plugs from the ears to allow the accumulated air element to dissolve again with the help of the imagination it is obviously of greater advantage to use new cotton wool plugs for every experiment and to reload them always anew if one can afford the necessary amount of time should you like to resort to your astral sense of hearing in one of the experiments all you need to do is lead the okosha in the size of your oracles into the inner acoustic ducts of both your ears after a long time of exercising you will be capable to use clear hearing for your purposes as soon as you do not need this faculty anymore try to lead the orchestra element back into the original form that is the universal or kosher by introducing the akosha principle into the acoustic ducts the mental as well as the astral hearing is influenced and developed and you will attain to the physical clear hearing with the help of the concentrated air element anyone meditating intensely on this problem will instantly find the coherence and may compare the operation with the wireless where it is likewise the ether as the akosha principle of mata and the air which are playing their part as transmitters of the sound waves development of the astral clear feeling before passing on to the development of the astral clear feeling let us take up our magical diary and transfer ourselves to the time when we were engaged thoroughly with the introspection of the various good and bad qualities according to the magic mirror we could establish then which of the qualities corresponding to the element in question were predominant in our mind how important introspection then was indeed is clearly shown by the fact that just this preponderance of the element concerned points to our astral sensory center if the fire element had been dominant the sensory center was the head to put it correctly the forehead if it has been the air element it is the heart in the case of prevalence of the water element it is the solar plexus and if it has been the earth element the sensory center is in the hands or the thighs having thus established our astral sensory area let us pass to the practice you have to act in exactly the same manner as you did when training the two previous senses the necessary requisites are a piece of flannel linen or a cotton will plug which you slightly moisten with a fluid condenser this condenser may again be a strong decoction of chamomile flowers at this performance you are loading your body at once with the water element through pulmonary and poor breathing and with the desire that this element may produce clear feeling in you the term of clear feeling means the faculty are perceiving and feeling all the phenomena and powers occurring in the elements and in orchestra to this field also belongs the faculty of psychometry that is the clear perception of present past and future of any object letter and so forth even the power of materialization of any thought any being no matter whether the point in question is a self-created being or an entity already existing in the okosha belongs to this domain other faculties connected with sense perception and touch sensation can also be registered in the category of clear feeling intuition to is originating in clear feeling these few examples may be sufficient to explain the clear feeling power as soon as you have accumulated the water element in the whole body through the pores and through breathing load it with the intense imagination of the faculty of clear feeling you must be absolutely sure that it is strong enough to arouse this faculty really in your astral body with the help of imagination draw the water element from your body weather through the solar plexus the forehead and or by breathing out accumulating it in the cotton wool plug or the piece of flannel soaked in the fluid condenser you may repeat the loading but no more than seven to nine times when doing this exercise do not take up your routine posture but lie down comfortably on a couch or on the floor whatever opportunity you have got the main condition is to lie rather flat only the head remains a little higher to develop the astral clear feeling you need not directly utilize the water element but only the magnetic attractive power of the water before starting the exercise put the fluid condenser on the pre-established sensory area this exercise has to be performed with your eyes closed right from the beginning now do imagine your entire body is as it were actually swimming in the universal water element similarly as if you happen to be in the center of the surface of an endless ocean you feel nothing but water and again water only be very attentive for it is quite possible that during this exercise you will fall into a state of doze and in spite of all your carefulness fall really asleep in that case make up your mind never to give in to sleep the next time four if this should become a habit you would have great difficulties to fight against sleep while doing your exercises in the previously mentioned imagination you have transferred yourself with your consciousness to the sensory area and now imagine that the magnetical power of the water you have accumulated within yourself will enliven the finest particles of your sensation field and produce the astral clear feeling you must be able to imagine the magnetic attractive power of the water so intensively that it becomes an incontestable reality if by long meditation you have got the firm conviction that you have julie enough enlivened this sensory field drop the imagination of universal water gradually dissolve the water element within your body into the universal element again take off the fluid condenser and reduce the concentrated element to the universal element here also the exercise is now at an end in case you should like to use the sensation field practically at one time or the other the transfer of the consciousness into this field will be sufficient to put this faculty into action immediately to further the display of the astral senses of seeing hearing and feeling i deem it opportune to warmly recommend to you to continue these exercises even if you can spend very little time on them only the real success will not be far off we shall emit the development of the other senses for the time being because they are not important enough for the practical use of any magician it is up to the scholar now to think out a scheme for himself to develop the other senses with the help of these three training methods the faculties acquired by this astral development of the senses are so far reaching that there is no need at all to talk much about the enjoyment in the success can be compared in a way to a blind person who deprived of the eyesight for years is suddenly able to see again magic physical training 7 creation of elementaries by different methods if the magician is capable to manage the projection of elements to the outside so that he knows how to project any element he likes to out of himself or directly from the universe he will be able as well to create elementaries for his own and other people's prophet too he will succeed in creating beings which will be his faithful servants not only on the mental level but on the astral and material one likewise according to his producing or rather condensing these beings in a mental astral or material way i have been talking already about the deliberate or conscious creation of thought forms or elementals the difference between an elemental and an elementary is in that an elemental is produced on the base of a deliberate form of thoughts with the help of the magician's imagination and willpower and works mainly on the mental plane for the magicians or other people's benefit an elementary on the other hand is far more penetrating and more subtle in its effect because it is being created from one or several elements in the light of practical examples i will explain the real procreation act of an elementary as thoroughly as possible demonstrating the manner in which the magician has to create an elementary the intuition acquired by the previous training will certainly help the magician to contrive his own practice responsive to the purpose he aims at according to his ethical development he will never dare to create elementaries for evil purposes the invisible world would certainly vow ferocious revenge on him because through the knowledge of how to create elementaries the magician has got a plenitude of power which allows him to achieve anything on the mental astral and material level he likes to he must always consider that it's he himself who is responsible for his deeds and not the elementary he has created the elementaries are compliant tools in the hands of the magician following his orders blindly and granting every desire to him regardless whether a bad thing has to be turned to good account or the other way round in the same manner as you cannot expect a baker's job done by a joiner you cannot demand of an elementary created for a certain purpose the accomplishment of a second task it was not meant for for this particular reason you must never give two or more orders to any of the elementaries four in this case the elementary will do neither one nor the other job well and reliably apart from that there is also the analogy to the elements to be considered it would be quite wrong and against the law if a magician created an elementary which would not be in harmony with the analogous elements as to the shape of the elementary there are no limits to the magician's fantasy and it is entirely left to him to choose the form according to his liking and his intuition avoid however to pick out the shape of living or deceased people you have known or who you have been or are still in connection with by doing so you might easily slip into the reach of the mental or astral body of the respective human being and consequently do him great damage apart from that there is a danger that an elementary might turn against the magician in consequence of its inbred intelligence at any unguarded moment it would understand perfectly to vampirize him or to influence on him indirectly when asleep and to do any possible amount of mischief every magician is advised therefore to take this warning very seriously each elementary has to be given a name at the very moment of its creation it is opportune to choose less common names because the mere utterance of a name will be enough to bring the elementary near the magician at once supposing one has created several elementaries it is advisable to take notes of the names in order not to forget them but these names must not be mentioned to anyone else because another magician being clever enough could easily seize the elementaries and work with them without any effort the power and effectiveness of an elementary entirely depend on its loading the stronger the magician's willpower is all the greater will be the projection of the elements to the outside and an elementary loaded to such an extent becomes of course all the more pervasive and far more effective sometimes an elementary can be so much condensed that it is visible even to an untrained physical eye it is therefore up to the magician himself whether he wants the elementary to work visibly or invisibly just as the case may be the duration of life of an elementary depends on the purpose to which it has been created and this purpose has to be fixed right at the beginning of the creation act as soon as the purpose is fulfilled the magician must dissolve his elementary in its original element with the help of the imagination never omit this process of dissolution because an elementary having performed its task becomes easily independent as the outcome of its instinct of self-preservation and if you forget to do so it likes to escape from your sphere of influence and becomes a vampire in this case the magician would have to face all the karma results caused by such an elementary transmuted into a vampire therefore carefulness and conscientiousness are seriously recommended when you are handling elementaries many magicians determine right at the creation act the kind of disintegration of the elementary by destroying the name of the elementary in question burning it performing a certain write a sign or a gesture or using a formula which they fixed in advance all this is individual and left to the magician's choice a special attention has to be paid to the act of disintegration provided the magician be equal to this task he will be able to force his elementaries to absolute obedience at any time by threatening them with disintegration at all events he should imprint on his mind that he is capable to bring the elementaries under his will and to have complete command of them this is very important if the magician does not wish himself to be the plaything of his self-created beings he will make the experience the better the more faithfully and the more reliably an elementary is serving him the more engaging it will become and he will hate to dissolve it at all but never must the magician give way to this sentimentalism because he would get into the thraldom of elementaries for this reason it is more opportune to destin elementaries for a short life only creating new ones for the same purpose in case of need this does not mean of course that a new elementary should be created every week for the same purpose but it is a disadvantage to keep the same elementary four years for one affair only should the magician intend to create elementaries for his own use he had better form them by the projection of elements through his body elementaries however destined for other people should be created by the projection of elements directly from the universe the magician knows very well that there is an invisible connection between him and every elementary which could be misused very easily if he started to create elementaries by physical projection for other human beings as well the way of how to manage it will be quite understandable to every magician without any doubt it is necessary to talk about the places where elementary should be deposited in the orient elementaries called their edoms are banished into a kailikor where they are preserved a kailikor is a diagram built from stone and corresponding to the edom to which no stranger will ever be admitted the well-trained magician however needs no separate place for it but he will hide the elementary in a spot in the wall realizing that an elementary is neither limited to time nor does it claim a special space hence it will be quite all right in the wall as well as if it would have been accommodated in an open space it is even more suitable to keep it in a wall or any solid big object because it is better to avoid banning it to places where other people are about all the time should a human being happen to come to the same place where an elementary is kept the person would suddenly feel restless and other bad consequences might occur furthermore it has to be fixed right at the beginning of the creation act how the elementary ought to be called up this can be done by whispering the name or thinking it only or simply by a movement of the hand a gesture or a ritual the magician is at liberty to do as he pleases before i am going to particularize the practical part the proper act of creation i should like to remark that it is not necessary for the magician to restrict himself to this practice this being only a small part of practical magic and a hint how the magician is to use his power he should not specialize thereon on the contrary if he is capable to manage these practices perfectly further possibilities are still at his disposal this part of magic is to be followed up in the beginning only and it is up to the magician to utilize it to help himself or other people too and last not least this is the purpose of this theme the act of creation there are four fundamental methods devised for the creation active and elementary one the projection of one element into a ready form no matter whether the point in question be a mental an astral or a material form two the projection of several elements into a ready form which may be a mental an astral or a material form three the projection of one element without any direct form which will be produced by the element in question four the projection of several elements which will be producing their form successively i am going to explain all the four methods thoroughly in the light of practical examples method one take any object of which you want to give the form to the elementary and put it in front of you choose for example a ball it is of no importance at all whether it be a big ball of wood or glass solid or hollow inside a rather large rubber ball will do as well draw the desired element with the help of your imaginative faculty from the universe and imagine it in the form you did choose in such a way that the shape of the object rubber ball is completely filled treat each element you want to work with in the same manner except okay and always engage that element which best responds to your desire or your idea repeat this projection several times each time imagining the sensation that more and more elemental matter is forming accumulating and compressing as soon as you are quite sure that this accumulation of the element is strong enough for the realization of your desire do impregnate this already completed elementary with the concentrated desire that is the purpose you aim at apart from that give a name to the elementary because it cannot exist without a name at the same time limit the period of its lifetime during which it has to fulfill its task supposing you did operate with the element of fire the outcome will have been a fire elementary and you have got a fiery ball if it has been created from the water element the ball will be similar to a glass ball created from the air element the ball will have a bluish color and when produced from the earth element the elementary will appear clay colored provided you did follow all these instructions draw the elementary out of the object and send it on to the job you did select to be done but beforehand order the elementary to go back into its shape immediately after having fulfilled its task in this manner you have the possibility of checking the elementary whether it has or not done the job by approaching the form with a sidereal pendulum if the elementary has returned into the original form say the rubber ball after finishing its work the pendulum will present vibrations because such an elementary has a remarkable magnetical as well as an electrical radiation the pendulum test is very important for you as it demonstrated whether your order has or not been executed later on after having acquired the maturity you will be enabled to watch the work of your elementary by clairvoyance if the pendulum does not show any vibrations at all it will prove the elementary to be still working that is the job is not yet finished when sending off the elementary to do its piece of work you ought never to forget that there are no bounds for an elementary neither time nor space can put obstacles in an elementary's way and it really would be able to round the whole globe in a single moment if necessary you have to be firmly convinced that it will execute your order and obey your will within the time you have fixed without any exception not the slightest doubt about the success must ever enter your mind as soon as you have forwarded the elementary cut off the connecting link between yourself and the elementary as suddenly as if you had used a knife and stopped to think of it instantly after having sent it off you may transfer yourself into a state of vacancy of mind or give your attention to quite another story in short you have to forget the elementary altogether the more skillfully you manage this the more pervasively and undisturbedly will the elementary work if the time you had fixed beforehand has expired make sure with the help of the sidereal pendulum that the elementary has returned into its form in the negative you have the opportunity of dissolving the elementary in the way you had previously determined namely by burning its name with the help of a special ritual or finally by spelling its name from backwards to forwards in an undertone this disintegration or properly speaking this dissolution can also be performed through the normal imagination similar to the method we recommended for the projection of elements you may use the elementary for the same purpose somewhere else too if you like to should your elementary not have returned to the form it is preserved in after the time you fixed and should you suppose your order has not been fulfilled satisfactorily just call back the elementary produce a more intense accumulation of the element by reinforced imagination and projection of the respective element and then send the elementary off once more to do the required job you may repeat this loading as many times as you like until the desired effect has been accomplished such a repetition of the loading will be necessary when you bring your elementary up against a problem the solution of which would exceed its tension and power moreover you have to consider that the effectiveness of an elementary depends on your own mental maturity consequently on your ability to condense an element besides on your will your conviction and your amount of faith which is capable to remove mountains this is the most artless and easiest method of creating elementaries which the magician is using for simple effects only narrowly limited ideas and influences which do not require any special intelligence for example to give an order to another person to offer protection in simple affairs etc as mentioned before mental astral and material effects can be achieved with the help of elementaries in the manner quoted here an elementary entity can be produced without any material shape as well in such a case one has to project the desired element into a form of thoughts operating in exactly the same way you did in the material production this kind of creation of elementaries is more difficult it is true but it has the advantage that the form can also be transferred somewhere else where a material body would not have space enough for example into the corner of a wall and into such spots where a meddling of other people is quite out of question this practice offers so many possibilities to the magician that it is left entirely to his intuition to which purposes he likes to use the elementaries he did create he can for example shield his house or his flat from injuries with the help of an elementary produce a more favorable atmosphere for himself and similar things all of us know that every science can be used for noble purposes as well as for evil ones and so i am sorry to say this practice likewise can be misused for egoistic and malevolent purposes a merchant for example can create an elementary which will aid him to increase the number of his customers all the haunted houses discredited as such by spiteful magicians may be thus interpreted as a production of elementaries deliberately created to such malicious purposes a respectable magician will never degrade himself to such kind of machinations method two although according to this method you may choose any object whatever say a little statue a doll or such like as a suitable form for your elementary i shall in addition make you acquainted with a very ideal secret practice take two thirds of loam and one third part of wax the parts to be understood in volumetric are not in weight sense which means for instance that for one liter of the mass you have to take two thirds one of loam and one third one of wax to get the correct proportion stir the loam with some warm water to a thick pulp and add the beeswax whether completely melted or very softly warmed up knead both ingredients to one mass until the loam is very well mixed with the wax do not take too much water to prepare the loam otherwise the mass will turn out too soft and it would be difficult to operate with it if genuine beeswax be not available any other sewerity ingredient will do such as tallow steering spermaceti and the like which are generally used for making candles this would be a last resort of course because genuine beeswax will be much better now from the thoroughly needed mass form a figure giving it the shape you want the elementary to have if you want to give the shape of a human being to the elementary the mass also ought to be molded on this shape with a rather big nail or any pointed object sink a wide opening while the doll is still warm and soft begin with the head move down as it were along the spinal marrow to the feet thus producing a large hollow inside the wax figure now fill this hollow space up to the opening with a fluid condenser and stop the opening while the figure is still soft to prevent the condenser from leaking out another way is to pour the condenser into the figure after it has cooled down and hardened stopping the opening with liquid wax or with a candle as to the treatment of magic condensers i shall enlarge on this subject in a special chapter if the magician intends to create the elementary for his own purposes only he has to stop the opening of the figure with a cotton wool plug containing a few drops of his own that is organic prima material this is the alpha and omega therefore take a few drops of the own blood or sperm in our case one thing or the other would obviously be sufficient but if both knew me of the first class were connected it would be still more effective supposing a female magician is concerned a drop of her own blood does of course serve the same purpose the cotton wool plug prepared in this manner has to be put first into the hollow of the figure pouring the fluid condenser over it only then not before finally stop the opening a figure like this according to the magic rules is the most ideal form to create in elementary the size of the figure does not matter at all although it is evident that the bigger the doll shape is the more fertile will be your creative imagination but a figure of approximately four inches ten centimeters will do for a skilled magician in case an elementary has to be created and a doll to be shaped for another person the own prima materia is not to be mixed with the fluid condenser otherwise serious damage will be done to the magician the respective person in consequence of the mental astral and material connection would obtain the opportunity to influence the magician directly or indirectly to good as well as to bad effects a figure for example prepared with the mumia and put into cold water will cause shivering fits in the magician's body who created it and the other way around if the doll were exposed to great heat a high fever would be the result a great number of other possibilities are still granted by the magic sympathetic band but i will admit to quote them not to seduce the scholar to any bad doings the aforementioned doll can of course be loaded with one single element only and an elementary can be created in the way described in the previous method but i am going to particularize practice of the second method as well take your wax figure in the left hand and rub it gently with your right hand as if you wanted to animate it with your vital power blow your own breath on it as if you wanted to resuscitate the lifeless figure give your developing elementary the name you have destined to it and speak this name several times into the figure religiously inclined magicians do even baptize the figure in a way similar to the christening of a newborn child and give the name to the figure while performing this ceremony this of course is a matter of opinion of any magician and not absolutely necessary at all events ascertain yourself at this experiment that in this figure you possess a perfect body appropriate to your elementary after your doll has got its name fill your whole body with the help of element breathing with the earth element do project it whether through one of your hands or through the solar plexus outwards and fill the figure with this element beginning from the feet up to the neighborhood of the genitals the earth element has to be accumulated dynamically in these parts when filling the figure now concentrate all the specific properties of the earth such as gravity and the like into it and while you are doing so you must have the firm will and the conviction that the earth element with all its qualities will remain in the figure and work there constantly proceed in the same manner with the water element which you are projecting into the doll's abdominal region after that transfer the air element to the chest region and the fire element into the head as soon as you have projected all the four elements into the figure with the help of imagination you may be sure to have created the astral body of your elementary which has adopted the doll shape but in conformity with your desire could also emanate from the doll whenever you like to accepting the size you prefer the astral body of your elementary will always remain connected by an invisible bond to the material frame in our case the doll and the life as well as the existence of the elementary depend on the physical doll and are bound to reassume the size of the doll after the task is accomplished re-entering and reuniting into the doll shape immediately up to this stage you may repeat the experiment several times and reinforce its efficiency by deep meditation on the act of proceeding provided you have produced the astral body of your elementary in the manner described here you may turn to form the mental body of the elementary as follows with the help of your imagination produce in the doll the mental body which you think is made from the finest etherical matter and see how it is surrounding and wrapping in the entire form of the doll concentrate into the head of the doll all the properties of the soul and the mind which you want your elementary to own and deepen these qualities by meditation provided you are not interested in any special desires you may concentrate on the four specific properties of the mind will intellect feeling and consciousness and deepen them by meditating on them if you are sure that the figure has been sufficiently loaded and enabled to produce the intended effect let us deal with the awakening of life of your elementary accumulate in your right hand such an amount of light from the universe that the hand is shining like a sun that means fiery white red hot take the figure in your left hand and hold your radiant right hand some inches above it exhale your warm breath to the doll's navel region and speak the name of the elementary allowed into it when doing so imagine that the light of your right hand is growing less and fading away from your right hand with each breath entering into the puppet right at the first blowing your breath to it imagine that the doll's heart is beginning to beat and the blood to circulate your imagination must be so intense that you can feel the life in the puppet quite distinctly as it were physically at the seventh exhaling the light in your right hand will have completely disappeared having passed into the doll the astral form of your doll is throbbing and alive at the eighth breathing to it think that the astral body of your figure is accepting your breath and beginning to breathe regularly at the ninth blowing your breath into it call your elementary by its name and at the same time shout aloud and ecstatically live do live be alive the last be alive must be exclaimed enthusiastically and convincingly in the unshakable faith that the desired elementary has been created be positively sure that according to the analogous laws of nature a perfect being has actually been brought into the world arrived at this point one can either go on or wrap the figure in a piece of genuine silk for further use silk is known to be the best magic insulating material the figure is to be kept in a favorable spot inaccessible to anybody else no foreigner must ever come in touch with the figure any further work is already a matter of imagination provided you wish the advance put the figure again in front of you imagine the astral body together with a mental body emanating from the puppet you have to imagine your elementary very much like a tiny complete human being in a way as if you were looking at a normal human being through a minimizing glass it is also entirely up to you to see in your elementary a male or a female being this depending on the kind of the task it is expected to fulfill the same is true for the clothing of it your fantasy may decide by the whim or pleasure of the moment according to the task ahead you may link the elementary by imagination to a self-selected ritual allow it swiftly to grow as big as you want it to be impress on your elementary right from the beginning the command that it should adopt the size you decided for it this will give you the chance to have your elementary shrunk to a dwarf or grown a giant it depends absolutely on your will and your liking whether you want to give your elementary an attractive or a less beautiful form the purpose two on which you decide also plays a part here as every astral and mental body is independent on time and space mata being no obstacle for it it is necessary for you to communicate this property to your elementary right from the beginning by imagination it is therefore advisable for every magician to link important occurrences when operating with an elementary to a self-chosen ritual because this occurrence wished for will become a routine matter so that he is dispensed from using his volition or imagination the ritual connected to the respective occurrence producing the necessary power and effect when working with the elementary for a longer period the elementary may be automatically or in conformity with a desire condensed to such an extent that it becomes visible even to an untrained physical eye it is however better to make the elementary work in an invisible manner which of course has to be preset by an imaginary agreement with the elementary at the beginning such a created elementary will fulfill first mental later on astral and after longer use even material tasks all depends on the purpose to which the magician has created it the purpose that is the task must be incorporated into the elementary in the very moment of its creation afterwards it would be more difficult to impress new qualities on it hence before creating an elementary one ought to form a written plan of action in which everything is carefully considered before starting the proper creation never permit an elementary to outmaneuver you though it may have developed to such a degree as to set free grand mental astral or even physical effects always confine the elementary after having done its duty to its own body say the wax figure with the aid of your pre-established ritual never allowing it to pursue its own will be always aware of your own authority and magic power and make always sure that life and death of the elementary are in your hand in the form of the wax figure representing the body of the elementary the destruction of this figure or the flowing away of the fluid condenser will cause the elementary's death or its decomposition as the wax figure must always be wrapped in genuine silk one may be certain that the astral body will neither enter the figure nor slip out of it because the silk will stop it to know and to remember this is most important if you separate the elementary from its body sending it off somewhere or ordering it to produce any effects the figure must be free that is unwrapped if by any chance you have wrapped the figure in silk when the astral body happens to be outside of it you might be killing the elementary eventually dissolving it instantly in the same way as if you were touching a magician whose astral body is outside his physical body killing him at the same moment because the linking thread between the astral body and the mortal frame has been torn by the touch as you see you will have to treat a created elementary in exactly the same way as if you were dealing with any human being the dissolution of an elementary must not take place suddenly because the power set free has its origin in the magician himself and the sudden drawback could eventually cause severe damages to the magician especially if his elementary is already capable to produce strong physical effects which even the magician himself would not be able to accomplish in such a case the disintegration has to be performed gradually therefore be on your guard beforehand against the elementary growing to such an extent as to outdo the magician's physical astral and mental powers hence i recommend the following two methods to disintegrate in elementary as mentioned previously the destruction must not happen all of a sudden for example by burning the figure without unloading it etc one should always consider that according to the method described here it's a part of the own self of the own ego that has been projected into the elementary and that any abrupt destruction would result in a strong magical drawback should not the magician be sufficiently resistant or otherwise protected against such drawbacks he would certainly suffer severe damages of his health such as dysfunctions of the heart nervous breakdown paralysis of different kinds mental defects and so forth therefore carefulness is always advised where magic is concerned and one must strictly observe the directions and instructions given here then you will never incur any danger with respect to your health or otherwise only a fool ignoring or disobeying the rules will injure himself or other people a sensible righteous person will do good deeds only for the benefit of mankind thus achieving high grades in magic because he will never affront the laws of nature and spirit the process of decomposition is in the case of an elementary exactly the same as in the passing away of man unless the dissolving method was fixed at the very moment of creation thereby deciding on another process take the figure in your hand and imagine the usual breathing process of the astral body in it you feel the beating of the heart and the throbbing of the blood now load your right hand which you are imagining to be of a black violet color with okocho pointedly to the heart of the figure all of a sudden like a streak of lightning by doing so you have killed your elementary the heart stands still the breathing has ceased withdraw the mental body from the figure because through the streak of the okosho the bond between the mental and the astral body has been torn as soon as you did imagine the mental body being outside the puppet dissolve it with the help of your imagination into the universal light alike to steam evaporating after that pass to the decomposition of the astral body in the puppet by having one element after the other evaporated imaginarily into the universal element begin doing so with the fire element in the head of the figure then follows the air element in the neighborhood of the chest the water element in the abdomen and finally the earth element in the feet now somehow open the hollow of the puppet and to make short work of doing break its head off catch the contents that means the fluid condenser with a piece of blotting paper which you have to burn then the puppet itself could be used again to make a new elementary when needed a newly modeled but it is more advisable to destroy it by burning or burying it in a lonely spot this would be the normal way of decomposition apart from that i am going to describe another method which is generally used when an elementary had been condensed to such a degree that it did accomplish physical tasks or else had become so strong that it refused to obey the magician's power having got beyond his control to protect yourself against any magic reaction or the cunning of the elementary keep exactly within the following directions prepare a very hot tub bath as hot as your body can endure it go into the bathtub and sit down holding your left hand a figure wrapped in silk the right hand is loaded with okocho now shake off the silk wrapping with your left hand that is the one you are holding the figure in the very moment you are holding the naked figure immediately above the water direct the destructive beam of okosha to the heart of the figure at the same time dip the doll below the water and while doing so think that all the power all abilities the whole life is passing with the help of the water into your own body your soul and your spirit this process represents a very abrupt destruction of the created being that is your elementary your body soul and spirit are accepting the life in a tolerable manner the rest of the power remains in the water and you are protected against any magic drawback or reaction now leave the bath dry yourself leaving however the puppet still in the water until it has cooled down the silk in which the puppet had been wrapped might also have glided into the water let the cold water flow off into the drain or empty it but make sure that nobody else comes in touch with this water if your eyes are already clairvoyant and if you notice that the figure is still emanating an aura throw it once more into the hot water and concentrate on the water taking away the last bit of life the dole will dissolve and melt in the hot water and the fluid condenser that is the liquid will mix up with the hot water you may perform this experiment in any case even if you don't see the emanation at least you will thus be sure that all life in the elementary is extinct burn or bury the remains of the doll together with the silk with this last operation the elementary is dead and gone for you before i am going to terminate this chapter i would like to give a few hints to the magician who has to work with elementaries these hints are of a paramount importance for the practitioner exactly as the hours of birth and death of man are already predestined by fate decide on the duration of life of your elementary in the same way at the very creation act that means fix the exact dying hour which you have got to keep to the very minute even if you have determined your elementary to live for years it is therefore recommended to write down everything beforehand not to forget anything at all if your elementaries have been created and condensed to such a degree as to be able to talk like human beings they will try to beseech or even threaten you not to destroy them on no account descent to promises of any kind nor do yield to bluffs or threats sooner or later you would lose the control of the elementaries and that would be disastrous for you indeed even though the elementaries had served you faithfully and you had become quite fond of them it must be all the same to you to destroy them indifferent and in cold blood as soon as their hour of death has struck start the act of decomposition without any pity just as if you were performing any kind of magic operation how very important it is to fix the exact hour of death of an elementary you may argue from the fact that in case anything should happen to you and you should die before the elementary's hour is come this latter would dissolve itself at the moment fixed by you however though departed you might perform your destroying work in the okosha sphere too if you were as yet interested in it i am not going to describe here how anything like that could be managed because it would be out of the scope of this book being however on the astral level you would as a perfect magician understand that automatically if in such a case the lifetime of an elementary were not limited to terms that means had not the hour of death been exactly fixed the elementary would go on existing for hundreds of years after the producer's death and constantly be viable in the meantime it would probably grow into a spook a hobgoblin or vampire and inokasho its creator that is the magician would be responsible for all the actions produced by the elementary now the question will probably arise how many of such or similar elementaries may be created by a magician this problem is entirely left to him he should decide how many he needs for his own purposes and how many he wants to create for other people some magicians have a throng of elementaries as their servants fulfilling faithfully all the tasks they are ordered to do thus for example the magician might have elementaries pointing out every danger to him in advance others again will protect him or forward messages to him etc there is no use to quote all the possibilities because all of them are individual and depend on the desires which the magician wants to be realized with the help of the elementaries the speaking pictures columns and statues in the temples of the ancients may certainly be interpreted as an outgrowth of elementary's magic the legend concerning the golem who is said to have been created by the wise rabbi lowe in prague goes likewise back to the creation of elementaries but in the case of the golem the creation has been produced with the rights of the quabbler anybody who knows of qualistic mysticism is informed about these facts the synthesis remains the same as quoted in this method method three before i am going to explain the practice of the third method i would like to remark that very little is known about it and it is used by a few oriental adepts only if any magician should decide in favor of this third method he has of course to consider everything i have written about the creation of elementaries up to now first of all he must think out a schedule and reflect very intensively about the purpose of the elementary that is his own task and get a clear idea of it apart from that he must have regard to the form which he intends to choose and whether he means to create a male a female or perhaps a twofold nature being moreover he has instantly to determine the appropriate name and make a note of it nor or he to forget to fix the duration of life of the elementary timing the exact day and hour supposing the elementary is meant for his personal use he has to perform the loading through the projection of his own body in case it is meant for somebody else he has to execute the projection directly from the universe furthermore he has to make sure about the manner in which he intends to call his elementary whether by a ritual a formula a gesture or the like he must know if he wishes to bind it to a puppet a figure or to any object else a talisman or a pentacle he has also to decide on the place in which the elementary has to be kept in order not to come in touch with strangers having considered all this carefully and having taken written notes of it to be able to overlook the entire schedule he may begin with the practical side in this third method i am going to describe an elementary created with a fire element and which the magician may use for his own purposes draw a circle on a piece of paper in the middle of it two squares one upon another so that you get a regular octagon this octagon indicates that we have to do with a symbol of the four elements in their positive and negative results the circle itself represents the all-comprehensive akosha principle from which the four elements are come mark the center of the octagon by any sign you like which indicates the symbol of the elementary the paper you are using for the drawing has to be big enough to allow the created elementary to stand in the center of the octagon that means on the sign now engrave the same sign on a very tiny round object best on a copper silver or gold disc any other kind of metal will also do in a diameter of half an inch one centimeter if nothing else is available a small piece of wood will do for our purpose too it is however more profitable to do the engraving with a pointed object on a small metal disc all the more if the elementary in question is destined to have a longer lifetime llamas in tibet working with it name the big drawing the great kylie core and the small engraving the little kailikor which they sometimes have about hidden in their clothing the difference is the great kailikor in tibet is not drawn on paper as quoted here but it is built from stones gathered there and erected in a lonely spot where no human being will ever be admitted the construction of a big kylie core has a diameter of approximately three to four yards for our purposes it is sufficient to draw the big kylicore on paper with red ink chinese ink or any other liquid which cannot be wiped out very easily all these preparations being finished let us begin with the real creation of the elementary sit down comfortably in your asana spread the paper already prepared and put the small kailiko exactly into the center of the big kailakor as soon as you take your hand off the small kailakor call the name you chose for the elementary the small kailikor is now serving as a starting point and as a stop for the projection of elements do inhale the fire elementary the small kailakor is now serving as a starting point poor breathing and impregnate the fire element with your desire whether right away in your body or animate it afterwards with the help of your imagination when it has been projected outside your body in order to achieve a quicker success both possibilities may be used without any incidents now project the fire element out of your body through one of the starting points of your astral body and accumulate it to such a degree that the entire contents of your body are compressed to a very small spark of fire confine this spark with the help of your will or your imagination to the surface of your small kylie core do repeat this experiment at least seven times concentrate and accumulate the element on the surface of your small kylie core mix one concentrated spark with another so that the spark is growing bigger with each repetition after repeating it seven times the spark might already have the size of a small flame let similar to the light of a candle if you are getting tired you may transfer the little flame with the help of your sending off and guarding method into the spot where you intend to keep the elementary this may be inside a wall or any other place not easily accessible where you will hide it now remove the small kailakor from the big one guard it well or carry it with you if you find it more profitable do fold up the big kylie core keep it well two and the first task will be finished next time all you have to do is to spread out the great kailikor in front of you put the small one in its center and call the being with the name given to it and the flame will appear on the surface of your small kylie core repeat the projection with the fire element and let the small flame let grow bigger and bigger by each accumulation if in this manner you have accumulated a flame which has reached the size and height of the wanted elementary transmute the flame into the desired shape by imagination and there with your elementary will have been created moreover you can still load it with the fire element for a longer time to obtain a greater intensity of the elementary the more frequently you will repeat this exercise all the greater will be the effectiveness of your elementary the way of working with it is the same as described in the two previous methods except the loading takes always place in the great kailikor and when calling the elementary it will suffice to use your ritual or take the small kailikor in your hand and give it the corresponding order this method is very popular in tibet and the elementaries there are called edems the destruction of a yidam is brought about by the decomposition process with the help of imagination according to the instructions mentioned in methods one and two provided that you have not decided on any other individual method of dissolution which you excogitated for yourself the use of such an elementary is so manifold that i am unable to quote all the possibilities here for example there are yetims created for the treatment of sick people others transferring objects bringing messages to scholars and friends protecting the magician and pointing out any dangers to him influencing other people and doing many other things of the sort according to the creator's desire it will always be advisable not to give too many orders to a yidam and what is most profitable is to develop a single ability and one field of it activity only in such an elementary one has to exactly observe the appointed duration of life as we described it very distinctly in the previous methods it is entirely up to yourself to create several edoms if you like to it is also remarkable that a yeedum can be produced with the other elements and even with all the four elements in the same manner the process undergoing a slight change in so far as one does not begin with the fire element but with that of the earth then follows the water element the air element and finally it is the turn of the fire element hereby all has been said about the handling of the third method method four following this method you may operate in the same way as described in method three with a big and a small kylocore but with the exception that you imagine the complete shape of the elementary right at the beginning the elementary created in this manner is instantly ready made and complete its efficacy and power being increased by frequently repeating the projection of the elements although this method is somehow more difficult an experienced magician possessed by a good imagination will manage it very easily as well in the orient elementaries consequently edoms are created in this way while pictures of demons and images of god serve as patterns for their representation all the other conditions such as duration loading giving of a name calling preservation sphere of activity purpose decomposition process are exactly the same as in the previous three methods magical animation of pictures to the four methods concerning the creation of elementaries also belongs the magical animation of pictures pictures images of saints statues and the like especially in cultic places are very often told to emanate an exceedingly strong magic power producing miraculous effects on the bodies spirits and souls of their worshippers and adorers the blessed silence calmness and the religious ambient the visitors in churches and places of pilgrimage are meeting with is certainly known to everybody so there is no need to talk about it in detail all the healings in places of pilgrimage which have been in part substantiated even scientifically but still unable to be completely explained can be imputed to the animation of pictures and statues the strange atmosphere surrounding these objects causes their emanation which however has been first created by the attention or adoration of thousands of admirers and believers this kind of animation of images and statues of saints is positively unconscious but from the magical standpoint there exists a conscious animation of pictures and the like too for the behalf of which i am going to quote a very useful and practical instruction the conscious magical animation of pictures belongs as mentioned at the beginning of this chapter to that kind of methods of creating elementaries where it does not matter at all whether an ordinary picture or the image of a saint has been selected to the purpose of animation the synthesis is and remains always the same emanation and its purpose undergoing change only the main thing to know is not to animate portraits of persons who are still alive as the result of the sympathetic connection through their bodies souls and minds one could eventually do severe damages to the persons in question by creating images linked by an invisible secret bond of sympathy with the original nor should portrait be animated which could produce sexual appetites or improper motives for example women in the nude and so on in these cases the magician would incur the danger of thereby producing an elementary which might become a vampire an incubus or succubus for himself never create elementary's interested in evoking sexual sensations and feelings these precautionary measures should be observed by anybody who is engaged in the animation of portraits of which i am going to describe the practice as follows should you select an oil painting in order to animate it you don't directly have to use a fluid condenser although it would contribute to intensifying the quick creation of an elementary do cut a piece of blotting paper or cardboard to the size of the painting in the frame moisten it with a fluid condenser and let the paper dry as soon as this little expedient has been prepared open the rear part of the painting and put the paper with the dry condenser directly upon the back side of the painting it does not matter whether the painting has been done on canvas silk paper or any other material now put a piece of standard paper over it and fix it with nails or adhesive tapes you can also secure the rear part of the frame with cardboard to avoid any dust entering it thus the painting has been prepared for animation you can hang it now on the wall or leave it standing on the table in front of you now form the mental body with the help of your imagination so that it has to correspond exactly to the form and size of the selected painting in case you have a painting in front of you which is representing part of the figure in question only you have got to make up the missing part in your mind but supposing the picture in question happens to be smaller than the normal size for example a small snapshot you will have to consider this matter during your working as well the rest of the process is the same as quoted in the second method concerning the creation of elementaries where a wax figure has been used provided you did transfer the imagination of the mental body into the painting now transfer the respective properties of the spirit such as will intellect feeling and consciousness into it with the help of your imagination after that imagine the covering of the mental body in this covering you have to concentrate the faculties the sphere of activity and so forth in short all that seems desirable to you if the elementary in question happened to be selected for the use of other people you must not project the elements through your own body but you have to take the necessary element directly from the universe but if the portrait has been destined to serve your own purposes you had better perform the projection of the elements through your own body this has to be done with one single element but you may as well transfer all the four elements and even the akasha principle into your portrait supposing you might work with all the four elements you have to operate with the projection in exactly the same manner as if you were creating a complete human being as soon as you have projected the elements into your astral body and given a certain density to the portrait call it into being the kind of calling into being is the same as described in method two with respect to the wax lone figure the kind of decomposition 2 can be the same provided you have not prepared an individual method more suitable for you the magician will do well not to leave the elementary in the pictures after frequent repetitions but to keep it possibly in the wall behind the portrait when the magician has animated his painting he may allow it to emanate from the portrait and utilize it for his purpose in the manner previously mentioned but if he left the elementary in the portrait it could be condensed to such a degree that it might be spotted even by persons who are not initiated beware therefore of boasting of things like that better keep the practice strictly secret in order not to get ill reputed as a black magician or a sorcerer statues busts etc might be animated in the same manner only in this case it would be necessary to manage the condenser somehow into the interior of the bust or if that is not possible spread the bust externally with the fluid condenser and let dry in the light of some examples i have now discussed a very important chapter of practical magic on account of which every magician can work out many other methods i found it opportune to quote these four methods only the application of which will certainly be clear to everybody it has to be said in advance that any scholar who has not been working scrupulously through all the previous steps will never succeed in creating a correct elementary perfect in every direction with this hint i am terminating the seventh step of this manual summary of all exercises of step seven one magic mental training analysis of the spirit with respect to the practice two magic psychic training development of the astral senses with the help of elements and fluid condensers a clairvoyance b clear hearing c clear feeling 3 magic physical training 1. creation of elementaries with the help of four different methods two magic animation of pictures end of the seventh step step eight magic mental training 8 preparation for mental wandering i am going to deal in this step with a chapter which is of great importance in magic i mean the problem of leaving the body or the separation of the mental and later on of the astral body from the material one every magician who was working conscientiously in the magic art must own this faculty because it is offering him the opportunity of leaving his physical body any time he likes to in order to bridge the greatest distances to visit strange continents in short to transfer himself to any place where he wishes to be this apparently complicated faculty is very simple for a skilled magician in the same way as a pigeon is leaving the dovecot as easily can the magician leave his physical body to be take himself anywhere else where he will see hear and feel everything this faculty does not serve the magician to satisfy his own curiosity or to perceive more distinctly what is happening on the spot in question but it is mainly destined to contribute to the well-being of other people there is no material hindrance for him neither time nor space exists for his spirit and he can rush around the whole world in a single moment if he likes to severing the mental body from the material one also enables him to move about freely not only on our planet but he can also transfer himself with his mental body into other spheres as well which depends on his maturity thus he will learn to know the whole universe and in case of need to be also active in some other spheres up to a certain degree it ought to be the pride of every magician to get acquainted with the whole universe that is the macrocosm this being the proper purpose of the mental or the spiritual wandering a good deal could be said theoretically about this faculty and everything else connected with it but as this work is to be a textbook for practitioners let us not waste any time with the description of experiences and occurrences such as every magician will collect himself for the benefit of his own conviction for this reason we shall give our attention immediately to the practical part the development of the mental wandering which is in fact a transference of the consciousness consequently of the spirit it would be well for the scholar to pass at first through some preliminary exercises to get sort of preparatory training a very important preliminary exercise for the mental wandering is as follows sit down in your conventional asana in front of a mirror in which you can see yourself entirely if you have a big mirror you need not have a great distance between your body and the mirror but with a small mirror the distance must be so great that the mirror reflects your whole figure regard your reflected image for a few moments then close your eyes and imagine mentally your reflection in the mirror provided you have been able to imprint your features very distinctly on your imaginative faculty you may continue if you did not accomplish any result you have got to repeat the experiment until you have managed mentally to retain each detail of your reflected image a particular attention has to be given to the head and the facial expression as soon as you have been able imaginarily to grasp your reflected image in all the shades of the original then transfer your consciousness into your reflected image in such a manner that you feel personified or embodied in it this transference of the consciousness serves the purpose to teach you how to observe your body from the side of your reflected image if you notice any success try to observe those objects which are visible in the mirror but always from the side of your reflected image this exercise will be very difficult for you at the beginning therefore you had better resort to your imaginative faculty impressing all the objects which happen to be near you very scrupulously on your mind in the course of time you will certainly manage to notice everything after transplanting yourself into your reflected image as distinctly as if you did watch it with your physical eyes when this faculty too has become a habit you are fit for the actual mental wandering the scholar may seriously be warned not to risk this experiment before having thoroughly practiced every single previous exercise because the detachment or severing of the consciousness from the physical body might cause severe mental disturbances in frail people for this reason the warning is absolutely understandable and those scholars only who can positively assert that they are mastering the exercises of all the previous steps may approach not only this exercise but all the others still ahead without any fear of damaging their health or their spirit practice of mental wandering in the room for the exercise of the actual mental wandering the material mirror is no longer required and you are working from now as follows take up your normal position asana and do concentrate on your spirit think while you are doing so that it is your spirit which is seeing hearing and perceiving everything and absolutely independent from time and space able to move around freely as if still connected with the physical body this operation has to be performed before every mental wandering the deeper the penetration of your meditation will be the stronger your sensory experience and the certainty that your spirit is unrestrained and able to step out of your body according to your will all the better and quicker will be your progress and your success in mental wandering provided you have the sensation of inner liberty and self-determination following this meditation which will require a few minutes only then imagine yourself stepping out of your body justice from a shell and standing beside this body of yours you must understand how to transplant your consciousness into your spirit in such a manner that you can feel yourself like standing physically beside your body just as if you were slipping out of a dressing gown or any other clothing in exactly the same way this performance has to take place with the help of your imagination after all you have been exercising long enough the imagination of the own spirit in the shape and size of your body in front of your reflected image now try to look at your body sitting in its customary position as if it did not belong to you at all try then often to practice this consciousness of self-determination and standing aside the point being to focus your attention on the body seek to see with your eyes every single detail on your body such as the expression of the face with your eyes closed the calm regular breathing the clothing the seat on which your body is resting and so on at the beginning everything is based of course on your imaginative faculty as mentioned before later on there will be no more need of any imagination at all as soon as you are positively sure of consciously standing beside and watching your body your next task will be to examine your nearest environs your imagination will be a good help for you here as well after having finished your exercise always return into your body just as if you were slipping on your garment wake up and check at once if everything you did imagine is corresponding to the facts you should attain to such a skill of imagination that your imaginary mind does perceive all the objects in the room as distinctly and truly as if you were looking at these objects with your physical eyes provided you can book a success after a long spell of exercising you may go a step ahead now transfer yourself beside your body and do not remain standing on one spot but try similar to a child to walk up and down in the room and do it in a manner as if you were relying on your physical body your own weightlessness and the sensation of timelessness and spacelessness may tempt you eventually to move about with unusually long strides unaccustomed to your normal body an occurrence which you ought to avoid in the beginning in order to allow manifest separation of the mental body what matters is that you regard yourself as being earthbound much later after a long time of practice you can make use of the rules of the mental sphere short distances providing the striding up and down in the exercise room has been successful go through the door as if you were inside of your physical body and try to leave the room step by step at first it will be sufficient to go to the next room or to the hall where you are repeating the imagination of the objects there and as soon as you have returned into the material body identify these objects with the reality provided you are quite sure about being able to move about in your mental body and also to perceive everything in the same way as with your physical body you are ready to continue practice makes perfect and the whole secret of mental wandering lies in continuous exercising it cannot be emphasized often enough how very important all these exercises are because they represent the preliminary step to the astral separation from the body known as the so-called ecstasy during which not only the spirit but also the soul together with the spirit are separating from the body i will treat this problem in detail in step 9 under the heading magic psychic training once you are able to move about with the spiritual mental body in the same way as with the physical body in the own house or flat short walks outside of it may be undertaken too visits to friends relatives etc at first it will be quite sufficient to visit the house of a neighbor or to look up friends and acquaintances first who live in the vicinity and whom you do know really very well provided you have obtained certain experiences after some of these exercises other impressions not only those of objects are to be one two the consciousness is being skilled in the course of these exercises to such an extent that it will be capable of receiving sense impressions such as hearing seeing and feeling in the mental body in exactly the same way as if one were actually present with one's physical body any result like this can of course only be achieved by persistent exercises during the training of mental wandering go on visiting friends just to see what they are occupied with at this moment for example you see people doing everyday work at first you can do this with the help of the imagination in order to make sure whether the imagination coincides with the real facts all you need to do is to imagine that the person you did watch with your mental body is doing something quite different eventually the contrary if you can manage this imagination just as easily being however in contradiction to your perception you may be sure then that neither one or the other is true that all is still a matter of imagination in this case you have indeed not advanced far enough and you have to repeat the experiment constantly until you are capable to discriminate the real facts from the imagination at first you will only sense that the imagination responds factually to the reality because your senses have been already withdrawn in a great measure from your body and been transplanted into the mental body later on there is no more reason for apprehensions because you are winning complete certainty about this problem and consequently you will be able to differentiate correctly whether the thing seen heard and felt while being in the mental body a real fact or imagination after a long time of exercises this faculty will become quite familiar to the magician and wherever he is transferring his mental body he will only perceive what is really true and coincides absolutely with the circumstances provided you have made good progress in so far as you can walk greater distances without feeling tired exactly like in normally walking only then you have matured to such a degree as to occupy yourself with the laws of timelessness and spacelessness not before do separate in the manner just described from your material body and think that you are not bound anymore neither to time nor to space while being in the mental body do meditate on your being with it everywhere you want to be at this moment you will achieve this firm conviction by frequent deep meditation while being in the mental body do you wish to be anywhere with your mental body it will be sufficient for you to suppose you have already arrived there and your wish will be granted instantly in the case of greater distances you will obtain a satisfying skill only after a long period of patient exercises and frequent transferences you ought of course to visit places for the second time which are known to you personally only when you are finally convinced of being capable to perceive everything with your senses no matter where your mental body happens to be at whatever distance at whatever time of the day then you are allowed to visit places absolutely unknown to you the scent perceptions accepted on the very spots will leave no room for a shadow of a doubt that all you have seen heard or felt there was not fully up to the facts you must exercise for a long time and with great patience before you get used to such unfamiliar impressions for this particular reason while being in your mental body you will do well to visit tropical countries sea coasts large cities to put it in a nutshell go everywhere and see all your heart is craving for you will achieve a wonderful success after numerous exercises the purpose of mental wandering is not only to perceive everything on earth which is actually happening at the moment but to be really active there too for example you are not only capable to see an illness with your mental eyes but you have also the chance of treating sick people with your mental body right on the spot or of performing other favorable influences all the success and the work you have learned to accomplish previously with the help of an elementary can now be managed by your own mental body on the mental plane if at last you are at home in the entire physical world with the help of your mental wandering and if this world has nothing new to offer you try to visit other spheres in your mental body contacting the beings there and acquiring a knowledge of things the average human being has not the faintest idea of the elevation to any other sphere is now very simple and you have nothing else to do but to concentrate on the sphere which you would like to visit with your mental body you will feel as it were world round and lifted up vertically through a funnel the transition from our material world to another sphere happens as fast as if you were flying around the whole world in a single moment i had better say no more about this problem just now because the magician must make his own experience as far as this part of mental wandering is concerned at the beginning in mental wandering the magician will probably feel an invincible drowsiness which he must fight with all his strength this kind of drowsiness is explained as the result of the separation of the mental body that is the vital bond between the mental and the astral body is loosened which is consequently causing a transference of the consciousness from which follows drowsiness as soon as the sending off of the mental body has become a matter of routine by constant exercises the drowsiness will gradually vanish the mastery of this kind of wandering described here is an indispensable preparation to send off the astral body the detailed description of this practice will follow in the next step under the heading of magic psychic training magic psychic training 8. the great moment of now he who has arrived in his development to this point has to consider the kind of thinking mainly the plastical thinking very carefully the concentration power promoted by many years of experiments is producing very impressive pictures in the okosha by plastical thinking pictures which are animated to a high extent and therefore seek to be realized hence one should always foster noble and pure thoughts and endeavor to transmute passions into good qualities the magician's soul should be ennobled by now to such a degree that he is no longer capable of evil thoughts or of wishing anything bad to other people a magician has got to be kind obliging and ready to help at any time to assist by word and deed to act generously considerably and discreetly he must be free from ambition superciliousness and avoid any boasting all such passions would be reflected in the yokosu and the akosha principle being analogous to harmony or kosher itself would certainly put the greatest obstacles in the magician's way to stop his further development if not to make it quite impossible any further rising in a case like that would be out of question just remember bulwar's novel zanoni in which the guardian of the threshold nobody else but okosho sees the high mysteries not come overnight to half-baked or unworthy people okosha will understand to derange such a person mentally arouse doubts of all kinds in him or hold him prisoner by vicissitudes and reverses of fortune in order to protect the mysteries in every possible way these mysteries will always remain hidden from incompetent persons though hundreds of books should be published about them a true magician does not know any hatred against religions or sects since he knows that every religion does have a fixed system which is intended to lead to god and that is why he does respect them no clinging to the past it is a well-known fact to him that every religion has made mistakes but he does not condemn it because every dogma is serving the spiritual maturity of its followers in due course of his development the magician goes through that stage of maturity where he can see with his mental eyes through every idea every action and deed no matter whether present past or future and it is quite obvious that he might feel tempted to judge and condemn his fellow men but by doing so he would act against the divine laws and create a disharmony a magician like that will not be ripe enough and make the experience that akosha will dim his faculty of clairvoyance and maya will deceive him he must realize that the good and the bad are entitled to exist and each has to fulfill a task no sooner is a magician allowed to reprove or to approach a person with his faults and weak points than he be directly requested to do so and should he obey to such an entreaty ought to do so with delicacy and discretion the genuine magician takes life such as it is he is enjoying the good things and learning something from the bad ones but never will he hang his head he is aware of his own weak sides and tries to overcome them but he ignores any thoughts of repentance since they are negative thoughts which are consequently to avoid it is sufficient for him to recognize his own faults and never to relapse into them anymore for this reason it would be fundamentally wrong to muse on the past and to feel sorry that fate did serve you with this or that disagreeable thing only weaklings do complain all the time expecting to be commiserated a true magician knows very well that impressions of the past may be animated by recalling them to the mind thus producing new motives for putting new obstacles in the way that is why the magician lives if possible exclusively in the present time looking back only if need arise he will limit to the most urgent any plans concerning his future and keep away from phantasmagoria and daydreaming nor will he waste the abilities acquired in hard travail or give any chance to the subconsciousness to handicap him a magician works purposefully on his development without neglecting his material duties which he is fulfilling just as scrupulously as the task of his psychical progress consequently he will always look himself straight in the eye he is supposed to be modest and as far as his development is concerned discreet since the akosha principle ignores time and space acting permanently in the present time for the concept of time depends on our senses the magician is advised to adapt himself as much as possible to akosho he must acknowledge as representative the great moment of now thinking and acting according to it concentration disturbances as a compass of the magic equilibrium the faculty of concentration with respect to the elements depends on the magic equilibrium and is at the same time the best standard to check which of the astral bodies elements have to be brought under control yet for example if the fire element can still get hold of the magician's astral faculties he will not succeed very well in plastical visionary imagination exercises in the case of the air element the acoustic concentration will probably become more difficult for him as for the water element difficulties will arise from the concentration on the feeling and in the case of the earth element the control of the consciousness will be impaired mental wandering for example or trance where a transference of consciousness is required will become rather difficult indeed and in such a case it would be necessary for him to follow intensively those concentration exercises which are affecting and influencing the respective element finally the magician has permanently to perform and to deepen the concentration exercises a sure sign of magic balance will always be equally managing all kinds of concentration visionary acoustic tactual and conscious ones arrived at this stage the magician is supposed to keep any imagination at least four fifteen minutes in his mind without the slightest disturbance no matter which of the elements is concerned he ought to manage all sorts of concentrations equally well without feeling one or the other of the more in his line should this be the case it would be a sure sign that the equilibrium of the elements in body spirit and soul has not yet been established perfectly then the learner has to seek to redress the magic balance by insidious training if he does not do so all the shortcomings will delay his further spiritual work now follows the psychical magic training in particular we are concerned here with the or and ob of the quadrilists and the control of the electric and the magnetic fluid mastering the electric and magnetic fluids the electric and magnetic fluids according to the informations given in the theoretical part there are two main kinds of fluids originating in the four elements namely the electric and the magnetic fluid the electric fluid comes from the fire principle the magnetic one from the water principle the error principle is the mediating element between the two the earth element is bipolar hence containing both the fluids and it is electromagnetic electric in the center and on the periphery magnetic according to there are four described laws these two fluids are working in all of the spheres in the mental as well as in the astral sphere and in the material world too these fluids are the cause of everything being next let us deal with the knowledge and control of these two fluids because managing these fluids will enable the magician to achieve everything in all spheres no matter whether the mental the astral or the material world be concerned the effect of any of these fluids however depends on the magician's maturity whether he is strong enough and able to form the cause in the respective sphere there are two fundamental methods in order to work with both the fluids the inductive and the deductive method the magician will learn how to use both methods in this step let us then discuss the electric fluid first control of the electric fluid inductive method this exercise can be performed sitting down or standing up just as it is more convenient for the individual take up your usual poise close your eyes and think of your body as being hollow furthermore imagine that you are the center of a fiery ball which is including the whole universe you have got to imagine the fiery element red hot and bright similar to the sun you will feel the warmth on the periphery of your own body automatically at this imagination because you did already learn all about this sensation in the chapter referring to the projection therefore there is no need to draw your attention to it doing this exercise you should perceive the expansion of the fire element within your own body you have to imagine that the universal fire element when expanding presses the light into your hollow body the more intensive and the more fiery you imagine the universal fire ball the more light is pressed into your body through the pores of the skin from all directions your whole body being loaded with light you must perceive the pressure of the light inside of your body feeling it like a balloon swelled with light the pressure of the light is supposed to go from the outside to the inside at this moment you will experience the sensation of an unusual fullness as if you were ready to burst go on breathing calmly while performing this exercise because in this dynamic accumulation of light you will be tempted to hold back your breath which you must avoid at all events as soon as you have produced so strong an accumulation of light that is to say a light dynamite that your body is nearly bursting you will feel at the same moment that your whole body mainly your fingertips have been loaded with a strong electric current do impress this perception very firmly on your mind because this is factually the electric fluid i am talking about if you accomplish this accumulation allow the universal fire to fade away slowly with the help of the imagination until it has gone out completely at the same time you have to imagine that the accumulated light is diminishing two the power of expansion becoming weaker and weaker gradually until everything inside and outside yourself has turned pale and finally extinct hereby the first exercise of the inductive method concerning the electric fluid is at an end when after several practices you will have achieved a certain skill in producing the electric fluid without difficulties in your body you may begin to perform the desire impregnation on the electric fluid all you have to do is to imagine that the light accumulated inside of yourself or better to say the electric fluid contained in the light does reinforce and increase your active powers in the spirit in the soul and in the body in this manner you can arouse all the active faculties qualities etc which are imputed to the fire element and the air element in yourself you have the possibility for example to increase your willpower your faith and your control of the element to a supernatural degree it is indeed quite impossible to describe the range of power and strength achieved in this way with mere words and you will be convinced of it best by your own experiences in the previous steps i did always point out how very important it is to enable the soul to be free of passions and to try to reach the magic equilibrium if an unrighteous and passionate person who has not yet reached the full magic balance wish to perform these exercises he would increase his passions only by activating them he would hardly be able to control his passions which could become fateful for him everybody will see that these warnings are not mere words or a simple moral lecture a well-balanced personality however has nothing to fear on the contrary he will have every opportunity to ascend and be fortunate enough to realize his highest ideals control of the magnetic fluid inductive method the performance with this fluid is exactly the same you are sitting in your asana imagining that you are as hollow as a rubber ball but capable to take in the magnetic fluid now close your eyes and imagine the whole universe being filled with water and yourself standing in the center of it you will automatically perceive the wetness and coolness on the periphery of your body but do not give your full attention to this fact imagine how your body similar to a dry sponge thrown into the water is sucking in the magnetic power from the universal water element this imagination exercise must be permanently increased until you feel a dynamite in yourself similar to a fully inflated pneumatic tire and until you are quite certain that a higher accumulation is impossible you are feeling the magnetic fluid like a contracting and in the same time attracting force as soon as you have reached the peak of the magnetic power accumulation allow the imagination to melt gradually away and the magnetic power accumulated inside of you to dissolve into infinity if you are able to discriminate the difference between the electric and the magnetic fluid by means of frequent exercises you will have the opportunity just as in the case of the electric fluid to strengthen those faculties in yourself which are indwelling in the watery and the earth element such as medium mystic faculties clear feeling psychometry thought reading medial writing and others more control of the electric fluid deductive method you cannot work with this method before being able to manage both the previous methods the deductive method is similar to the inductive one but just in the opposite sequence do accumulate the fire element drawn from the universe into your body through the pulmonary and the poor breathing or through both of them eventually by sheer imagination two in the same manner you have learned it with respect to the inhaling of elements and their accumulation while storing up the fire element give your attention less to the warmth which will be perceived automatically the accumulated element will produce an enormous expansion causing a strong irradiation of the electric fluid in the body to the outside which will be mainly perceived by the skin of the whole body just as if you underwent a treatment with an electric machine or a high frequency current the irradiation of the electric fluid will become stronger and stronger more pervasive and more subtle by frequent repetitions and by increasing the accumulation of the element it can even be condensed to such a degree that it can be seen and felt by people not being trained at all you can increase this force so far that you can make a neon lamp light up these exercises are naturally not meant for such and similar purposes and experiments like these are destined to serve your own conviction only apart from that this power is for higher and nobler purposes as soon as in this exercise you reach the peak accumulation of an element that is to say the highest degree of irradiation let the fire element together with the electric fluid dissolve into the universe the body get rid of the elements and the exercise is now at an end control of the magnetic fluid deductive method similar to the deductive method of handling the electric fluid described in the foregoing exercise is the process concerning the control of the magnetic fluid with the only difference that instead of the fire the water element will play its part accumulate the water element as dynamically as possible in your body which you have imaginably made hollow to perform this accumulation you may use the breathing through the lungs and the paws or both kinds together or else let the mere imagination play its role although you will perceive the wetness and coolness in any case during this accumulation focus your attention on the external layer and the skin of your body you will feel an astringent coolness and an attracting power like that of a real magnet especially on the periphery and the skin of the body in the beginning and as a result of an extremely strong dynamization the sensation of this fluid will produce sort of a paralyzing effect until you get accustomed to it if you manage to increase the accumulation to the peak dissolve the water element together with the magnetic fluid gradually into the universe by means of the imagination and this is the end of this exercise you ought to master all these four methods so well as to be able to perform each method in a few moments with your imagination and to produce the magnetic or the electric fluid inductively you will accomplish this by frequent and indefatigable training be very attentive because controlling these two fluids is very important since everything will be within your reach with the help of these two universal powers no matter on which of the spheres the magician wishes to exercise his influence in the beginning these exercises have to be performed with the eyes closed later on with open eyes without any regard to the situation one happens to be it is important to to know that in all the four methods the magician will be inclined to strain the muscles or to hold the breath which ought to be avoided these exercises must be performed in a calm and so to speak unconcerned way and should not be noticed by anyone else the magician will find out now that the inductive method serves to direct a power from the universe to the inside that is to say into his body his soul and his spirit whereas the deductive method is destined to send off a fluid from the inside to the outside if the magician has gained a very good experience in the four methods he can extend the exercise as follows while following the inductive method he has increased the electric fluid in him to the highest point and allowing the external fire element to dissolve in nothingness he can hold the electric fluid with its tension power and the respective fire element inside his body when he has kept this fluid for a long time as long as he could endure it then he may allow it to flow gradually back again into the universe the magician can operate in the same manner with the magnetic fluid do not advance before both these methods quoted here have not been practiced for so long until you are capable to master them very well the methods of controlling the electric and magnetic fluids described here are a kind of preliminary exercises and as soon as they have become familiar to the magician he may pass on to the final namely the capital method concerning the mastery of the electromagnetic fluid which i will describe in the following chapter consider the following analogies head and chest correspond to the electric fluid abdomen thighs and feet to the magnetic fluid now the magician's task will be to load the feet thighs and abdomen up to the pit of the stomach with the magnetic fluid the head neck and chest on the other hand with the electric fluid in the manner described previously he must be capable to load both these fluids dynamically one after the other in the two regions of his body to such a degree that he gets the sensation as if he were about to burst after a prolonged period of exercises he will be able to retain both fluids having arrived at this point he presses the electric fluid into the right breast with the help of his imagination forming a hollow around the heart region but he better leave the left breast free from loading when charging the upper region of his body that means he does not load the left breast at all this done he is withdrawing the accumulated magnetic fluid from the lower region of his body with the help of his imagination via the left breast storing up this fluid in the entire left hand right down to the fingertips so the hand is turning out magnetic and now possesses an astringent cooling irradiation in the same way one proceeds with the right hand by accumulating the electric fluid imaginatively drawn from the upper region that is the head and the right breast into the hand the right hand is hereby becoming electric one can feel the expansive hot electric energy in the whole hand but mostly in the fingertips provided that there is no personal use for both powers one dissolves them letting them fly free from the hands into the universe in the imaginative way by managing these exercises perfectly one has become master of the electromagnetic fluid that is to say master of two universal powers with the help of which one can practically achieve anything blessed be the magician's electric and magnetic hands which will be a potential value and may become a real blessing for mankind magic physical training eight provided the magician be perfect in all the stages of the magic training of the body he will not require any special education in this line i will therefore limit myself to give some instructions and hints which may become useful in the following chapters subsequently follows an influencing method through the elements which the magician can use for his own self-influencing or to influence other people magic influence through the elements especially worthy of mention are the following four systems which may successfully be practiced in self-influencing as well as in influencing other people according to the elements these methods are as follow one fire through combustion two air through evaporation three water through mixture for earth through decomposition it would be possible to quote hundreds of varieties and opportunities of producing such an influence through the elements and a big book could be written about this problem i will restrict myself to one example only for each element in the light of this example every magician can enrich his own practical experiments and elaborate new practices by himself these four methods exert an influence on the most subtle astral matrix of the material world inducing the elements to exert their influence wherever the magician does allow them to work indirectly supposing that the point is to influence a human being the material element will analogously act on the connecting link between the astral and the material body a magician mastering the elements perfectly on every plane does not require any of these methods he will reach his purpose by a direct influence just as fast and surely but now and again even the highest magician will make use of the lower powers for the simple reason that the highest powers as well as the lowest do serve and obey him on the other hand as the result of an insufficient spiritual maturity some magicians like to utilize these mean practices in order to satisfy their desires because these powers do blindly execute the will of the person who understands to master them one will probably ask now what for these lower powers and consequently such methods can be made helpful two examples may serve to answer this question supposing a scholar who is not yet quite closely acquainted with magic is asking a higher brother for help because in spite of all his efforts he is not able to fight alone a passion a harmful habit a heredity or such like by himself or he would at least lose to much time before overcoming and equalizing this passion the higher brother has the possibility to influence the element corresponding to the passion according to the respective method and can in this manner reduce the negative form of the influencing element with the result that the scholar can fight against it without great effort or do away with the influence of the element altogether the second example supposes the magician to be about to treat a long-lasting chronic disease with the help of the elements a couple of direct treatments would not be sufficient to fight the sickness and a frequent repetition takes too much time the magician can in cases like these use the powers as helping factors hundreds of similar cases do exist where the elements of this category will be of a great benefit to the magician he may use all the powers he does know about a magician must be a person of absolute moral integrity his mind and his motives must be noble if he will follow the motto unto the pure all things appear working with the four elements the magician has three fields of activity corresponding to one the immediate effect two the timed effect which is limited to a certain time three the permanent effect which is fading as time goes on and finally ceases altogether if the operation is not renewed subsequently follows the description of the practice the influence through the fire element combustion arrange for a piece of flannel or blotting paper in the size of four by four inches 10 by 10 centimeters in emergency a piece of ordinary paper will do as well moisten it with any liquid condenser and allow it to dry gradually now put the paper in front of you and with the help of the imagination through the material elements concentrate the wish you would like to get realized into it do not forget at this point to time the effect that is whether you wish an instant a limited or a permanent effect as soon as the paper has been loaded with your desire do burn it in an open fire or on the flame of a burning candle during the combustion do concentrate once more on the fact that the power is released by burning the paper or the flannel inducing the grosser elements to bring about the result you desire the ashes left behind are worthless from the magic point of view and you may deal with them as you would do with ordinary ashes performing this experiment you can arrange the effect in a different way too so that it will occur the very moment the person for whom the operation is performed as eat or drink something warm enters a warm room or comes anyhow in touch with a heat factor this operation offers the opportunity to to project the fire element into the paper to load it with a desire and to hand it over to the universal fire element or to the akosha principle in order to release the effect there are still many other ways which might be followed but i suppose this example will be sufficient to give the magician a useful hint in this direction the influence through the air element evaporation pour so much ordinary water into a small basin or a saucer made from any kind of metal until it only covers the bottom up to a few millimeters add a few drops of a fluid condenser which corresponds to the air element if such a condenser is not available you may use the universal fluid condenser now operate in exactly the same manner as mentioned in the instructions given for the previous element by concentrating your wish on the liquid having done so put the basin on the hot stove on a gas or spirit flame an electric cooker must not be used and let the desire loaded liquid evaporate while doing so you have to concentrate on the steam wishing the desire to be sucked in by the air element whereby the most subtle air principle is induced to realize your desire do concentrate until the last drop of water has evaporated and the experiment will come to an end together with the desire impregnation you can also combine the order that the person who is to be influenced should with every single breath inhale the air principle whereby the desire is beginning to be realized this happens to be only one example and every magician may establish similar versions of the influence operated through the air element the influence through the water element mixture take a new beaker glass dish or a small vars and go to a running water a well a spring or a river try not to be watched while you are performing this experiment do fill the container with water and pour a few drops of the fluid condenser responsive to the water element into it in an emergency take a universal fluid condenser now performing the wish impregnation proceed in exactly the same manner as you did with the previous element as soon as the water prepared in the described manner has been satisfactorily loaded through the water which is now impregnated as it works statically into the river and give the respective order which will be fulfilled promptly by the most subtle particles of the water element if the person who is to be influenced comes in touch with the water element in one way or the other for example by washing drinking by rain etc the water element will become immediately active and release the effect which has been required this example ought to be sufficient and based on it the magician can compose several individual methods which will be just as effective as this one the influence through the earth element decomposition when working with this element it can be done in two different ways one exactly in the same way as in the previous experiment by taking some water from a river or rain water tap water should not be taken to which one is adding some of the fluid condenser corresponding to the earth element one can use a universal condenser too it is also possible to work with the fluid condenser alone without diluting it with water by throwing the impregnated liquid together with the solid concentration into the earth instead of throwing it into the water for the simple reason that earth is sucking in the liquid and thus the earth element produces the required effect do not choose for this experiment a road where other people are walking to and fro but the solitude of a tiny spot in the garden in a meadow or in the fields supposing you have none of these possibilities in a big city a flower pot with some soil in it will do as well two take an apple a pear or even better a potato and make a hole into it with a potato peeler or with a knife into this whole pour a bit of fluid condenser suitable for the earth instead you may here use a universal condenser as a substitute now go on as you did before when loading the potato with the desire impregnation afterwards do bury the potato in the ground each manipulation requires the concentrated meditation that the earth element will produce the effect you wish to obtain to this series also belongs the sympathetic and the mammal magic the so-called transplantation in this case one does not work with fluid condensers but with mummies these are constituent parts of the body such as hair nails perspiration urine i am not going to describe this lower kind of magic in detail because every magician can compose these practices by himself if he wishes to follow them these two examples should be sufficient to illustrate the influence of the earth element following these instructions the magician can work out various methods and his intuition will inspire him to do the right thing as one can see in the light of these examples the magician's trained willpower remains the decisive factor which is moving the universal elements to produce the desired effect with the help of the imagination he can repeat the operations optionally until the success has been achieved the magician can undertake these experiments for himself too that means for the sake of self-influencing there is another kind of self-influencing where the beings of the elements the so-called salamanders fairies mermaids and goblins do execute the required effect with the help of the elements in my second work referring to the practice of magical evocation i will publish the way of summoning forth these beings making them visible and useful to the magician the fluid condenses any object can be influenced by any fluid regardless of being loaded electrically magnetically with elements or okosho through the aid of the imagination and the will but according to the laws of analogy and by experience it has been found out that not each object and not each kind of liquid is suitable to retain an accumulated power for a long time or to accumulate it at all similar to the fact that electricity magnetism and heat do have good and bad conductors the higher powers offer the same bipolar aspect good conductors own an enormous accumulative capacity because the powers concentrated in them are stored up and can be held back at will in the hermetic science such accumulators are called fluid condensers there are three principal groups of them one solid fluid condensers two liquid fluid condensers three airform fluid condensers to the principal group of solid fluid condensers belong first of all resins and metals as for the metals gold occupies the highest rank tiniest jots even atomic particles of gold grant an enormous amount of condensation power to any liquid for this reason gold is added in smallest portions to any fluid condenser but more about this subject will follow later on the second group comprehends lacquers oils tinctures and extracts composed from resins which have been produced by certain plants just as gold occupies the first rank among the solid substances being analogous to the sun that is to say corresponding to the power and the light of the sun so among the liquid substances the human blood and the seed sperm play the part of the gold sometimes they can replace the gold completely because tiny particles of blood or sperm dropped into a liquid will grant an excellent accumulative power to it to the third group are attributed all kinds of fumigations flavors smelling waters evaporations about which i will not talk in detail because they are less important for the magic practice apart from that i can extensively treat the most valuable fluid condensers only which are required for the practice should i have to quote all these various kinds here their production and the possibilities of using them should i have moreover to consider all the precious and semi-precious stones too which doubtless may be excellent condensers this brief summary alone would grow out into a voluminous book there are two kinds of preparing fluid condensers in the first line there is the simple type which is made from one material or one plant being useful almost for any purpose the second kind consists of compound fluid condensers which are prepared from several materials or plants owning extremely strong accumulative properties since a small quantity of gold has to be added to any fluid condenser whatever the magician's attention was directed of course to the gold first he can get it in special photoshops as soluble gold chloride called aurum chloratum which is used for toning photographic papers one gram of gold chloride diluted in 20 grams of distilled water produces a wonderful gold tincture five to ten drops of this tincture are sufficient for 100 grams of a fluid condenser those people who are experienced in laboratory jobs can produce a gold tincture by electrolysis themselves in homeopathic or electro homeopathic medicines are being sold a gold preparation could be bought without difficulties the homeopathic gold medicines are mostly dilutions of gold chlorides or have been manufactured by electrolysis they are tinctures like auram chloratan d1 to d3 or a muriaticum d1 to d3 or a metallicum d1 to d3 the expert of homeopathy does know of course that the capital d stands for decimal power supposing you have neither the one or the other opportunity to obtain a gold tincture there is nothing else for you to do but to produce it yourself after the recipe of the ancient alchemists a very simple thing indeed take a piece of gold of the best quality no new gold the more carrots the better the conventional 14 karat gold will do the shape of the gold does not matter at all it may be a ring a brooch a chain or the lid of a gold watch as well now prepare some distilled water if you can't get it some rainwater will do as well pour so much water in any container that the weight of it is equal to 10 times the weight of the gold for example if you have 10 grams of gold add 100 grams of distilled water do heat this piece of gold on an open flame until it is red hot and throw it into the water afterwards take care that the wire to which the piece of gold is tied or the pliers you are holding it with will not touch the water the best thing is a wire hook from which you are throwing off the red hot gold the water will hiss and squirt as a result of the sudden chilling off therefore be careful not to get burnt by the hissing water beware of your eyes the pure gold only is allowed to fall into the water now let the water and the gold cool down and repeat this procedure seven to ten times cooling seven to ten times is enough for the gold because with each cooling a lot of water two is evaporating mainly if you are working with a small quantity of water by the quick cooling of the gold oxidation tiny atomic particles are set free and thus the water will be saturated with gold the ancient alchemists called this sort of saturated water or any other herb essence chilled with red hot gold the quintessence of gold in the hot way and they used it as an admixture to other alchemistic preparations but we want to use it for our fluid condensers the liquid saturated with gold will now be filtered through a piece of fine linen filter paper or cotton wool into a funnel and preserved for our purposes one does usually pour 5 to 10 drops only of this gold tincture into approximately three ounces of fluid condenser the piece of gold used for the preparation of this gold tincture has to be cleaned with polishing powder for further use preparation of the simple fluid condenser take a handful of fresh or dry chamomile flowers put them into a pot and pour so much cold water over them until they are covered completely let the chamomile flowers boil for about 20 minutes cool them but leave the lid on the pot and strain the decoction put this on the fire again and allow it to decoct slowly to about 50 grams a few drops more or less do not matter at all let the extract cool and for better preservation mix it with the same quantity in our case with 50 grams of spirit or alcohol if necessary you may take fuel alcohol too to this mixture add about 10 drops of your gold tincture if you wish to use the condenser for your own purposes you may still strengthen it by adding a drop of your blood or sperm if possible both together on a swab of cotton wool throw this afterwards without any scruples into the condenser and shake the lot well then pour all in a funnel through filter paper or linen into a small bottle and keep it well corked in a cool and dark place ready to use any fluid condenser which has been prepared in this manner does not lose its efficiency even after many years the condenser must be well shaken each time you are going to use it the bottle is to cork again after withdrawing some out of it in the same way you can prepare several universal condensers from russian or genuine chinese tea from lily blossoms best are the white ones poplar leaves alron roots or mandragora roots arnica montana acacia flowers any simple fluid condenser prepared from one plant is sufficient for normal use such as influencing through the elements or developing the astral senses by means of the fluid condensers the compound universal fluid condenser to achieve extremely strong accumulations of power or perform tasks which are destined to produce not only a mental or astral influence but also a material one as well for example creating elementaries wax loan figure animation of paintings and other materialization phenomena we are using the compound fluid condenser consisting of the following herb extracts archangelica fiscinalis salvia fissinalis lime tree flowers cucumber skin melon seeds acacia blossoms or leaves chamomile flowers lily flowers leaves or roots cinnamon flowers or cinnamon bark leaves of urtica dioica leaves of mentha piperita poplar leaves leaves or flowers of viola odorata ozia leaves or bark tobacco green or dry three kinds of preparation are important to be known the first and most simple is to put equal parts of the mentioned plant into a bigger pot pouring water over them and boiling them slowly for about half an hour afterwards cool off strain and boil all to the point that it turns out as thick as possible now add the same quantity of alcohol or spirit as you have got of the extract pour a few drops of gold tincture into it 10 drops to 100 grams eventually blood or sperm or both shake it well and strain the liquid through a fine sieve into a dark coloured bottle green or brown cork this bottle and keep it in a dark place the second kind of preparation is as follows put the herbs at equal parts into a glass bottle preserving glass or bottle pour pure alcohol over them until all the herbs are covered with it and allow it to extract for about 28 days in a warm spot now press it through linen or any other kind of a press filter it and corresponding to the volumetric measure add the gold tincture to it eventually your own mumi to blood and sperm then fill all into bottles and keep them for your personal use add no more alcohol to this extract because of its preservation one of the best methods of preparation is of course to treat each herb or plant separately whether in the described manner of the simple fluid condenser chamomile or else one makes herb extracts from spiritual extracts after the separate extracts have been well prepared mix them together add the gold tincture and guard it one operates in the same way with the other four special fluid condensers destined to influence by the elements the plants necessary to it are for the fire element onion garlic pepper mustard seed or grains of mustard comment this fluid condenser must not come in touch with the body first of all nor with the eyes because of their sensitivity for the air element hazelnuts leaves or bark will do as well juniper berries rose blossoms or leaves of it cherry leaves or bark for the water element oats finely chopped straw votes can be used too rapeseed of different kinds eventually turnip sugar beet etc peony blossoms or leaves of it cherry leaves or bark for the earth element parsley roots leaves or seed caraway seed plantago lanciolata broad or long leaves carnation flower or bar mint from the point of view of a layman the recipes quoted here will certainly appear as a dreadful pell mel and from the pharmacological standpoint one might describe them as pure nonsense but the matter in question here is not the pharmacologic but the magic effect the eyes of expert practicans who know the secret significance of plants which are so very mysterious will detect the correct connection by intensive meditation one could compose hundreds of recipes on the base of analogies but this outline ought to meet the requirements of the magician all the recipes given here do originate in practice and have produced fine results up to now before i am going to bring the problem of the fluid condensers to an end i will throw some light on another alchemistic theme which is linked to it i mean the life elixirs life elixirs the so-called genuine alchemistic life elixirs are nothing else but marvelously composed fluid condensers which have been produced in analogy to the elements and the three levels of human existence in accordance to them they have been magically loaded for the mental sphere there are used essences for the astral sphere tinctures and for the material sphere salts eventually extracts all of them loaded in the corresponding ways elixirs produced in conformity with them consequently influenced not only on the material body of man but on his astral and mental bodies as well such an elixir is therefore not only a good remedy but an excellent and dynamic regenerative too therefore the elixirs of sincere alchemists are nothing else but exquisite fluid condensers preparation of a solid fluid condenser since in the next step i am going to describe the genuine mirror magic that means the practical handling with the magic mirror i shall teach the magician how to construct a magic mirror by himself to manage this he needs a solid fluid condenser which consists of seven metals these are lead one part tin one part iron one part gold one part copper one part brass one part silver one part aloe resin one part animal charcoal three parts mineral coal seven parts the different parts are not to be understood here according to their weights but volumetrically supposing you take one cubic inch or one cubic centimeter of lead you have got to take of all the other metals one cubic inch or one cubic centimeter two the same applies to aloe and the two kinds of coal all ingredients must be pulverized softer metals like lead and tin can be pulverized with a crude file into the so-called filings and as for the harder metals take a finer file the resina aloe must be crushed to powder in a mortar if one can't get it pulverized you deal in the same manner with the two kinds of coal as soon as all the ingredients have been put together mix them well and the mixture which you are obtaining by this procedure is as a matter of fact the real solid fluid condenser the electromagicum of the old alchemists is not any different at all it is a superb fluid condenser composed from 30 grams of gold 30 grams of silver 15 grams of copper six grams of tin five grams of lead three grams of iron and 15 grams of quicksilver as one can see it contains all the planetary metals and from this metal alloy magic mirrors bells and similar objects have been made the solid fluid condensers i have recommended are very good reliable and have many times proved useful preparation of magic mirrors two kinds of magic mirrors exist the concave mirror and the flat mirror normal mirrors are suitable for both kinds which must be spread with silver amalgam or black lacquer or covered with a liquid or a solid fluid condenser for our magic purpose the ones mentioned before are of a special value and i will describe the production of these mirrors on the base of some examples one for the magic mirrors produced in the most simple way with the help of a condenser the surface of any mirror or of a bowl made of glass will be suitable it must only be spread with a liquid or a solid fluid condenser two cut a circular disk from a paste board eight to twenty inches twenty to 50 centimeters in diameter the size depending on how big you want the mirror to be made now cut the same disk from a blotting or a filter paper moisten or spread it several times evenly with a painting brush or a swab of cotton wool until it is saturated with the fluid condenser and let it dry glue the blotting paper onto the pasteboard disk wait until dry and the mirror is ready to use everybody will certainly be able to construct a mirror like this supposing somebody does not like the circular form he may choose an oval or angular shape you can put the mirror into a frame too if you like the fluid condenser which is required here can be the simple one but the compound condenser is more recommended three the procedure of the third method is exactly the same but here you have to cover the surface of the impregnated blotting or filter paper with a very thin layer of a colorless lacquer and screw the entire surface with the pulverized solid fluid condenser you can use a fine sieve a mirror which is ready for using immediately after drying is the best magic mirror you could think of because it contains both of the fluid condensers and is therefore especially useful for the practice for nor is the preparation of a parabolic or concave mirror complicated from a glass factory or from a watchmaker procure a curved glass such as is generally used for bigger clocks on the wall an evaporation bowl will serve the purpose too now spread the side vaulted outwards several times with black spirit or nitro lacquer of the kind which is used for motor cars and contains acetone it is drying very fast do you wish the mirror for optic clairvoyance it will be sufficient to put it in a black wooden frame and the mirror is ready but if you want to cover it with a fluid condenser you have got to paint the inner side with a good colorless lacquer in a thin layer screw the solid fluid condenser on top of it and let it dry five supposing you would like to produce a magic concave glass mirror and you cannot obtain the concave glass instead of the glass take excavated wood or a piece of paste board which is easy to work with after moistening it you can make a cheap concave mirror from loam plaster 2 etc the yellow loam or the plaster must be mixed with a liquid fluid condenser to render the mass needable now form the mirror with your hands allow it to dry slowly so that no cracks appear supposing here or there some cracks should show up do smear them over with loam and let the shape dry again polish the completed shape of the mirror with emery paper to avoid rough spots and spread the concave surface of the mirror with colorless lacquer strew the condenser through a sieve on top of the varnished surface and let it dry again provided you did make an edge you can lacquer it afterwards with a black nitro lacquer as well as the back side of the shape the mirror is now completed as a matter of fact such a homemade mirror happens to be more effective magically than the one made from glass because it does own two very efficacious fluid condensers the solid and the liquid one the liquid condenser is in the loam and the solid one on the surface of the mirror the only disadvantage is that such a mirror is much heavier and breaks easily if after the preparation of the mirror there is anything left over of the solid fluid condenser keep it well because it might come handy for other purposes for example for producing a magic rod which you make from an elder branch 12 to 20 inches 30 to 50 centimeters in length drill a thin hole in its entire length and fill it with the solid condenser now caulk the rod seal it up and load it magically for different operations such as active volition transference to living or other beings exorcising etc i will write about these problems in detail in my second volume the practice of magical evocation summary of all exercises of step eight one magic mental training one preparation to mental wandering two practice of mental wandering a in the room b short distances c visits to friends relatives etc two magic psychic training one the great now two no clinging to the past three concentration disturbances as a compass of the magic equilibrium four the astral body and the light five mastering of the electric and magnetic fluids three magic physical training one magic influence through the elements two fluid condensers a simple condensers b compound condensers c fluid condensers for magic mirrors d preparation of a magic mirror with the help of fluid condensers end of the eighth step step nine magic mental training nine in the chapter referring to the magic psychic training step seven i have already clearly dealt with the problem of clairvoyance in this step i want to examine it closely once more the various instructions which have been published up to now for the obtainment of this faculty did not bring about the desired success in anyone even people who are especially gifted in the media mystic line have only attained a partial success which is getting lost sooner or later but people like these are very often struck by different diseases such as weakness of the eyes nervous disturbances etc the main reason for such ailments can be found in the fact that the clairvoyance has not been produced as a result of the mental or astral development but has been conjured up by force and is therefore one-sided and morbid following any of these incompetent instructions leads without any exception to an unnatural morbid neutralization of an element which will result in an over sensitivity of one of the scent consequently it is not impossible that in this manner perceptions from the astral and mental worlds may take place but all these effects depend on the spiritual intelligence of the exercising person on the maturity and last on the karma too the neutralization of an element can be divided in four main groups which are group one neutralization of the fire principle to this group along all experiments of clairvoyant which have been performed by fixation such as crystal gazing staring at one point a shining surface black ink blade coffee mirrors etc group two neutralization of the air principle in this group i subsumed all those experiments of clairvoyant which are performed with the help of fumigation and by inhaling of narcotic vapours gases and so on group three neutralization of the water principle here the neutralization is brought about by experiments made on narcotics and alkaloids such as opium hashish soma peyote mezcal which in the course of the digestive process are introduced into the bloodstream group 4 neutralization of the earth principle answering the same purpose are all the practices which are causing any kind of dissociation or split off consciousness for example dancing swaying of the upper part of the body rotating of the head spelling in the feet and things like that to this group two belong all the unwanted and morbid visions of the insane and all the pathologic cases which occur as a result of shock fury and exhaustion a great deal could be said about the variety of such exercises and their dangers and disadvantages but this short description will be sufficient for the sincere magician it is quite obvious that the neutralization of any element principle results not alone in severe damages of the health but it delays the spiritual development two mainly in the cases where such and similar experiments have been practiced for a prolonged time and have become a habit based on these four principle groups the skeptic has the opportunity to convince himself of the existence of higher powers but if he can neither master himself nor the elements he will quite easily succumb to the temptations of lower forces and once giving into them one will find it very hard indeed to ascend again only a well-trained practican with a firm will who is mastering the elements and has developed the astral senses in the exercises at the various steps can afford himself a temporary neutralization or elimination of any element principle without jeopardizing his body spirit and soul the true magician will restore his elemental balance with the help of his exercises his results in the practice of clairvoyance are satisfying because he does not try out experiments but works deliberately with the faculties he has achieved which are the concomitances of his spiritual and psychical development practice of clairvoyant with the help of magic mirrors there are two kinds of magic mirrors namely one the optic mirrors made from flat glass or concave glass and covered on one side with silver amalgam or black lacquer as for the concave mirror the side which is outward vaulted is lacquered and the inside that is the concave part will be pure and shining the crystal balls also belong to the magic mirrors further the flat or concave metal mirrors the surface of which has been provided with a colored or a black liquid the surface of a pool can also serve as an optic mirror to the second kind of magic mirrors belong those mirrors which have been fitted out with the fluid condensers i have described previously first of all the magician has got to know that it is not the mere mirror granting the success but the astral and mental faculties developed by the preceding exercises consequently the magician will regard any magic mirror as an appliance an expedient or as a sort of tool this does not mean of course that he would not be able to work without a mirror but because of the manifold opportunities which a magic mirror may offer the magician likes to make use of this help however he who has worked through this practical course step by step will never just sit in front of a magic mirror and tire his visual nerves he will operate in quite a different way a way which is magically correct before i am going to describe some of these practices in detail i will quote some examples where a magic mirror may be a very useful help one when working with the imagination where optic exercises are required two when loading up with powers fluids of every kind three as a transit gate to all desired planes four as a help to induce a communication with living and deceased persons five as a help to get contact with powers beings etc six as an equipment for radiotherapy and room impregnations seven to influence the own or other people's personality eight as magic transmitter and receiver nine as a help to prevent dangerous and undesirable influences ten as an implement for the projection of all the desired powers pictures paintings etc eleven as television set twelve as a help to investigate present past and future times all the possibilities cannot be quoted considering that the magic mirror represents a sort of universal help based on these 12 examples the intuitive magician is now enabled himself to invent other new practices you are sitting in the asana before your magic mirror at a distance of one to two yards one to two meters the lighting does not play any important part at all now you start on imagination exercises by imagining objects on the surface of the mirror one after the other which you are supposed to see with your open eyes as distinctly as if they were really there considering the fact that you have become a master of imagination in the meantime this preliminary exercise will not be difficult for you hold on to the imagination of the object for some minutes and dissolve it afterwards with the help of the imagination supposing you still have difficulties with the imagination of objects do at first try imagination exercises with colors before proceeding with objects as i mentioned before the optic imagination faculty is analogous to the fire principle and magicians who master this element perfectly will have the best success with the mirror magic too after the imagination of objects you may turn to exercises with different animals hereafter with human beings first try to imagine features of friends later on of strange people and races now extend your imagination work over the whole body as soon as you are capable to imagine a human being whether known or unknown male or female on the surface of the mirror continue with the imagination of houses areas places etc until you have achieved a wonderful skill here too only now you are prepared magically to execute the correct mirror magic this preliminary exercise is very important because the mental astral and material eyes must get accustomed with the help of these imaginative exercises to perceive the size and the clearness of the impressions otherwise one will perceive distorted pictures only performing this preliminary exercise one must never tolerate any pictures to appear in the mirror spontaneously which could easily occur in the case of persons with spiritistic talents therefore one must firmly refuse all pictures which appear unwanted on the surface of the mirror however beautiful and fantastic they might be because anything unwanted one does see belongs to the realm of hallucinations reflections of the mind from the subconsciousness which like to appear to deceive the magician and to prevent him from his work performing this preliminary exercise one will notice that the imaginative work becomes much easier the bigger the mirror happens to be the loading of the magic mirror the next task of the magician will be to become familiar with the loading of mirrors he must be capable to bind the desired power to the surface of any mirror with the help of imagination drawing it whether out of himself or directly from the universe to accumulate this power and to dissolve it again by imagination into the primary source the following loadings are to be made one with all four elements one after the other two with okosha three with the light four with the electric fluid five with the magnetic fluid as soon as the magician has gained a certain skill in loading the mirror he is fit for further mirror experiments for which i will quote some examples concerning the various methods seeing through time and space the magic mirror representing a transit gate to all planes performing this experiment take care that you are not disturbed by your surroundings sit down comfortably in front of your mirror and load its surface with the akosho element which you are sucking into your body by breathing through lungs and pores the loading of the mirror with the personal okay can take place whether by your hands or directly via the solar plexus now forget all about your body and think of yourself as a spirit capable to adopt any shape and size now imagine your body becoming so small that it is able to go right through the mirror doing this with the help of the imagination then you will be on the astral plane stay there deliberately for some time have a good look around without losing your consciousness or falling asleep having done so return via the mirror and connect yourself again with your body in the beginning you will find yourself in complete darkness on the astral plane after frequent repetition you will perceive light a strange feeling of freedom timelessness and spacelessness will overcome you now you happen to be on the astral plane which is usually called the other world or the beyond after frequent exercises you will meet with deceased people and other beings and if you wish to see one of the departed you will be connected with this person instantly after a few visits on that astral level you will know all about the laws valid there and you will see the place which shall be yours once you have left your physical body the fear of death will be abolished here by once and for ever supposing you concentrate yourself from the astral plane onto a higher plane you will very soon perceive finer vibrations a sensation of extreme lightness sort of being authorized will overcome you and you will be able to go in touch with beings of these higher spheres you will partake of cognitions perceptions and experiences which none of the mortals could ever give you you will always return to your own body with spiritual vibrations of a higher kind which cannot be described in mere words which of the spiritual spheres you will be able to visit depends entirely on the mastering of the elements and on your spiritual and astral purity the enobling of your character there are no restrictions as far as the acquirement of higher knowledge is concerned having collected your experiences there you may come in touch with highlight entities too in exactly the same manner but in this case the mirror is not to be loaded with okocho but with concentrated light similar to a sun no doubt that with the aid of the mirror method you will also be able to visit lower spheres to for example that of the elements and the beings there in this case you have to load the mirror with the respective element of the plane you wish to visit passing through the mirror the form of the respective plane has to be adopted equally if you wish to visit the kingdom of the goblins not only the mirror must be loaded with the earth element but your own spirit has to be imaginatively transformed in the shape of a gnome and to be filled entirely with the earth element the same thing comes to pass with the spirits of the air the so-called fairies the spirits of the water or mermaids and the spirits of the fire the salamanders here as well the experiences you will accomplish are so abundant and marvelous that books could be written about these problems how the spirits of the different elements can be summoned to come down to our earth and the way they can be made useful to do various tasks i will describe in detail in a second volume entitled practice of magical evocation the magic mirror representing a link between living and deceased persons supposing you wish with the help of the mirror to communicate with a friend or somebody else or to give orders to a person to write to you or come to see you proceed as follows load the surface of the mirror with okoshan meditating on the fact that everywhere between yourself the mirror and your friend there is okoso that means neither space nor time does exist anymore hold on to this sensation in deep meditation and do wish at the same time to see your friend in the mirror a few moments later you will see the person you wish to see like in a panoramic picture and notice what the person is engaged with at the moment and the nearest surroundings too at the same time you will experience the feeling of standing next to the person if the surroundings are familiar to you you will be able to convince yourself of the truth of what you did see in the mirror with the help of the mental wandering provided the magician has been trained correctly his astral senses duly schooled his experiences with the magic mirror will correspond to the real facts as he may state with the help of the spirit wandering otherwise you have to repeat the experiment frequently until you are quite sure that the things you did see are in accordance with the real facts which can be corroborated without any doubt by other personal scrutiny if for instance you notice that the person you wish to see is asleep with the help of the imagination draw the spirit that is the mental body into your mirror and condense it through your will to such a degree that the person seems really to stand in front of you if you manage to accomplish this give the order you have been thinking about to the person doing this you have to observe the mood of present and command just as you did when performing the self-suggestion because it is possible that the subconsciousness of the person in question begins to oppose but not one truly wise magician will degrade himself to give any orders for the sake of an evil purpose the okasha principle would take severe revenge on him furthermore it is possible to make an astral contact with another magician of the same degree of development with the help of the mirror magic and everything the practicant is talking about in the mirror will be perceived by his colleague even at the remotest distance sometimes so loudly as to be heard by a sensitive person who happens to be in the neighborhood quite distinctly although all is spoken from the distance deceased persons can be called up in the same manner to appear in the mirror in this case one has to concentrate on the okosha and to imagine the person or one has to think intensively that he or she may appear if one wants to call a person one did not know one has to concentrate on a certain clue dating from the time when the person was alive one calls the name into the okosha and one waits in deep meditation for the appearance of the deceased being in a very short time the being will show up in the mirror and the magician can express his desires at the beginning the communication with the deceased person will take place in a sort of thinking aloud but later on one can really make conversation if one wishes to one has the opportunity as well to make the deceased person step out of the mirror and condense the appearance with the help of the earth element so that the person becomes visible even to the eye of any person who is absolutely untrained it is entirely up to every individual how much he wishes to specialize in this work various other beings can be called up and condensed too but the details about this problem will be found in my work the practice of magical evocation because certain rules of conduct have to be considered here the magic mirror representing a help to make contact with powers entities and so on i will describe this method to in my second work the practice of magical evocation at this point let me remark only for the sake of curiosity as follows supposing the magician does load his mirror with okocho drawing his sign with the element analogous to the entity his character and his symbol imaginatively on the surface he is capable to come in close contact with this respective being if he pronounces the name of the entity according to the universal laws the contact will enable the magician to achieve anything according to the original proprieties of the being the same thing can be said about all the other beings and powers the magic mirror representing a help to self-influence auto influencing other people any magic mirror can serve as an excellent help for self-influence but the best result will be obtained with a mirror equipped with a fluid condenser there are so many different opportunities of employing it that it is quite impossible to register all of them here i can quote a few practical examples only draw such an amount of light from the universal ocean of light into your body with the help of the imagination or by breathing through lungs and pores that you can feel yourself red hot like a sun do impregnate this light with the concentration on a desire wishing for instance the light and its radiation rest might bestow intuition inspiration or any other desirable faculty on you or make you recognize a certain truth now let the light flow through your hands with the help of the imagination onto the surface of the mirror and accumulate there until the tiniest spark of light has passed from your body into the mirror form the light accumulated there into a brilliant white ball or sun emitting extremely intensive rays repeat this loading several times at short intervals until you are quite sure that the mirror has been loaded so intensely that the rays are penetrating right through your body spirit and soul releasing the influence you have been wishing for now with the help of your willpower and imagination combined with a firm conviction bind this light to the surface of the mirror for so long a time as you need it and then dissolve it again you have got to be convinced so firmly of the effect and the influence of the light that not the shade of a doubt will arise in you it is just this unshakable and firm conviction which gives this enormous dynamic power to the radiance of the light coming very near to a physical effect i myself did some years ago load a magic hollow glass mirror in this manner so strongly that it burst into hundreds of chips and i had to procure a mirror made from oakwood for my task sit down in front of the mirror and meditate about the truth you wish to recognize or about the problems which you want to solve after finishing the meditation interpose the akosha principle or induce a trance in yourself and you will soon accomplish your task in any case you will get a pleasant surprise by working in this manner and later on you can hardly do without this practice when performing your meditations supposing you keep the mirror loaded you have to protect it from other people looking at it the best thing to do is to wrap it in silk because silk is well known to be a splendid insulator you can also direct the rays from your mirror onto your bed allowing them to work all night long influencing your subconsciousness while you are asleep to achieve the desired purpose your self-suggestion will reinforce the effect and produce a quicker success it is quite obvious that you will not only arouse cognitions and faculties in this manner bringing them to a higher level of development but your soul and your spirit will likewise be influenced in the desired respect if you do not need the influence of the mirror any longer or a different task requires a different loading such as the irradiation of okocho or of one of the elements or magnetic and electric fluids may be wanted then you have to suppress the first loading in the reversed order with the help of imagination that is to dissolve the light sending it back into the universe you can by raise exert an influence on other people too but in this case the desired loading has not to be directed to the surface of the mirror via the own body but it has to be led to the mirror directly out of the universe with the help of imagination so it is possible to accomplish all kinds of experiments such as hypnosis magnetic sleep media mystic conditions a fact which the intuitive magician will find quite natural he will therefore arrange his practice accordingly the magic mirror representing a ray emitter in cases of room impregnation and treatment of sick people a similar procedure is followed in the impregnation of rooms with the help of the magic mirror you are loading your mirror with the fluid corresponding to your wish such as light biomagnetism okay feeding its accumulation directly from the universe with the help of the imagination so strongly that the radiance is spreading over the entire room which you wish to impregnate fix the duration of the effect already while performing this accumulation in this manner you can if necessary irradiate the room in which you are living for days even for months in order to obtain success health inspiration peace you will also be capable to reinforce the loading if necessary by condensing the dynamites by means of frequent repetition it is a matter of course that all kinds of diseases and ailments can be healed two in this manner provided the mirror has been loaded in the correct way you can also seat a sick person in front of the mirror and he or she will feel well again after a few minutes according to the power accumulated in the mirror the magic mirror representing a transmitter and receiver the mirror can be used fabulously for this purpose as well i mean to say you can perform experiments of animating pictures and transferring sounds similarly to the transmitter and the receiver of a radio our mirror also can be used in this line i am going to quote two practices briefly which the magician can execute without any effort at all provided he did follow me to this point step by step the first practice refers to the reciprocal animation of thoughts or pictures between two equally skilled magicians the distance does not play any part at all ten or one thousand miles kilometer do not matter the possibility of communication varies that means it can take place whether by means of thoughts pictures letters words or sentences the practice always remains the same and all work is performed with the aid of the same principle that is the akasha principle below follows the description of the mirror acting as transmitter without the person who is to be influenced knowing anything about transmitting at the beginning it will be advantageous if the magician gets accustomed to a certain routine with his partner who is supposed to be on the same level of development or at least does manage to work with the akosha principle fix the exact transmitting and receiving times in accordance with your partner both can take place at the same time first of all the practice of transmitting the sending person has to load the mirror with okosho and to induce a state of trance with the help of the akosha principle then he will eliminate the concept of space and time between himself and the receiver with the help of imagination and thus he will have the feeling of standing next to his partner this sensation will occur later on quite automatically which we know already from experience and from previous experiments try at first to transmit simple shapes and patterns such as a triangle or a circle together with the desire that the partner on the other end might be able to see them in his mirror the receiver has nothing else to do but to load his mirror two with okocha before the transmission to trance himself with the help of the okosha principal and to concentrate on the fact that he will distinctly see everything in the mirror his partner is transmitting provided both partners are on the same level of training the picture projected to the mirror by the transmitting partner will turn out visible to the receiving partner as soon as the time for transmission and reception has run out change over to become the receiver yourself and repeat the experiment of telepathy in a reversed order it is always a good point if the magician is versed with the transmitting as well as with the receiving practice nobody ought to be discouraged by failures at the beginning but he should continue to exercise with tenacity success will certainly show up after several attempts as soon as one is capable to receive simple pictures one may reinforce the exercise by selecting more complicated pictures later on pictures of living persons of places and landscapes similarly to the manner in which you were handling the preliminary exercises concerning the mirror imagination providing you are quite familiar with this experiment you may pass to transfer ideas without imagination that is ideas which have been registered with the intellect only supposing one has gained sufficient experiences as a transmitter and a receiver one may try to write short words into the mirror with the help of the imagination to be read in the receiver's mirror words may be followed by sentences and finally one will be able to transfer written messages from one mirror to the other having attained the faculty of optical transference you may proceed to the acoustic transference speak one or two words into the mirror with the desire that the receiver might hear these words here likewise the receiver remains in a trance state waiting for the message to arrive at first he will feel it very similar to a sort of thinking allowed but from one exercise to the next he will hear it more distinctly and finally as clearly as having a conversation over the telephone later again it will be as if the words were spoken directly into the receiver's ears as soon as one has become familiar with the transmitting and receiving practices short sentences can be transmitted and received until one has become capable to transmit and receive full messages and use by constant training many adepts in the orient are using this method to send messages to each other this faculty is called in the orient messages through the air this is to be understood in a symbolic way since all that is in fact done with the help of the akosha principle consequently it is quite obvious that also various feelings can be mediated between the transmitter and the receiver this problem needs no further description if the magician masters the faculty to transmit to and receive from an equally trained partner he will be also capable to intercept dialogues or pictures transferred between other practicans in the same way as it happens in the case of broadcasting a fact which is called radio piracy in the magic terminology 2. now i am going to describe the magic mirror as a transmitter destined to transfer ideas words and pictures to people who are not trained magically at all who have not the faintest notion that such a transmission takes place or that in this manner they might be influenced eventually in such a case the magician only has to blow his intention into the yokosu loaded mirror including the command this all that might be transmitted to these or those persons if the magician interposes the akosha principle between the unprepared person the latter will perceive the message according to his intellect should anyone not be sufficiently experienced in this practice the message will at first have the effect that the influenced person becomes restless at the given minute and feels the urge to think very intensively of the sender in our case the magician later on the receiving person will feel the message as a thought of his own being unable to differentiate whether it was transmitted or originated in the own mind but if the magician is interested in specializing in this kind of transmitting he can suggest to the person in question that the messages or thoughts are coming directly from him this practice will exert its influence on the receiving person whether instantly or in the course of the transmission the magician can also bring about a transmission through the mirror the effect of which is to be delayed or to be perceived by the receiver only when he has become fit for it this moment usually comes if the respective person is not disturbed restrained or diverted by external influences and receives the message shortly before falling asleep or in the morning before awakening in such cases the magician concentrates the idea the desire or the message into the mirror together with the command that anything he is transmitting should be perceived by the individual only if the necessary preparedness is happening as long as the message has not been received it will remain effective and adhere to the surface of the mirror as soon however as the message has been sent out which means the mirror has served its purpose and the thought or the message has been correctly received by the person to be influenced the surface of the mirror becomes perfectly pure once more the magician can attend to his various duties without taking any notice of his wireless work and the mirror will produce its effect automatically for so long until the thought or the message has really been perceived the magic mirror representing a ray emitter for the impregnation of rooms treatment of sick people etc the magic mirror may be employed within this scope likewise and in the hands of a skilled magician it will represent an excellent help for his development the practice of room impregnation is as follows when you are working in a room which you want to be influenced by the magic mirror for your own purposes only you have to perform the loading via your own body as far as loadings of the mirror for the benefit of other people are concerned you have to draw the power directly from the universe without allowing it to pass through your body therefore you are drawing an enormous quantity of light out of the universe whether directly or through your own self concentrating it with the help of the imagination in an accumulated form to the surface of the magic mirror this accumulation of light must be repeated several times until the stored up light is adopting the shape of a ball or a disc which is spreading a brilliant white shine over the entire room similar to the shine of a strong lamp frequently repeating this exercise you ought not only to see the radiant light imaginatively but feel it directly streaming like x-rays through your whole body transfer your imagination of the desire into the light with the help of your conviction and your faith and at the same time think that the light is increasing automatically from one hour to the other from day to day and that the effect of its emissive power is growing more pervasive and more dynamic fix the duration of the effect in the same way as you did in the case of biomagnetism whether by limiting the emissive power to a certain time or fixing it as a permanent effect now transfer the task or the desire to be fulfilled by the emissive power into the confined light namely into your imaginary sun for example success inspiration furthering of the intuition peace health or whatever you are mostly in need of this done arrange the mirror in your room similar to a reflector so that you are constantly exposed to this irradiation take no further notice of the mirror afterwards because it will work on automatically influencing you or other persons in the desired way therefore you will find yourself continually subject to the influence of the irradiation you will hardly be able to manage your work your exercises your research and your meditations without this method in case the mirror has not only been loaded magically for yourself but for other people as well say in order to treat sick persons for the sake of a complete recovery you will find out that you can accomplish a great deal more being under the emissive influence of the mirror you won't feel tired or worn out and any sick person entering your room or coming directly in touch with the emissive mirror will feel an instant relief from the complaint the efficiency depends on the loading of the mirror not only a single person can be irradiated but as many people as there is space for in the room professional magnetizers or those who are engaged in treatment of the sick or in influencing people will find a marvelous fear of action in this method the emissive power is not only available for the impregnation of a room and for its irradiation but it can be transferred with the help of imagination to one or several persons at the greatest distance the imagination must naturally be accordingly changed in such cases it is not necessary to underline how valuable the magic mirror is in the hands of a magician and how many possibilities it offers a wise magician will certainly never misuse his magic mirror and dishonor it by trying to exert bad influences with the help of it the magic mirror representing a protective implement against dangerous and undesirable influences a magic mirror can also be used as a defensive or a protective tool but then of course the impregnation of the emissive power in the mirror is to be modified in a corresponding way and the room impregnation or the spot to be protected have to be loaded with the emissive force of the light in such a manner that the rays of the light will detain the undesirable and unfavorable influences or throw them back to the starting point having to do with bad influences or working with the impregnation of light wanting a room to be insulated against good as well as evil influences in all these cases you have to load the impregnation of the mirror or of the room with akosho transferring the quality of intangibility and impenetrability into it imaginatively any accumulation of the akosha principle while working with it is impossible as mentioned before but the wish impregnation for the sake of a dynamic effect can be repeated frequently with the help of the imagination it is left to the magician to manufacture several mirrors for different purposes but if he works with long distance transference or long distance reception naturally he must not insulate his work room with okocho because this would prevent him from each long distance operation how to screen from any adverse influences and how to insulate certain spots with the help of a magic mirror in order to accomplish different magic tasks will be the argument of my second work the practice of magical evocation apart from the possibility of using the magic mirror as a protective implement other more advantages are offered to the magician with the help of the mirror magic he can put in operation all the known fluids the magnetic the electric or the electromagnetic fluids and work with them in his practice which of the powers will come into question for the various cases depends on the activity and the effect of his wish the magic mirror representing a projector of all powers beings impressions and such like the magic mirror can also be used to condense all the forces of the mental and astral planes to such a degree that they can be perceived even by persons who are not trained at all this is not a matter of mere imagination or suggestion because the thoughts elementaries elementals beings of all levels entities of the elements and so on condensed with the aid of the practices described here can be condensed in the mirror in such a manner that it is quite possible to take a picture of them here follow the instructions for the practice the surface loading of the mirror takes place with the help of the condensed earth element which is not projected first via the body and then to the mirror which would cause paralysis but directly from the universe with the help of imagination the stronger the accumulation of the earth element happens to be all the more condensed and visible will be the appearance of anything we wish to project consequently it will be opportune to repeat this accumulation of the earth element several times if you now wish an impression a picture or an elemental to be made visible to any other probably not trained person proceed as follows introduce the akosha principle whether to the head of the person only or if you like to the whole body with the help of the imagination and at the same time order the akosha principle to remain effective only for the duration of the experiment if it comes to making visible any impression do by your own imagination transfer the picture or the impression to the surface of the mirror with such a clearness and distinctness as if it were reality hold on to this conception now when the person being influenced with the akusho principle observes the mirror he will see your conception reproduce similar to a film you can produce the same effect in the same manner with any self-created elemental elementary or phantom but if you decide to call a being out of the astral or any other plane you have to fill at least the space around your mirror in which the being is supposed to appear with the akosha principle it is more profitable to fill the entire room with okosho this preparation would not be necessary if you had a second mirror destined to the impregnation with the akosha principle of the room in question all the preparations being completed develop a trance by introducing the akosha principle to yourself and in this condition of trance call the being you wish to see no matter whether it is an inhabitant of the astral or any other planet as long as one is not absolutely familiar with the practices of the conjuration magic which i shall describe in the practical part of my next work the practice of magical evocation one has to be satisfied with calling deceased people from the astral plane a performance which is brought about with the help of the imagination by means of the accumulation of the earth element on the mirror surface pictures or beings will be materialized so that they can not only be perceived with the physical eyes of an untrained person but also be heard too everything that has been seen is therefore not a hallucination for the magician is able as mentioned before to take a photograph of the picture condensed by the earth element but mind pictures condensed in such a manner have a much higher vibration than the normal light which we know it is therefore quite obvious that such higher vibrations cannot be taken in the ordinary photographic way because they do not correspond to our light vibrations photographs like these must be taken in the shortest time ever possible first class cameras will enable you to select a one over one thousand second and there are special cameras which even make possible a one over two thousand second exposure for one photograph special cameras like these are the best of course because they produce concrete pictures and it is much easier to work with them taking pictures in the manner described here it does not matter at all whether it is daytime or night whether the mirror is lit up or dark but if you like to take a picture of the mirror and its background as well a lighting will certainly be necessary otherwise there will only be visible the materialized picture in the mirror experience has proved that in these cases photographic plates should be preferred to films considering the fact that the vibration number of the picture in question is by far higher than that of the light of the physical world a special kind of colored filter has to be used when taking photographs of the mental plane with all its elementaries elementals phantoms and other entities of this sphere you always need blue filters for all the other beings deceased people and so forth violet filters have to be used and other beings consisting of one element only such as the essences of the elements will require ruby red filters photos of phenomena occurring in nature mainly concerning the magic of nature are taken with yellow filters only as far as the colors are concerned the filters are therefore analogous to the respective planes moreover the magician has got the possibility not only to show pictures and beings to any untrained person but he can also display this person's or someone else's past present and future in the mirror distant effect through magic mirrors the magic mirror representing a television set in our magic mirror we are capable to observe occurrences or events which are happening to persons known or unknown even at the greatest distance load the mirror as usual with the okosha principle now remain calm and comfortable in your posture induce a trance with the help of okocho and in this condition concentrate on the person whose deeds and actions you want to observe think of the magic mirror as being a big telescope through which you can see everything at the remotest distance the magician will immediately see the person and the surroundings like in a motion picture at the outset the pictures will perhaps be a little muddy but after frequent repetition they will become very distinct and there will happen a feeling of immediacy and nearness to the desired person which will become so convincing that one is almost quite sure to stand next to the person one wanted to see even a distance of thousands of miles kilometers is of no importance at all in order to verify and to be absolutely sure that everything one wishes to see is corresponding to real facts one can imagine any different action of the same person if one can manage this in full clearness with our astral senses the things we have been seeing are a deception and the exercise must be repeated until one has obtained the faculty of distinguishing real facts from hallucinations and deceptions under a skilled magician's guidance even an untrained person can take part in such a kind of television magicians especially trained and experienced in this field will even manage to take photographs of the pictures and events seen at the greatest distance using a red filter and considering the practices described here when you are not so much interested in the material occurrences which you are observing at a distance but only in the psychic life the character and the feelings of a human being then do not think of the material body of the person you want to see but imagine the astral body only after a little while you will see the aura and the characteristics of this person in the various shades of color from which you will be able to come to logical conclusions concerning his character and his faculties according to the rules of analogy if you are neither interested in the ways and doings of a person nor in his psychic qualities and his characterization and if you wish to see the spirit only in the mirror imagine the material body together with the person's astral body as not being there here to the images corresponding to the spirit will appear and you can in this manner pursue the train of thoughts of a person even at the greatest distance as one can see from the example quoted here the faculty are reading the thoughts of a person at the greatest distance can be managed without any difficulties and it depends entirely on your own will how far you wish to extend this mastery different tasks of projection through the magic mirror the magic mirror representing an aid for the investigation of the past the present and the future working with the mirror one of the most difficult tasks is the exact investigation of the past the present and the future of other people it is comprehensible that the magician can perceive his own past and present in the mirror similar to a motion picture but he will most certainly avoid to do so should he be as keen as to satisfy his curiosity to learn all about his future it would not be difficult for him to concentrate on this problem and to inquire into every detail but there is the rub in the same moment when seeing his future in the mirror he is depriving himself of his own free will one could compare him to a pattern which has to be filled in without the possibility that anything could be done for or against it quite a different matter of course it would be if the akosha principle in its highest form let us call it the divine providence gave a warning to the magician in one way or the other perhaps against dangers without him having any intention at all to see or to learn something it is quite obvious that the strictest attention has to be paid to warnings of this kind without any exception because ignoring them would cause severe damages to the magician having arrived at this point the magician will be capable to distinguish whether the warning comes from one of the beings irrespective of which plane or directly from the okosha principle the magic mirror is an excellent aid in instances concerning untrained people or such ones of whom the magician takes a great interest to investigate the past present and future all thoughts perceptions feelings and physical actions are leaving behind them exact records in the okosha or the primary source a fact which enables the magician to read like in an open book in the okosha with the help of his magic mirror or directly while being in a trance all he needs to do is to concentrate on it by imagination in the beginning when the magician is not yet mastering this problem wholly the images will probably appear incoherent or sporadical by frequent repetition of this exercise one picture after the other will appear on the surface of the mirror in the correct connection with the past as clearly and distinctly as if the magician himself were actually realizing the events the magician can unroll one occurrence after the other beginning from the present back to the childhood and the day of birth it is advisable to follow the past back to the moment of birth only although without any doubt it is possible to investigate the life of the person in question in the previous embodiments as well but the magician may be warned against doing so because any investigation of the future as well as of the former life in his own case or the one of other people would mean a sort of meddling in the affairs of the divine providence and such a curiosity would cause dangerous consequences to begin with he would instantly become as old as he was in all the former lives he did live a fact which certainly would cause a very unpleasant feeling in him and an uninterestedness in any further life secondly the magician is entirely responsible for all the blunders committed in his former lives the only advantage would be that he would become conscious of the experiences in his former life a fact which would never compensate for the disadvantages supposing the magician would like to know something about the future of another person for some really important reason all he needs to do is to induce a trance provided he is quite familiar with this practice there is nothing at all that will remain hidden this kind of clairvoyance where the magician is capable to perceive his own and other people's mental astral and material planes in the correct connection is the highest point which may be attained through working with the magic mirror as soon as the magician has arrived there i have nothing more to tell him with reference to the magic mirror and he will himself find out new practices based on the examples which i have quoted here magic psychic training nine conscious separation of the astral body from the physical one in this chapter the magician will learn how to separate his astral body from his physical body by means of conscious training and how to get not only with his spirit but also with his soul to places he wants for some reason to visit in the shape of his astral body the emission of the astral body is as you shall see different from mental wandering or the state of trance caused by akosha the state during which the mental and astral bodies are separated from the physical body is in the terminology of the occultists called ecstasy the perfect magician is able to go anywhere he likes in his astral shape though in most cases he will content himself with mental wandering or the state of trance as a rule the astral body when united with a mental one but separated from the physical body will only carry out jobs that need be done by physical magic action when omitting the astral body certain precautions have to be taken since in this case in opposition to mental wandering both links between the mental and the astral body and the physical body that is the so-called mental and astral matrix are loosened from the body the mental and astral bodies being connected to the physical body only by a very subtle elastic ribbon that shines like silver if during the period in which the mental and the astral bodies are loosened from the physical body the latter were touched by another person no matter whether skilled or unskilled in magic practice the said ribbon being extremely subtle would break in two at once the connection with the physical body being thus interrupted physical death would be the consequence therefore utmost care has to be taken right from the beginning of these exercises that nobody should be able to touch the body of the magician when he puts himself in the described state the thin ribbon would be torn to pieces the electromagnetic fluid in man being much stronger even the tender life ribbon of an advanced magician would not be able to resist that fluid a medical expert examining the body of a person killed in such a manner would come to the conclusion that death was caused by heart failure embolism or paralysis of the heart in its state of ecstasy the physical body is as in the case of apparent death without life and feeling its breath has stopped its heart has come to a standstill the following lines are intended to give you a clear picture of the practical side of the procedure apparent death too is a state of ecstasy though caused by pathological conditions in the person concerned which can be easily explained by any magician however it should be added that the mental matrix that is the binding agent between the mental and the astral body is kept working by normal breathing which supplies the blood vessels with the four elements including okocho via the lungs we all know from experience that there can be no life without breathing the astral matrix the connecting link between the astral and the physical body is kept alive if supplied with enough food the magician will now become aware of the connection between food supply and breath and will have found its true cause in the preceding chapters dealing with conscious breathing and well-balanced nutrition if one point or the other is neglected during this stage of development disharmonies diseases and other inconveniences will be the result many mental and psychic disturbances are caused by irregularities in or neglect of these two factors therefore it has been pointed out right from the beginning that body soul and spirit must be equally developed and kept in order if the physical body is not well balanced not strong and tough enough and if it does not have a sufficient reserve of electromagnetic fluid stopped by substantial food rich in vitamins thereby procuring itself an adequate elasticity ecstasy training could have an ill effect on it therefore any magician will agree in that ascetical training necessitating diet reduction must be considered extreme and therefore unhealthy many oriental methods demanding asceticism and ascetical training are one-sided and no doubt dangerous to people that are not natives of india and whose physical structure is not accustomed to the local climate however if the magician has been able to equally develop the three steps of existence that is body soul and spirit he need not fear that there could happen any disorders in his mental astral or physical bodies but the person not going through this course step by step but neglecting here and there the necessary precautions must account for possible disharmonies the magician will therefore not start practicing the emission of his astral body unless he is quite certain to have a thorough command over all the steps recommended up to this point in the case of mental wandering the most subtle part the astral matrix connecting body and soul remains in the body but when the astral body is being separated from the physical body everything is pulled out of the latter which makes double precautions necessary when one proceeds to ecstasy training the procedure to be followed when omitting the astral body is actually quite simple especially for magicians that have a good command over mental wandering the separation of the astral from the physical body is carried out as follows sit down in your asana posture though these exercises can also be done when lying down and let your mental body escape from your physical body your consciousness now being transferred into your mental body watch your physical body you will have the sensation of your body being asleep by the means of imagination you must now think that your astral body much the same as your mental body before is being drawn out of your physical body by your willpower the shape of the astral body must be equal to the shape of your mental and your physical body then unite yourself with your astral body by entering the astral shape when doing so you will have a queer sensation as though the astral body were not quite yours and therefore you must at once consciously connect your mental to your astral matrix otherwise you would not succeed in keeping your astral body in your imagination the same being constantly pulled towards your body as though an invisible magnet were working on it if you watch your physical body during this exercise you will realize that there are irregularities in your body's breathing but the moment you concentrate your thoughts on uniting yourself with your astral body and on breathing regularly you will find yourself actually united with your astral body right from the moment you are thus uniting yourself with your astral body like a spirit beside your physical body do not watch anything else but the breathing this exercise has to be repeated until you have become accustomed to breathing in your astral body which you have drawn out of your physical body with which you have united yourself spiritually as you see it is only conscious breathing in the astral body that brings about this separation of the astral matrix if by repeated practice breathing in the mental as well as the astral body has become quite familiar to you you may do another step forward if you begin breathing in your astral body your physical body will stop breathing because of the separation of the physical body from the astral shape the former will lapse into a state of lethargy a sort of morbid drowsiness the limbs are stiffening the face turns pale just like a dead body but as soon as you will stop breathing outside your physical body wanting to put an end to your experiment you will instantly notice your astral body being at once as if possessed by a magnet pulled into your physical body which now begins to breathe again quite normally but not before you spiritually re-transfer your mental body that is your consciousness to the physical body so that the astral body and the mental body reassume their physical shape will you recover your senses and gradually come round again what we usually call dying is the same process with the only difference that the matrix between the physical and the astral body is destroyed in the case of normal death the astral matrix between the physical and the astral body has been broken in two by a lethal disease or for some other reason and therefore the astral body together with the mental body having lost its footing in the physical body has to emanate automatically from the latter whether willingly or unwillingly during this process breathing is transferred into the astral body without the astral body becoming conscious of it that's why at first deceased beings do not feel any different between the physical and the astral body they will come to realize it gradually as soon as they notice that the material or physical body is no longer of any use to them and that the astral body is subject to very different rules the laws of the akosha principle i have written about this already in the previous chapters concerning the astral plane consequently the practice of sending out the astral body deliberately is an imitation of the process of dying this evidently proves how many you will come to the border between the actual life and what we call death when you are practicing such exercises therefore proceed with caution provided that the magician has got a perfect control of sending out his astral body one the fear of death has become absolutely superfluous two the magician does exactly know the process of his dying as well as the place where he is going after stripping off the mortal frame after frequently practicing the deliberate separation of the astral body from the physical one breathing in your astral shape will become a matter of routine so that you will not notice it anymore and you will experience the same sensations in the astral body as if you were still in your physical body if you wish to return into your material body you have to hold the breath deliberately back in the astral body so that the astral body is able to disentangle from the mental body and to reassume the shape of the physical body in this moment when the astral body reassumes the physical shape the body will automatically begin to breathe again which makes the return into the physical body possible this should always be considered first the mental body being subject to very different laws does not breathe in the same rhythm as the material body does in connection with the astral body only if you have become accustomed to the astral and the mental body going out from and returning to the physical body so that you can do so as often as you please considering the precaution measures with respect to your breathing only then you are truly capable to withdraw successively from the physical body in the beginning of this preliminary exercise do not stray far from the side of your own body thus you have the opportunity whether to stand beside your own physical body or to take up its actual posture namely the asana an entirely different exercise is to observe not merely the body but similarly as in the sending out of the mental body to take notice also of the immediate surroundings after all it is the same process as the mental wandering you should feel hear and perceive every single object with the difference however that the mind is in a way taking a robe with it in our case the astral body which allows sort of a more physical effect supposing you will pay a visit somewhere in your mental shape only in order to observe an event which might cause either a good or a bad psychical sensation you can neither perceive nor feel it in your mental body nor can you be influenced anyway on the other hand if you make the same experiment with your astral body you will perceive it as intensively as if you assisted at it with your physical body in the next exercise you will learn how to withdraw gradually from your body step by step at first you will feel as it were pulled back to your physical body by an invisible attractive power similar to the one which a magnet exerts on the iron this is to be interpreted by the fact that the bond between the astral and the physical body is fed preserved and kept in balance by the most subtle fluid by performing the exercises of sending out the astral body you are committing a deliberate act against the lawfulness of the natural element in your body which must be overcome consequently the movement of your astral body requires a greater effort than if you would move away with your mental body alone this is the reason why you should draw away from your body a few steps only at first and return to it instantly because the magnetic attractive power is constantly pulling and influencing you it will provoke various feelings in your astral body such as the fear of death and the like these feelings must be overcome at all events having advanced to this point you should master all these occurrences extend the distance from your physical body with every new exercise as time goes on you will be able to cover greater and greater distances and the farther you can remove your astral body from your physical body all the weaker will its attractive power become later on when traveling very far you will find it really difficult to return to your body this will become a tricky problem for the magician mainly if he is wandering about in planes or regions which allure him so much that he is beginning to feel a little sad at the very idea of having to return to his own body here you see that the magician must be absolutely master of his feelings because as soon as he gets accustomed to the idea of feeling quite at home in his astral body not only on the physical level but also on the astral plane he becomes usually weary of life feeling inclined nevermore to return to his physical frame a longing will overcome him for destroying by sheer force the bond of life which still ties him to his physical body doing so would mean to commit a suicide in the same way as on the physical body besides it would be an offence against the divine providence and would naturally have karmic consequences it is quite understandable that the temptation to commit such a suicide is very strong especially if the magician is nearly pining away for grief in the physical world after all the blissfulness he experienced on the other planes having made good progress in these exercises concerning the sending out of the astral body so that he can cover any distance the magician now has the opportunity to use this ability for manifold tasks he can transfer himself anywhere with his astral body wherever he likes to be he can treat sick people by accumulating and condensing the magnetic or electric fluids in the astral body conveying them to the respective patients the treatment with the astral body is by far more pervasive and effective than by the mere thought transference or the mental wandering because the fluids the magician is working with will become effective on the sick person's corresponding plane only the magician can exert a lot of other influences too he can materialize himself with the help of the earth element which he is condensing in his astral body on the astral plane under the very nose of an experienced adept as well as of a layman to such a degree that he can be seen heard and perceived with the physical eyes the issue in this respect depends on the duration of the training and on the capacity of accumulation of the earth element in the astral body it is obvious that the magician can perform physical acts too with the help of his astral body producing phenomena as adept see them such as knocking sounds and influence on terrestrial affairs etc find a satisfactory explanation here really and truly no limits at all exist for a magician and it is entirely up to himself in which line he wishes to specialize in any case he knows exactly how to manage all these things as much as how to condense one part of the body only say one hand whereas the other hand remains astral if with the help of his imagination he is capable to accelerate the electronic vibrations of an object he will also manage to spirit away any objects corresponding to the measure of his forces and his development before the eyes of other people and to transfer them to the astral plane in these instances the material objects are no longer subject to the material laws but will become astral therefore it is a mere trifle for the magician to transfer such objects to the farthest distance with the aid of his astral body and to bring them back again to their original form from a layman's point of view such phenomena seem to be chimera but any experienced magician will easily be able to produce such an even more astonishing phenomena which otherwise might be spoken of as sheer miracles but as you have gathered from what i have explained up to now these phenomena are no miracles four miracles in the true sense of the word do not exist at all the magician recognizes the higher powers and their laws and he knows how to utilize them for the benefit of mankind an amount of examples could be quoted here but some hints may suffice to him who seeks illumination impregnation of the astral body with the four divine fundamental qualities when the magician has arrived at this stage of development he will begin to express his concept of god in concrete ideas the mystic being trained one-sidedly only or a yogi etc sees in his deity nothing else but at mere aspect to which he renders worship and adoration the truly wise adept who always considers the four elements in his development will represent the concept of god in four aspects according to the laws of the universe namely the omnipotence corresponding to the fire principle the omniscience and wisdom belonging to the air principle the immortality with the water principle and the omnipresent with the earth principle on this level it will be the magician's task to meditate about these four divine ideas aspects in turns deep meditations in a way enable the magician to exercise directly with one of these divine virtues fusing with it in such a manner that he feels himself to be the virtue in question he has to experience the same with all the four virtues of his god the arrangement of the exercise is his own business that means he is allowed to meditate on one of the virtues for so long until he becomes quite certain that the respective virtue has become personified in him he may perform the meditations according to his spare time in the manner that through meditation he recalls all the virtues in turns in one exercise the meditation has to be so profound so pervasive and so convincing that the astral body becomes as it were identical with the virtue the magician's concept of god is universal including all the four divine virtues according to the universal laws the magician should therefore give his keenest attention to these meditations because they are absolutely necessary to realize this union with his god as soon as after long and deep meditation he is capable to form an exact idea of these four divine virtues he has ripened so far as to establish the connection the practice of which will be described in the last step of this lecture these meditations are producing a kind of deification of the magician's spirit and soul and finally they will influence his body in an analogous way enabling him to establish the union with his god which is the sum and substance of this training course magic physical training 9. by continued practice in this course the scholar has been led a great distance on the way to a state in which there is no more need of a special training of the body from now he will have to intensify the powers he did develop so far and to use them in various ways below i will give a number of instructions which the scholar can follow without any effort according to the measure of his development treatment of sick people with the help of the electromagnetic fluid it is a beautiful and sacred work to help the suffering mankind the magician is capable to do miracles as far as the treatment of the sick is concerned just as so many saints did in the past and are still doing in the present time not one of the late practitioners magnetizers or healing mediums will ever understand to release the dynamic powers corresponding to the primary principles in the same marvelous way as the magician does the presupposition here is of course that the magician does know the occult anatomy of the body with respect to the elements and their positive and negative effects otherwise any influence on the seat of the disease would be quite impossible with the help of the akosha principle and his clairvoyant eyes the magician will immediately recognize the cause of the illness and be able to influence the roots of the illness when the origin of the sickness happens to be in the mental sphere the magician first of all has to influence the mind of the patient to restore the harmony as i did mention before the astral sphere can only influence the astral plane exactly as the material sphere influences the material plane only this fact must always be kept in mind any transmutation from one plane to the other can only be accomplished with the help of the corresponding matrix or the connecting link of a more subtle power a thought can never produce any physical power nor cure any physical ailment but a thought which has been concentrated on faith and conviction can cause strong vibrations in the mental sphere of the patient which are conveyed to the astral body via the mental matrix an influence like this does not reach farther than to the soul of the patient this induces the patient to set his mind on the healing process thus producing the vibrations which are necessary for recovery but nothing else evidently a sort of mental astral palliation can be accomplished the patient himself will mentally cause the acceleration of the healing process but this influence on the material ailment is not sufficient especially if the patient is already lacking such an amount of internal strength that the fluids necessary for the healing cannot be renewed therefore the success would only be a very trifling one and the recovery subjective to this category of healing methods belong suggestion hypnosis self-suggestion faith healing and so on the magician will not exactly underrate these methods but on the other hand he will not rely on them using them merely by way of a makeshift by no means will these methods represent to him so higher value as it is described in numerous books more spectacular will be the work of a true magician who has got a great surplus of vital magnetism by occult training and a corresponding line of life he does neither need the patient's faith nor any kind of suggestions hypnosis nor an oreo a magnetizer like this loads his vital power with the help of his own surplus into the astral body if necessary even against the patient's will and this way does accomplish a faster recovery because his magnetism has a stronger stimulus thus strengthening the astral matrix of the patient therefore a magnetopathist can treat very successfully a child too who neither through his imagination nor with his subconsciousness can contribute in any way to further the healing process it has turned out quite differently if a magician specialized in the healing line treats hundreds of patients daily without his vital force diminishing in the least a magician makes use of the universal laws and touches the sick physical organ directly with his influence without passing first through the astral body together with the matrix this is the reason why a magician has a much stronger influence on the sick organ than all the healers known up to date the healing process can in certain circumstances happen so fast that it can be regarded as a miracle from the standpoint of the medical science i do not intend to prescribe any general rules to the true magician for the treatment of the sick because i am sure that he already has his personal method of working based on the laws he did learn it will be sufficient to give a few useful hints to him the magician works with the willpower and the imagination when the patient suffers from a mental weakness or disturbance and the harmony has to be restored here the magician has to be fully aware of the activity of his spirit so that not his astral or physical body but his spirit alone does activate the influence therefore the keenest attention is to be paid to the spirit body and soul must be completely neglected in order to intensify the effect from spirit to spirit for example if the patient happens to be in agony or in a state of deep unconsciousness the magician will be able to bring the patient round again if the cause of the disease is to be found in the astral body the magician will work with the accumulation of the vital power which he impregnates with the desire of a quick recovery he will convey the accumulated power from the universe into the astral body of the patient without allowing the vital power to go first through his own body by doing so the magician avoids any weakening of the own vitality and at the same time a mingling of the patient's morbid odd with his own one if the causes of the illness are a physical nature and if any organ in the body has been affected the magician resorts to the elements and to the electric and magnetic fluids if the patient happens to be of a strong constitution the magician will work with elements only which have a favorable influence on the sickness thus he will fight a high fever with the element of the water the element concerned will produce the necessary fluids electrical or magnetical by itself and a line of conduct a regime kind of breathing herbs baths corresponding to the elements will be prescribed for the patient but if the body of the patient has already become so weak that it is unable to accept the necessary element and consequently to produce the corresponding fluid there is no other way out for the magician but to load the sick organ directly with the fluid here the occult anatomy according to the polarization has to be observed carefully any organ performing the function of the magnetic fluid must never be loaded with the electric fluid in order not to harm the patient in organs where both fluids are at work the magician will do well to introduce the fluid successively supposing he wants to exert an influence on the head by fluids he will load the front part the forehead the left side and the inside big brain with the electrical fluid the right side however of the head and the back of the head small brain with the magnetic fluid if the magician works by passing his hands on the patient's bodies which is quite a good expedient but not at all necessary he will perform this act in accordance with the fluid with reference to our example head he will influence the forehead and the left side with his electric that is his right hand the back of the head and the right side with his left magnetic hand a magician who is extraordinarily well trained in the healing practice will neither have to resort to any kind of strokes nor to passing his hands on the patient he can accomplish everything by means of his well-developed imagination he must understand how to lead the magnetic or the electric fluid with the help of the imagination into the smallest organs as well that means he must be able to direct the magnetic fluid say into the inner part of the eyes or the electric fluid into the edge of the eyeballs in this manner he will not only successfully treat many eye complaints strengthen the visual power but he will also be capable to make the blind see again provided that the blindness has not been caused by a structural defect the neutral parts of the body are therefore to be loaded whether with the element belonging to the respective region of the body or with the accumulated vital power it would not be too serious a drawback neglecting the neutral parts at all because the irradiation of the fluids will influence the neutral points of the organs indirectly too on the chance that not only one single organ is concerned but that the whole body has been affected as in nervous diseases or diseases of the blood the electric fluid has to be led to the entire right side of the patient's body and the magnetic fluid to the left side if after the successive conveyance of both the fluids to the patient's body the latter is no more receptive enough the elements can be accordingly led to the regions of the body any extreme dynamic accumulation of elements inside a sick body is to avoid because the patient will not agree with such a stimulus the most efficient magic healing process consists in successively influencing the patient's spirit soul and body accordingly based on the mentioned examples and the analogous universal laws the magician ought to know how to proceed without a particular hint answering the question whether an expert and duly trained magician would be capable to completely heal every kind of diseases even the most incurable ones it may be said that the magician has in fact the possibility to cure even the most malignant illness providing that none of the organs in the body is missing but the magician will read in the book of fate okosha how far he is allowed to intervene because certain ailments depend on karmic conditions that means the patient has to atone for this or that omission in his present or his former life by suffering the illness if however the magician feels a call to act as a means to an end healing or alleviating the sickness or to cure it completely which the truly wise magician can read in okosha two he will work astounding miracles based on these instructions and considering the universal rules the highest adepts who ever walked on our globe and brought about the most fabulous healings resuscitations of the dead etc could do so only by considering the universal laws their powers and fluids and here it did not matter at all whether the realizability of their faith did play any part consciously or unconsciously or if the living word kobola has been the important factor it does indeed depend on the magician's degree of development how far the miraculous healings can reach magic loading of talismans amulets and gems the belief in talismans amulets and jewels goes back to times immemorial and has its origin in fetishism which is still widespread amongst primitive races the belief in a talisman and similar things has survived from these earlier stages to the present day but modified its character according to the modern style of life what else but talismans are all the mascots pendants rings and brooches which are supposed to bring good luck it is the birthstones that are held in particularly high esteem today so if there were not something true or perhaps even magic in the nature of talismans the thought of and the belief in them would be bound to have disappeared long ago let us then sort out the cha from the wheat and lift the veil a bit a talisman an amulet or any birthstone is meant to strengthen the trustworthiness and the credit extended to the person who bears it by paying closer attention to his talisman the bearer's subconsciousness is by way of auto-suggestion influenced in the desired direction and according to his aptitudes various effects may be carried out no wonder if a materially inclined man an uninterested scientist condemns such a belief expresses criticism and pokes funds marking it with the brand of superstition the wise magician is aware of the true nature of such things and he will not be content of bearing a talisman for the mere purpose of raising the faith and the confidence but he will endeavor to investigate the laws underlying the secrets of the talismans he knows that talismans based on the belief of their bearers become inefficient as soon as they pass into the hand of an unbeliever or a skeptic with his knowledge of the causal nexus the magician goes deeper and deeper into the matter relating to it before dealing with this synthesis let us treat the various differences a talisman in the hands of a magician is nothing else but an implement a clue something material into which he is binding or enclosing his power his ultimate cause is fluid its shape whether being a ring a pendant or a brooch and its material value are of no importance to him at all he neither considers beauty nor fashion or prestige it represents to him an object with the help of which by binding his powers to it he produces certain causes destined to liberate the desired effect irrespective of the bearer believing it or not a pentacle on the other hand is a specific object a talisman being in accordance with the laws of analogy concerning the desired effect strength faculty and cause the magician has to consider these rules of analogy when he is producing and loading such a pentacle which he will always prefer to the talisman especially if he wants to communicate with beings of other higher worlds no matter whether good or evil entities are concerned genie or demons an amulet again is a divine name or a holy verse from the bible a mantra that is a sentence expressing the worship of a deity written on parchment or on ordinary parchment paper carrying around various magic herbs such as mandragora and the like which are believed to possess a kind of protective power belongs to this category of amulets too furthermore this category includes fluid condensers in solid or liquid form or blotting papers moistened with them load stones and natural magnets as well as tiny artificial horseshoe magnets last of all let me mention the precious and semi-pressure stones which are particularly suitable fluid condensers and have been used at all times for protection luck success and healings astrologers have ascribed a special effect to each stone on the base of the colour and hardness theory and advised people born under a certain sign or planet to bear the respective stone as a lucky stone but the true magician knows of course that these astrologically selected stones have a very insignificant effect and that such a stone is absolutely worthless for anyone that does not believe in such things whereas stones which are in accordance with an astrological effect are suitable to and susceptible of the corresponding magic loading as far as hardness chemical composition and color are concerned the magician can as far as possible consider these astrological arguments but he is by no means dependent on them he can if he wishes to load any stone even the one which seems to be most unfavorable from the astrological point of view magically to such a degree that certain results can be accomplished no matter whether the person does or not believe in the result there will always be the outcome the magician orders and nothing else having interpreted the different kinds and variants of talismans amulets pentacles and precious stones let me talk about several loadings of which i am going to quote ten kinds one loading with the mere willpower in connection with imagination two loading with the help of timed accumulation of the vital power and the wish impregnation three loading by binding elemental elementaries beings due to accomplish the desired result four loading with the help of individual or traditional rituals five loading with the help of magic formulas mantrams tantras and such like six loadings by accumulation of elements seven loading by electric and magnetic fluids eight loading with the help of accumulation of the power of the light 9. loading by electromagnetic balls vaults 10 loadings by megosexual operation each of the loading possibilities quoted here has numerous variants again but it would take me too long to describe all of them the advanced magician will find his own loadings with the help of his intuition the 10 ones mentioned here are supposed to serve as a rule of conduct only and therefore a brief description appears indicated to one loading with a mere will in connection with the imagination this is the simplest and easiest method the effect of which depends on the willpower and the imaginative faculty of the magician every talisman every amulet every pentacle with the exception of paper and parchment amulets has to be cleared from the fluid clinging to it before the magic loading can be performed the best way to do so is with the help of the magic of water take a glass of fresh cold water and dip the talisman into it while doing so concentrate on the water taking away all evil influences hold on to this concentration for quite a while after some minutes of deep concentration you ought to be perfectly sure that all evil influences have been sucked up by the water and that your talisman is absolutely free from them dry the talisman and now be quite sure that it is receptive of your own influence you have to perform this clearage on every non-liquid talisman irrespective of the method you are about to use in order to load it hold the talisman in your hand and by imagination fix your desire on it with all your willpower with faith and confidence time the efficiency of your desire whether it is to last for a certain period only or forever furthermore if the effect is meant for a certain person only or for anybody that is supposed to carry the talisman use the form of the present tense that means imagine that the desired result is working already you can intensify the virtue of the concentrated desire by frequent repetition of the loading which will make the emissive power of the talisman more pervasive transfer the feeling while concentrating on the wish that the effectiveness of the talisman should remain and become stronger if you do not think about it and that in case it is meant for somebody else it should do the same effect provided you did load the talisman to the best of your knowledge and with the greatest possible force it is ready for use to two loading with timed accumulation of vital power and wish impregnation the talisman is to be freed from the fluid in the same manner as described in one if the point in question is a talisman which you want to use yourself you will have to perform the accumulation of the vital power in your own body see the instruction of step three if you loaded your body expansively with vital power lead it via your right hand into your talisman and compress the accumulated vital power to such a degree that it does fill the entire shape of the talisman the amulet or the stone while doing so you have to imagine that the talisman is sucking in the vital power keeping it inside for so long as you want it to you must work with the firm conviction that during the time you are carrying or using the talisman its effectiveness will not decrease but become stronger instead the vital power taken over by the talisman and pressed together there to a snow white brilliancy seems to be very much like a shining sun you see how far your imagination must reach transfer the desire concerning the effectiveness of the talisman to your body right away while accumulating the vital power the duration of the effect can be fixed imaginatively afterwards too choose the present tense to express your inner conviction that the talisman has got its full effectiveness immediately after the loading do not command several wishes to one talisman and least of all contrary ones the most effective loading is restricted to one single desire only furthermore always express wishes within the reach of possibility and avoid fancy loadings which cannot be fulfilled this command goes for every kind of talismans and loadings expansive the force of such a loading is can best be checked up with the help of a sidereal pendulum if you load a talisman for someone else the accumulated vital force is to be led not through the own body but has to be taken from the universe directly being imaginatively condensed and conveyed to the talisman all the rest of the instructions remains the same to three loading by binding elementals elementaries and being supposed to release the desired effect i have already described the creation of elementals and elementaries in the previous steps naturally any being like these can be bound to a talisman a pentacle an amulet or a stone the spell has to be performed with a self-selected word a short specially composed ritual or a gesture with the help of imagination it will suffice then to execute the gesture or the ritual or to pronounce the word or the formula and the spellbound elemental will release the respective effect the magician will certainly know the times when he will be able to bind a being to a talisman it is obvious that he will use elementals to influence the mental sphere but for the achievement of astral or material results he will resort to elementaries equally entities or beings can be bound to a talisman in this manner two in order to obtain certain effects and there is no magician who duly trained could not perform such acts he is able to establish the contact by the practice of the passive communication with the help of the magic mirror or by inducing a trance in the okosha no further directions are necessary here and the magician ought to know himself what he has got to do to four loading by individual or traditional rituals this practice is preferred mainly by oriental magicians who are endowed with a stupendous amount of patience which is indispensable as far as this kind of loading is concerned the oriental magician makes a certain self-selected sign above the talisman or he makes this sign with it directly in the air with his hand his fingers or even with one finger quite individually while doing so he concentrates on the effect which the talisman is desired to have he will repeat this experiment several times every day thus producing so strong a battery the volt in the orchestra by these constant repetitions that the desired effect is as good as granted if by frequent repetition of the experiment the magic vault in the okosha has grown strong enough it suffices to perform the ritual or the sign with or above the talisman which may even be done without imagination or without any mental effort in order to produce the desired effect a magician familiar with the quabbler will naturally know that he did load his own battery in the oco shot ritually 462 times corresponding to the quad ballistic number of 462 on 462 days for the purpose that his ritual should produce an automatic effect this loading is practicable without great effort but it is very wearisome and lengthy and a european magician will hardly display this surplus of patience in order to achieve a result which he can sooner obtain with the help of one of the methods described here the loading by a traditional ritual is easier and requires a few repetitions only to bring about the contact the effect being so amazing as to verge on a miracle the snag here is that such traditional loading rituals happen to be the secrets of lodges societies sects and monasteries which i myself cannot give away it is quite obvious that a magician well trained in clairvoyant could easily get hold of these secrets but there is always the danger of being found out and the oriental magicians who guard their rituals under the oath of death would proceed ruthlessly against anyone that should dare to grab them without permission therefore i warn every magician not to do such pilferings it is usually by gestures that the secret signs of various deities ishta devatas are performed upon the talisman in a similar way as i detailed it in the description of the individual rights no doubt that a loading like this has an extraordinarily strong effect because this particular ritual is celebrated by hundreds of magicians thus being handed down traditionally from one generation to the other a member who has been declared to be mature is usually offered such a ritual as a sort of distinction the grant of such a ritual which at the same time establishes the contact with the corresponding battery is called in the orient anchor or abhisheka to 5 loading by magic formulas mantrams tantras etc this kind represents one of the greatest and most powerful loadings but it requires high knowledge and a lot of preparations which i will describe in my following two works concerning the magic evocation and the practical quabbler therefore here i shall restrict myself to a short remark only the first kind of loading is realized by repeating a magic formula and the desired effect is accomplished with the help of an entity selected for this purpose the loading by mantrams is done by imagining or speaking a sacred sentence in sign of worship of a deity many times into a suitable talisman japan yoga the quality of the deity in question becomes materialized in this manner it is absolutely certain that fabulous results can be compassed on all planes in this manner a loading by tantras is nothing else but the correct use of word magic where certain cosmic powers are employed with the help of suitable letters words etc regarding the cosmic rhythm sound color quality to six loading by accumulation of elements this possibility of loading is offered to every magician who went through his practical training up to now supposing the magician wants a certain result to be achieved through an element principle he will load the talisman or the pentacle he chose with the corresponding element the loading itself happens in the same way as described in point two by accumulation of the vital power only accepting that the desired element is used instead of the vital power for a personal use the accumulation of elements takes place in the own body but for other persons it is done directly from the universe if for example one element happens to be difficult to be mastered the opposite one is to be used for screening with the help of a loaded talisman many other results can be accomplished through the element and a magician who is absolutely perfect in mastering the element will intuitively compose the desired variant himself to seven loading with the help of the electric or the magnetic fluid one of the most powerful loadings consists in using the electric or the magnetic fluid when the talisman is supposed to protect something to screen it to irradiate or to develop any kind of activity one will mainly use the electric fluid but if it is to produce an attractive power to bring about sympathy luck or success the magnetic fluid will be employed the manner of loading is exactly the same as previously described but if the point is a talisman for personal purposes the accumulation is performed in the corresponding half of the body only that means not in the whole body the magnetic fluid is accumulated dynamically in the left half of the body and projected through the left hand into the talisman in the matter of the electric fluid it will be the right side and the projection to the talisman takes place via the right hand to eight loading through accumulation of light power to achieve subtler spiritual effects such as the enhancement of different occult powers intuition inspiration etc a talisman is loaded with condensed light power the loading is executed in the same way as the accumulation of vital force with concomitant desire impregnation timing and so forth the light pressed together in the talisman is like a sun which shines brighter than the ordinary sunlight a talisman destined for personal use is accumulated with light power through the own body whereas the power is to be drawn from the universe when intended for other persons otherwise the usual rules and instructions as given before have to be observed to nine loading with an electromagnetic ball a vault to mitigate karmic influences to be protected against influences of other spheres and to turn fate according to one's desire a talisman is loaded for one's own or for other people's purposes with a magic vault this kind of loading is called vaulting and represents the strictest imitation of the akosha principle and only a magician aiming at the highest target the union with god should use this kind of loading not to burden himself with an interference in the occur as i did repeatedly mention already everything existing has been created by the two fluids by means of the four elements according to the universal law the electric fluid will always be in the center on the periphery of the electric fluid where expansion ceases the magnetic fluid begins to work and this is where it is most powerless the distance from the focus or center to the periphery of the electric fluid is exactly the same as the one from the beginning of the magnetic fluid to the end of the periphery where the magnetic attractive power is strongest this law is valid in small things as well as in the big ones consequently in the microcosm as well as in the macrocosm when loading with a vault that is when vaulting attention has to be paid to this law if you wish to load a talisman a pentacle or a stone for your own purposes with a vault you have to proceed as follows in the right half of your body accumulate the electric fluid dynamically with all your strength via the hand and finally through the forefinger project the accumulated electric fluid to a powerful electric spark and encase it with your imagination exactly in the center of your talisman you have got to see this electric spark as if it were absolutely red hot now do the same with the magnetic fluid directing it through your forefinger of the left hand and from there in front of you so that you wrap the ball shaped electric spark with the magnetic fluid to such a degree that it becomes invisible in your imagination imagine the compressed magnetic fluid as being of a blue color did you manage this only a small blue ball ought to be left comprising the entire shape of the talisman here with the volt has been produced and as soon as the electric fluid is irradiating inside of this vault and the magnetic one outside of it impregnate the ball that means the ready vault with your desire and fix the duration of the effect supposing you wish to increase the loading later which probably will not be necessary all you have to do is to condense the magnetic fluid the electric fluid which happens to be inside of it being increased automatically a vault like this has such a powerful magic effect that it could and will even change the karma a magician who can accomplish this is no longer subject to the customary karma but only to the divine providence loading a talisman for another person with a vault it has to be done in the same manner but the electric and magnetic fluids are not drawn from the own body but directly from the universe vaulting for other people should be practiced only at the worst in positive case of necessity because the magician has to be absolutely sure that the person in question is really inspired with high ideals longing for ideals only but being haunted by karma or to express it in a popular way being an ill-starred fellow whose run of bad luck continues the magician's clairvoyant eyes will realize these facts and his intuition will always teach him what to do and what to avoid at this point the magician himself will be responsible for all and everything the most skeptic thomas however would be greatly amazed at the enormous effect of such a magical vault bound to a small horseshoe magnet so that the ball is wrapping in the whole magnet to 10 loading by a mega sexual operation there is still another kind of loading a subject i shall only deal briefly with here for ethic and moral reasons i desist from describing the practice in detail the meditating magician will find out all about this practice but he too will desist from working with it since in the meantime he got to know so many different possibilities of loading only a magician on a very high ethical level could dare to make use of this practice because lastly all things are pure to the pure ones in the hands of an immoral man these practices would do more harm than good at least a lot of mischief would be done with them and powers as high as those of love must not be misused therefore i am restricted to comment briefly on the principle on which this loading possibility is based first of all certain preparations are essential without which the operation could not successfully be accomplished any megasexual operation whatever purpose it may serve is a sacred act a prayer by which the generative act of love is imitated everything created in the universe has been produced by the act of love this universal law is the fundament of sexual magic obviously one ought to work with a like-minded congenial partner who has gone through the same magical training the male that is the magician represents the active the begetting principle whereas the female magician is the passive the parturian principle the female partner familiar with the mastery of the electric and magnetic fluids has got to change her polarity so that her head becomes magnetic and her genitals electric with respect to the male partner the conditions are reversed the polarity of his head must be magnetic and that of the genitals electric the intercourse between the two partners produces an exceedingly strong bipolar effort which gives rise to an enormous effect performing this act of love its outcome does not mean new life but the desired cause together with its effect has been begotten here the lower as well as the upper double pole are coming into operation the four pole magnet the yotival he is working the highest mystery of love here the creation how easy it would be to degrade this creative act the highest thing existent on this earth to mere carnal appetite which would lead to damnation the expulsion of adam and eve from the paradise finds its highest symbolism here the magician who dares to approach the highest of all practices has to master the upper as well as the lower streams in order to transfer the loading eventually into his talisman to dishonor this sacred act by carnal desires would mean to repeat the fate of adam and eve who were no longer allowed to enjoy the fruits of the paradise the intuitive magician will understand without difficulties how great this symbolism is and will agree with me if i stick to my duty of secrecy about the greatest of all mysteries realization of a desire with the help of electromagnetic balls in the okosha the so-called vaulting i have described the production of a vault by means of the electromagnetic fluid in the chapter referring to loading a talisman the process is the same here accepting that the electromagnetic ball has to be bigger for a volt in the okosha the practice is as follows accumulate the electric fluid in your right half of the body with all the strength you can afford and project it through the palm of the right hand to the outside forming the electric fluid at the same time with your imagination into a ball suspended in the air this projection is therefore not going through the finger but directly through the inner part of the right hand the fiery ball which has to be turned out red-hot by the compressed electric fluid is becoming increased dynamically by frequent accumulation of the electric fluid in itself and by a reiterated projection and enlarged by the repeated loading this kind of accumulation and dynamical loading has to be performed until the ball has reached a diameter of one yard one meter perform the same process with the magnetic fluid beginning to project the accumulated magnetic fluid through the palm of the left hand to the outside by wrapping the electric ball in your magnetic fluid one layer after the other by frequent repetition of this accumulation of the magnetic fluid and its projection the wrapping is growing until the diameter of the whole ball has reached 2 yards 2 meters the electromagnetic volt is now completed when doing such a vault destined for another person the magician has to take the electric as well as the magnetic fluid directly from the universe if such an electromagnetic vault has been prepared with a firm faith and conviction the magician will impregnate this vault the strongest magic accumulator existing with the respective concentration of the desire by means of his imagination he will create the desired cause which his vault is to produce at last having determined the duration of his magic vault the magician will as it were ecstatically fling it into the macrocosm the causal world consequently into the orchestra by the way of his imagination imaginatively he interrupts the connection with his vault stopping thinking of it the very moment he flings it forgetting it purposely and paying his attention to other different things the vaulting quoted here is one of the most powerful operations which the magician is capable to accomplish in his present stage of development for now he has succeeded in mastering himself as well as other people the cause he did transfer with his vault into the okasho will do its effect and it is of no importance at all whether it concerns the mental the astral or the material plane the magician will certainly appreciate this great and responsible opportunity and accomplish noble deeds only for his own benefit and that of his fellow creatures for whom he did dare to undertake this operation the magician who walked on the path of hardships up to this very point has balanced his karma with his troublesome exercises which were more than asceticism so far that it will do him no more harm the magician is no longer subject to the ordinary influences of destiny he became master of his fate and nothing but divine providence in its highest aspect can influence his will summary of all exercises of step nine one magic mental training practice of clairvoyant with the help of magic mirrors a seeing through time and space b distant effect through the magic mirror see different tasks of projection through the magic mirror two magic psychic training one deliberate separation of the astral body from the material body two impregnation of the astral body with the four divine fundamental qualities three magic physical training one treatment of the sick with the electromagnetic fluid two magical loading of talismans amulets and gems three wish realization through electromagnetic balls in the okosha the so-called vaulting end of the ninth step step ten mental training 10 elevation of the spirit to higher levels before the magician begins to follow the practice of the 10th that is the last step of this course he may look back attentively and make sure if he achieved the positive realization of all he has been taught up to now if that is not the case he must try to make up for all he is still lacking and must go to any length for developing every faculty completely any kind of haste or hurry with respect to his development is useless and will work out awkwardly later in his magic task to avoid disappointments the magician is advised to take a sufficient amount of time and to work steadily but systematically he must realize that this last step really represents the end of his magical development with respect to the first tarot card and that he ought to be prepared for the higher magical tasks which i am going to describe in the following two works practice of magical evocation and key to the true cobbler if there were gaps in his schooling he would never be capable to control the higher powers it is certainly not important whether he will finish his course a few months sooner or later the main point will always be to keep his aim in mind and to advance steadily to the goal the lofty heights of the god cognition looking back to his actual development the magician will realize that he has already covered a good distance on the path of his perfection even more than he had supposed to do but he has to know that all this is only the thin end of a wedge meditating on the fact how much knowledge and experience he has still to store he will bow in a spirit of great reverence in front of the divine fountain of wisdom there will be no more pride or ambition nor superciliousness to say nothing of bad qualities in his heart for the deeper he penetrates into god's workshop all the more humble and receptive will he become the first task which the magician is facing in the tenth step is to win his way to the knowledge of the sphere of the elements with his mental body he will visit the different spheres of the elements transfer himself to the kingdom of the gnomes or earth's brights afterwards to the realm of the waternymphs he gets to know the kingdom of the fairies and finally that of the salamanders the so-called kingdom of the fire to a non-magician all this will be rubbish and he will regard it as a utopian idea but for the true adept neither fairer tales nor sagas do exist because they are to be understood as a sort of symbolism concealing many a deep truth it is the same thing with all the gnomes water nymphs fairies and salamanders based on his own observations the magician can convince himself that beings like these do really exist on the other hand a magically absolutely untrained person whose senses are mentally thoroughly undeveloped is of course subject to the vibrations of the material world only and will never be able to form a mental picture of the existence of any other kind of beings to say nothing of becoming convinced of this fact most people are preoccupied by the material mode of life to such a degree that they will not understand anything higher and subtler outside our physical world and least of all they will perceive it it is quite otherwise with a magician who is developing his senses purposely and therefore will see and perceive far more convincing himself very soon of the existence of higher powers planes and beings properly speaking it is the goal of our training to qualify the learner to perceive and to master not only the physical world but the highest fears equally but let us not advance matters but let us stick to the practice and consider what they can be done to reach the world of the elements in the previous chapters we learned that there is a kingdom of elements populated not only by the element itself but by the corresponding beings too then which is the difference between a human being and an elemental being the human being consists of four and five elements respectively and is ruled by them whereas an elemental being is composed of the purest element to which it does belong according to our estimation of time the duration of life of such a being is probably longer but in return it has no immortal spirit as a rule such a being is resolved into its element again let us disregard the description of details for a while because the magician will learn everything by practical experiences he will be able to do so by transference of his spirit the magician is bound to understand how to transfer himself to the kingdom of the elements to contact the beings there later he will even manage to rule over these beings in my next work entitled practice of magical evocation i shall in a particular chapter treat the problem of summoning such beings to come to our material world first of all the magician has to realize that the kingdom of the elements has nothing to do with our material world and that consequently he cannot transfer himself there without being previously qualified to do so on the other hand an elemental being can come to an understanding only with a kanjina a fact which ought to be considered most carefully a bird is well matched only with another bird in the same way an elemental being will have an understanding only with a car generic being that is a being of the same element provided it should like to come in contact with a human being it would be bound to adopt a human shape and human qualities to approach man in form of man at this point the magician will realize why he did have to perform transmutation exercises in the previous steps a gnome will never understand a human being and so it will be the other way round when operating this way either the magician has to become a gnome or else the gnome has to be transmuted in a human being consequently wishing to enter the kingdom of the earth's brights the magician will have to take the shape of a gnome if he can't imagine what a gnome does look like he must use his faculty of clairvoyant whether in a trance or try to see the shape of a gnome with the help of the magic mirror he will notice that gnomes are very tiny sprites similar to the brownies described in the fairy tales generally they are portrayed as dwarfs with long beards and caps with long hair bright eyes and garbed in little cowls such or similar will be the appearance of the gnome the magician will see in his magic mirror he will also notice that every sprite is carrying a little lamp of different luminous force in order to find his way in the subterranean kingdom if by means of his magic mirror the clairvoyant magician has convinced himself of the gnome shape he only has to mentally take the shape of a gnome moreover he must identify himself with the earth element i.e load his whole shape with the earth element without any accumulation now the magician has to imagine nothing else but to sink down into the subterranean realm that is to say the earth suddenly he will feel deep darkness surrounding him everywhere his imagination forms a lamp illuminating the darkness with its bright light at first he will not discern very much but repeating this experiment several times his eyes will become accustomed to this dimner so that he will discriminate beings in his own shape wishing to contact him and after a lot of attempts he will see the sprite folk more distinctly he will even have the opportunity of seeing them diligent in their business but be on your guard against speaking to them do not ask a question before any of the sprites has addressed you it may happen that in the course of the mutual work the magician has watched something he might be tempted to criticize he may be cautioned against doing so for the earth sprites would overpower him instead of his bringing them under his control which ought to be the purpose of this experiment in such an occurrence it might happen that by their various magical tricks the gnomes could captivate him by means of the element so that he would become a gnome himself unable to return into his own body then after a certain time the mental bond between the astral and the physical body would break asunder which would mean the physical death a medical expert would in such a case find out death from heart attack nothing more but the magician who in the course of his magical training has obtained the necessary self-control and considers this law has nothing to fear on the contrary as soon as the gnomes begin to talk themselves they see in him are being higher in rank and superior to them and will try to make friends with him this law forbidding to address gnomes first is only meant for the first visits later on if the sprites are convinced of the magician's superiority in willpower and intelligence they will enjoy it and become his most obedient servants the earth's brights are nearest to man and like to serve him especially if they recognize his superiority visits to the kingdom of the gnome should be repeated as often as there is to be seen something new he can learn a great deal from the gnomes and not one book in the whole wide world can reveal so many secrets about the subterranean kingdom to him as he can hear in the world of the gnomes for example the magician can get a great deal of knowledge about the power and the effect of different herbs he can learn how to achieve a magical spell on certain stones he can be informed about hidden treasures and other strange things he will be witness of everything that happens and exists below the surface of the earth such as springs coal minerals etc besides from the gnomes the magician may learn several magic tricks which can be exploited through the earth element in course of time the magician will notice that there are different groups of intelligences among the earth sprites in the world of the gnomes he will meet gnomes who are able to give him a lecture on alchemy when at last the magician feels quite at home in the kingdom of gnomes and when he made all the experiments which these beings were able to teach him then he is allowed to visit the kingdom next to it namely that of the water sprite or water nymphs in the very same way he may look for a water sprite in his magical mirror and he will find that there exists a significant likeness to a human being there is hardly any difference to be noticed neither in shape nor in size usually the water sprites called generally nixies mermaids or water nymphs are very attractive females although there are male water sprites mermen too as for visits to the kingdom of water it is not absolutely necessary to adopt the shape of a woman it is entirely up to the magician to transmute himself imaginatively into a mermaid there is an advantage here he will not be molested so much by the mermaids because they are not only fascinating and dashingly beautiful but also very obtrusive and sexy providing the magician is mentally prepared so that he has impregnated his spirit with water he may transfer himself to a big lake or to the ocean wherever he likes to and submerged down to the bottom of the water here as well he will not at once meet the water sprites but repeating the experiment many times and according to his vivid desire for communicating with these beings he will finally attract them at first he will only see female beings moving about in the same free attitude as human beings do he will hardly meet an unpleasant mermaid in spite of the fact that all mermaids are very beautiful he might indeed happen to meet the more intelligent ones the so-called royal leaders since here likewise a very peculiar class consciousness does exist the magician will notice that they do not dance all the time as they are generally supposed to do but that they do a certain amount of work too it's no use to write more about this theme the magician will convince himself of here as well goes the rule that nobody must ever address one of the mermaids first but he has to wait until the being starts talking or asking him questions about something from the intelligent leaders the magician can learn such a lot about the water element that he could write books himself he gets information about the life of fish about the different water plants the stones below the water and about other magic tricks related with the water elements but beware of the beauty of these beings the magician be seriously warned not to fall madly in love with a mermaid and not to lose his balance a love like this could become fateful for him that does not exactly mean that he is not allowed to have fun with the mermaids but he must certainly keep the motto in mind love being the law but love under a strong will a mermaid is quite capable to fascinate the magician with her incredible beauty charm and intoxicating heritaism so much that he is in serious danger of becoming one of the kind a fact which would cause his physical death undoubtedly how many magicians have been wrecked by an unhappy love therefore the magician should remain firm commanding his own passions because it's this kingdom in the sphere of elements that is the most attractive one and if the magician gave way to his passions he would fall into the hands of the mermaids for good and all as soon as the magician can manage to visit the kingdom of the water sprites as often as he likes to and if he has learned whatever concerns the knowledge of magic he can pay his attention to the kingdom next to it the one of the aerial spirits in contrast to the water kingdom whose inhabitants the mermaids or the nixies like very much to communicate with human beings the airsprites are very shy and unsociable similar to the water sprites they have beautiful dashing figures and though male beings may be seen most of them are females here the magician does not have to adopt a shape suitable for the air spirits he can impregnate his own spirit with the air element and transfer himself imaginatively into the region of air wishing for the air spirits to contact him he ought not to lose patience if he does not succeed for a while but he has to keep his mind constantly on his desire to see the air spirits at any price he will notice at first that the beings avoid to meet him a fact which is not to discourage him finally he will see the most beautiful beings with a gorgeous etheric body soft and supple the magician must mentally imitate the air spirits by moving about as it were floating carried by the air not long from now the air spirits will address him here likewise the magician be cautioned against addressing any of the beings first lest the same ill fate should befall him as described previously if after repeated experiments the contact with the air sprites has been established the magician will be informed by them about whatever concerns the air element he will be taught many magic secrets and practices which no man living would have the least inkling of being fully acquainted with the air element and its beings and mastering the magic technique the magician may proceed to the spirits of the fire element which he will have to contact now these beings have a certain likeness to human beings but they are rather odd in some ways and it is therefore advisable for the magician to get an impression of these beings with the help of a magic mirror he will notice that the fire spirits have a much smaller face than men and an extraordinarily long and thin neck he will therefore transfer himself imaginatively into the shape of a fire sprite loading it with the pure fire element and off he goes to the spirit sphere into a crater or a volcano the most remarkable homestead of the fire spirits from what we stated before the magician will have noticed that the beings of the air are restless and move about constantly all the same may be applied to the fire sprites which everywhere are roaming as nervous and fidgety as the element they belong to the magician ought not to forget the rule of not talking first to any of the beings here there are likewise different groups of intelligences and the highbrows among these fire spirits are those whose outer appearance is more beautiful the highest ranks of these organisms are the most similar to man and it is obvious that the magician will try to come into contact with the most intelligent of them as for the practice of magic he will learn a great deal about what can be accomplished with the fire element if the magician is now sufficiently acquainted with the fire spirits and their leaders in the craters so that they taught him all he wanted to know he may be allowed to visit those of the fire organisms who living in the deepest center of the earth have a profound knowledge not before having exhausted all possible sources of information about the fire element he may with a good conscience regard himself sovereign of all the elements there is one conviction which the magician will win while visiting all the element organisms namely however great the intelligence and knowledge of these sprites may be they are still composed of one single element whereas man represents all four elements and moreover the fifth that is to say the principle of god now he will understand why the bible says that man is the most perfect of all beings created by god in his own image this is the reason of the discontent of all the elemental organisms at the site of man's immortality toward which all of them feel envy it is understandable that each elemental being seeks to obtain immortality and a magician is in a position to bestow such an opportunity on them unfortunately it is not possible for the time being to particularize how all this is brought about but it can be taken for granted that the magician will by now intuitively find out all by himself it is obvious that the magician will transfer all the experiences made through his contact with other creatures into his memory that is into the physical body and he will also be able to use these experiences changed into practice on the material plane as well a magician like this will be able in the magic of nature to execute the most astounding performances under the nose of a layman after the magician's further progress in profoundly knowing and practically controlling the four elemental kingdoms he may try to come into contact with his spiritual teacher his guru or genius as mentioned previously with respect to the passive communication with the world beyond man was given by the divine providence a guardian angel or genius directing his mental development and watching over it here for the first time man came into passive contact with his genius but thanks to his clairvoyance he could see his genius either when in trance or in his magic mirror if he wished to contact him but now he has advanced as far as to establish a visible connection with his genius on the mental plane the practical performance is not difficult provided the genius did not make himself known already formally to a magician mastering the mental wandering perfectly the practice of the visible connection with the genius needs only one thing that is to stand upright and to feel imaginatively grasped and carried off with a whirling motion in the air instead of being whirled into the air one can imagine oneself the other way round two that is being as light as a feather and being pushed off the earth this is left to the concentration of every individual after several attempts the magician will find out by himself which method is best suitable for him if thus the magician is ascending mentally he is climbing higher and higher until the earth looks like a small star and while being completely removed from the globe and floating in the universe he concentrates on the wish that his guide might appear before him or he might be drawn towards the guide if not instantly certainly after some trials the guide or guardian angel or whatever you may call him will become visible to the magician the first meeting with his spiritual leader will make a deep impression on the magician since henceforth he has the opportunity of mutual intercourse from mouth to mouth from ear to ear first of all he will ask his genius when how and under which conditions he can contact him at any time every scholar then has of course to obey the instructions of the leader from now the guru is taking over the magician's guidance as soon as the connection with the guru has been established the magician will enter the last phase of his mental development and as the physical world has nothing more to offer and to say to him he will visit other spheres he will manage this in the same manner by ascending straight as a dart from the earth concentrating on the sphere he wishes to visit and according to his will being attracted by the sphere as there does not exist any perception of time and space for his spirit he can visit any sphere instantly either alone or in company of his leader according to the qabalistic tree of life he will reach in turns first the sphere of the moon next the one of mercury then that of venus of the sun mars jupiter and finally the sphere of saturn on all spheres he will meet the organisms living there and he will learn to know all about their laws and secrets if the magician has gone so far as to be able to visit the universe that is the spheric planetary system of the organisms and to master it his mental training is completed he has grown to be a perfect magician he is a brother of the light a true adept who has achieved a great deal but not yet all magic psychic training 10. conscious communication with the personal god in the theoretic part of this course i alluded to the notion of god and the magician who has made appreciable progress in his development can start on the meditation of this concept of god before he begins to work through this last chapter of his development he has to examine whether or not he is already mastering the psychical training of all the previous steps whether he has accomplished the magic balance and ennobled his psychic personality to such a degree that the godhead can live in it many religions are talking about the practical connection with god giving expression to the personal point of view that this connection can be established already by addressing god in the form of a prayer of adoration or of giving thanks to god the magician of course who has trod the stony path of development up to here is not at all satisfied with a statement like this god is for the magician the highest all the most true the most lawful concept that exists for this particular reason right at the beginning of his initiation the magician learned to respect this lawfulness regarding the universal laws and he did observe it since the conception of god has to be interpreted as an outcome of this universal lawfulness whichever may be the spiritual group the would-be magician belongs to he may be a christian a jew a buddhist a a hindu a brahmin or whatever be his creed or his path to initiation he has to respect this universal lawfulness in his conception of god without exception the christian will worship our lord jesus christ as his highest ideal attributing to him the four fundamental qualities or basic aspects which are manifest in the omnipresence these four fundamental qualities are omnipotence wisdom or omniscience all love or charity and immortality the magician will not regard his christ as a manifestation endowed with one quality only but regarding the universal laws in analogy to the four elements he will revere him as the highest divinity the same may be applied to the followers of buddhism or any other religion provided the magician does work correctly after having matured in magic he will establish his god principle on these four fundaments with their basic qualities corresponding to the elements and these four fundamental aspects of his deity will represent his highest concept of god the concept of his god has not to be linked to any person living or having lived it can be also expressed in a symbolic way fundamentally it is absolutely the same thing whether the magician does think of christ buddha a devi a son a light or a flame as being a symbol of his supreme godhead it is not the imagination that matters here but the quality he does impute to this imagination in any case to a magician of whatever religious faith or ideology the imagination of god has to be the highest the dearest the most precious and the most venerable of all things above which there cannot be any kind of a super god the communication with his god can be affected by the magician in four different ways one in the mystical passive manner two in the magic active manner three in the concrete manner and four in the abstract manner the true magician ought to be master of all these four methods and it is left to him which of them he will choose for his future permanent connection the mystical passive manner of unity with god is a privilege granted to most of the saints and all the believers to whom the divine principle manifested itself somehow in ecstasy as the magician does not know in which form god will manifest himself to him the kind of manifestation will be expressed according to his religious faith in the instant of a christian this may happen in the form of a symbol such as a white dove for the holy spirit in the person of christ himself or in the shape of a cross all this is however of secondary importance the main point is the quality of the divinity which manifests itself to the respective person how strong and pervasive this manifestation of god to the individual will be depends entirely on the measure of his mental and psychical maturity this kind of manifestation will be experienced by all persons in whom a state of bodily rapture or ecstasy has been produced by deep meditation or by prayers all the mystics theosophists bhakti-yogis etc regard this kind of manifestation of god as the attainment of their aims as history offers so numerous instances of this mystic unity with christ god i deem it superfluous to dwell on minute details the second kind of revelation of god is the magic active one peculiar to most of the magicians the well-trained magician will try to come near or in touch with his deity by invocation this kind too may be spoken of as a form of ecstasy which however in contrast to the previously described concomitant manifestation is being produced deliberately step by step in this kind of manifestation the interior that is the spiritual part of the magician rises up to god halfway and the latter comes to meet him halfway down this invocation of the deity in the magic active manner is a theorgic or a real magic form which a magician is allowed to use only when he has gained the right measure of maturity the manner of invocation is absolutely individual because there does not exist any concrete method the mystical passive as well as the magic active invocation of god can again be carried out in a concrete or an abstract form the concrete invocation imagined god in a certain shape whereas the abstract invocation is based on the imagination of the abstract idea of the divine qualities the practice of the possible divine revelations is very simple supposing the magician is meditating in the okasha principle that is in a state of trance about his god and his qualities and when the expected symbol of god makes its appearance during this meditation then one can speak of a mystical passive kind of revelation but when the magician with the help of his plastic meditation whether outside or inside of himself does invoke the single qualities of his deity regardless of his imagining these qualities in a concrete or an abstract form then it all turns out to be a magical active invocation of god he whose development has reached this point can attain not only to the mystic passive but also to the magic active union with god i myself prefer the methods of the concrete and abstract forms which can be managed by every magician an excellent exercise preliminary to the concrete manifestation of the deity is to put a picture a figure or any symbol of the respective deity in front of oneself the magician is sitting in his asana posture staring intensively at the picture until an effigy of his god will appear before his closed eyes while staring at the picture of the godhead the magician is worshiping he can again perceive it afterwards on any white surface nearby this visualization of the godhead is an excellent prelude allowing the magician to make the image of god appear before him this preliminary step is to be repeated until the magician is capable to imagine his deity as being alive at any time in any position at any place without the slightest effort then he can combine the picture he did imagine with the corresponding divine qualities at first he will not at once succeed in coordinating all the four divine fundamental qualities he has been meditating about in the previous step with a picture of his imagination he will therefore concentrate on one quality after the other the concretization of the divine quality in the imagine picture is very important and has to be repeated so many times until the magician's deity can be actually perceived by him as endowed with the four fundamental qualities if the magician did achieve this he must imagine the object of his adoration not as a mere picture but as a living being acting irradiating with such an intensity as if his personal god was standing real and alive in front of him this is the so-called concrete union with the godhead outside the own self the more frequently the magician is following this method the stronger and the more effective will be the visual and sensious deity before him when he feels to have put all he knows about god's conception and realization into the object picture of his invocation then he may think of his living deity which appears before his eyes with all the brilliance of the four basic qualities as filling and entering his body thus occupying the place of his soul this has to be repeated by the magician until he feels the godhead so strong in himself that losing his personal consciousness he gets the sensation as if he himself with a deity he had imagined by frequently repeating this union with the godhead the magician adopts the qualities condensed in his imagination and now it is no more the personal self that is acting through him but his godhead is doing so thus he is experiencing the concrete union with god union with his personal god and it is no more his consciousness his soul or his spirit but the manifestation of god's spirit that is speaking through his mouth here the magician is uniting himself with his god becoming god himself for the time of the duration of this unity sharing all the basic qualities of the godhead he is united with the method of concreted union with god is of utmost importance for the magic practice since a magician ought to be able to contact any godhead whatever irrespective of the creed in this manner in fiji as well as in the conjuring magic this practice is indispensable as it is the only way for the magician to bring about this union with a godhead at any time forcing the lower beings to execute his will it is evident that in this manner a magician can unite himself with the god principle to such an extent that all the properties and powers indwelling the concreted godhead he is psychically united with become peculiar to him to and continue as it were being his qualities even though severed from the imagination such divine qualities are called by the adept magic capacities or powers or cities if the magician masters the performance of the concrete union with his godhead he is going to realize the abstract form of the unity with god in the beginning he may link the conception of god to an auxiliary conception such as light or fire but later on he must refrain from doing so projecting nothing else but the quality first outside then inside of the own self now the aspect of the divine quality has to be connected to the organ corresponding to the element in a manner that for example omnipotence is in the abstract experienced in the head or love in the heart by repeating this exercise frequently one becomes identified with the abstract idea of god to such a degree that there is no need of any imagination of a region or of a part of the body next the four basic qualities can be combined into one idea which permits the introspection of the highest form of our conception of god by repetitions god's manifestation is deepened so much that one feels oneself god so deep must be this unity with god that during the meditation there is no god neither within myself nor without subject and object being molten into one another so that there is nothing but i am god or as the indian in his vedas puts it that thou art arrived at this stage the magician has completed his magical development in the astral form and any further exercises will serve the purpose to deepen his meditations and to strengthen his godliness communication with godheads when the magician has advanced so far in his incarnation of god that he can communicate with any deity any intelligence with every higher divine being then he is able to work in every sphere he wishes to not as a magician but as a god here with the magic psychical training of the last step has come to an end i have nothing more to say to the magician in this direction because he did become one with god and anything he will express or order during his unity with god will be just the same as if god himself did say it henceforth he partakes of all the four basic qualities of his godhead he is united with magic physical training 10 brahma and shakti he who knows other systems of initiation will find a certain parallel with my system since all paths leading to truth must be the same let me mention here the indian yoga system concerning the snake power which is in accordance with the systems of the egyptian mysteries i have quoted in kundalini yoga the scholar is exhorted to meditate on the muladhara center the seat of which is in the coccyx and to perform their pranayama exercises if we look closely at the symbolism of the muladhara center we shall find that this center has the shape of a yellow coloured square with a red triangle in it the center of it is a phallus the male genital three and a half times swathed with a snake the muladhara center is the first most primitive and grossest center which is symbolized by an elephant placed in a corner together with the respective goddess this symbolic expression called leila yoga in india is unequivocal and means the key for the first stage of yoga there are several explanations of this sign but the correct one is that the square represents the earth the triangle the three peaks or kingdoms namely the material the astral and the mental world the phallus the generative power or the imagination and the serpent the path and the knowledge the fact is well known to the scholar that the earth principle is composed of four elements and it does not need any comment the growing yogi has first to learn to know and to control the three worlds namely the material one the astral psychical and the mental spiritual world the muhledara chakra is consequently nothing else but an initiating diagram corresponding to the first tarot card such an unsophisticated definition like this has never been given in india and it is left to the scholar to find out by himself if he can master the muladhara center that means if he has accomplished the development corresponding to the muladhara diagram on his spiritual path the muladhara center has not for nothing been called the brahma center because in this phase of development the yogi scholar recognizes brahma consequently the godhead in the most subtle manifestation brahma is the eternal the inscrutable the universal the indefinable the steady and the calm therefore the positive part brahma does not create out of himself but all that has been created has been done so by his shakti the female principle shark t therefore in the muladhara center represents the serpent winding round the phallus and using the creative power of the latter namely the imagination a lot more could be said about this center but the experienced magician will be satisfied with these hints to understand that a parallel does exist between religious and initiating systems consequently the sharp t or the kundalini power represents the imagination which the magician has to develop systematically casting a retrospective glance at our entire developmental system the magician will certainly find that it is just this creative power of the phallus namely the imagination and its development which are playing the main role in his training i have already finished the magic physical training in the ninth step therefore i will restrict myself to discuss some occult powers in the following chapter although the magician will not necessarily have to master all of them nothing must come as a surprise to him in his development and he ought to have the correct explanation for every occult phenomenon several methods for acquiring magic faculties suggestion in the chapter concerning the subconsciousness i have been talking about this theme in the way of describing the self-suggestion these instructions go for the suggestion of other people too what is necessary here is to utter the suggestion formula strictly in the present tense and in the imperative form a magician will always transfer the desired suggestion into the subconsciousness in the case of somebody who has the mental maturity not yet the suggestion has not always to be induced aloud it can also be performed by telepathy it is very easy indeed for a magician to practice suggestion at the greatest distance he can do so in two ways whether visiting the subject in question mentally in order to influence him best while he is asleep or also removing the distance between himself and the subject with the help of okocho in order to work with suggestion it is obvious that any long distance suggestion can also be carried out with a magic mirror the effect of a suggestion can also be timed that is any suggestion may be given in such a way as to be carried out at a fixed moment in the future two the time of the suggested effect having been transferred to the subconsciousness of the subject telepathy akin to suggestion is the field of telepathy it is certainly a mere trifle for a magician to suggest his thoughts to any person all he needs to consider is the fact that he has to transmit the thoughts not to the body nor to the soul but simply to the spirit of the subject he imagines the subject spirit omitting the material and the astral body dealing only with its spirit to which he transfers the thought here it is entirely left to the magician whether to suggest to the subject that it is his the magician's thought or that of any other person or else to allow the subject to think it to have been his own idea not only ideas but feelings as well can be transferred at close quarters or at the greatest distance the magician ought never to forget to transmit good and noble thoughts only with the help of his magic powers i am quite convinced that no scholar or magician will degrade himself to any kind of misuse naturally thoughts can also be suggested against the will of a person mastering the elements the magician can wipe out the thoughts of the subject who is to be influenced by way of telepathy suggesting him thoughts which might appear desirable to the magician hypnosis another field very similar to telepathy and suggestion is that of hypnosis by which a person is sent to sleep forcibly and is deprived of the own free will from the magical point of view hypnosis is reprehensible and it would be better not to specialize in this line this does not mean that the magician is not capable to allow people to sleep the practice is imaginably simple the magician need only suspend the function of the spirit by means of his will or with the help of the electromagnetic fluid and the person will instantly fall asleep here it is less important whether the magician is using telepathy or suggestion he can use both of them as a makeshift but he does not depend on them nearly all the books which have been written about hypnosis do recommend the use of telepathy and suggestion a master of the powers does need neither one nor the other because the very moment he does not take any notice of the body and soul of the test person paralyzing his will by way of imagination sleep or unconsciousness will occur instantly which will set free the subconsciousness making it deceptive of any kind of suggestions just this act of violence that is the intervention in the individuality of a human being is not recommended from a magic point of view and the magician will not resort to it unless to give his subject good and noble suggestions with an extremely strong effect even though the test person should insist on being hypnotized by the magician he should avoid to do so if possible the true magician will always keep away from satisfying the curiosity of others by hypnotic experiments at times of great danger a well-trained magician may induce a sort of shock hypnosis by paralyzing the spirit of the opponent by a flash of the electromagnetic fluid a method which is only to be followed in an emergency which i hope sincerely will never happen in the life of any magician it has been proved scientifically that animals can be hypnotized too if a magician wants to do so he will hit the instinctive side of the animal so that even the biggest and strongest animals are immediately not senseless mass hypnosis at the farcas the mass hypnosis induced by indian farcas and jugglers which meets with so many admirers is no problem at all to the magician the farcas engaged in these performances generally do not know themselves how such phenomena are brought about their secret being a matter of tradition handed down from one generation to the other supposing a certain spot room and so on is being loaded with the okosha principle all the bystanders are likewise pervaded by the okosha two and this principle will prevail in all of them whatever has been induced in the okosha principle has to be necessarily realized since okosho is the ultimate cause in the light of this law the mass hypnosis produced by the farcas performing their shows in front of a crowd can be understood without any difficulty the magician can do exactly the same things with a traditional word or a formula the farca calls into the room transferring the pictures which the audience wish to see into this principle by repeating this experiment so many times it has already become automatical so that the farca has to apply neither to the imagination and the okosho nor to the actors spectators want to see it is sufficient for him to utter the akosha formula to hold people spellbound and afterwards he only needs to express the desired occurrence pact into short sentences or tantras and so on in a low voice in turns and the audience will perceive one picture after the other in the same order the fact that these formulas are genuine incantation sounds absolutely credible since such a secret is traditionally handed down from family to family for hundreds of years not even the owner of such a formula does exactly know what sort of powers he is going to release all he knows is this all that will happen if he expresses the respective words and he does not bother his head about the cause of it performances like these are very much admired indeed mainly by people who haven't got the faintest idea of the higher laws of magic india such a performance of an illusionist is nothing else but a mere money matter making a snapshot of an experiment like this would bring about a great disappointment because nothing at all would be seen on the plate or film nothing of the marvelous scenes but the farka and his partner sitting quiet there and smiling a polite smile this seemingly miraculous experiment is easily explained in the light of the magic laws and therefore it must be left to the individual to work at such things or even to specialize in them but for the magician's development and rise such experiments are absolutely useless i only did mention them to put the magician in the picture and let him find the explanation from the magical point of view thought reading a lot of publicity has been made about the problem of thought reading this seems to be a matter of course for the magician and he is regarding it as a concomitant of inferior value for his mental development thought reading can be performed by pictures intuitions inspirations and so on according to the mental attitude of the magician it is not necessary to underline the fact that a subject's thought can be read not only if he is close by the magician but also at a far distance which is nothing else but the result of working in the occur every idea every word and every act does find its exact pattern in the okocho compare to the chapter dealing with this akosha problem if the magician does concentrate on the spirit of the person in question loading himself with okosho he can read the actual thoughts and if he looks back with his innermost desire he can also read the thoughts of the remotest past without any effort as soon as he has achieved a certain skill in thought reading after a rather long training he will be capable to read any thought even the most hidden one the forming of thoughts is an intellectual or imaginative act imaginative thoughts are easier to be read a perfect kind of thought reading can be obtained only if the magician has gained the absolute mastery over his spirit and therefore over his world of ideas too this is the fundamental condition otherwise he will be able to read thoughts only partially or only if they are effective ones thought reading is no problem at all it requires the contact from mind to mind the magician has to feel himself a spirit the exercises of the previous steps should have given him sufficient help in this direction and all he needs to do is to establish the connection between himself and the person in question by imagining the subject's body and soul as not being there in order to seize all the thoughts he wants to know psychometry psychometry means the faculty to read the present time as well as the past and if it should be essential the future two of any object whatever a letter a gem an antiquity and so on investigating all the events related at whatever period with this object this ability is a concomitant of developed astral senses and easy to be managed if the magician has undergone all the practical training taught during this course and if he has learned how to use his astral senses in seeing hearing and feeling all he has to do is to take the object which is to be investigated into his hand or to put it on that part of the body which is important for the exploration if he wishes to see the happenings in pictures that means to investigate them visually he ought to press the object on his forehead if he wants to perceive them acoustically he must put it in the region of the heart and if he wishes to search out the object intuitively or emotionally he must bring it close to the solar plexus or he simply holds the object in his hand after concentrating on what he really does want to know he induces okocho or a trance and now he is capable to read the different events of the past present or future with his mental eyes ears or the feeling the magician is also allowed to use his magic mirror in this manner he can say from an antique object unroll all the events connected with it like in a motion picture and he will learn all related anyhow with the object naturally he has got the opportunity to from every letter addressed to him or to other people by persons known or unknown to see not only the sender but also the thought which happened to be in the person's mind at the given time he can to put it in a nutshell read between the lines of any letter to the field of psychometry also belongs the faculty to communicate with any person that came in touch with any object because an object no matter which nature it happens to be does always represent the connecting link between the body spirit and soul of the magician and the person in question no doubt that the magician is able to read thought with the help of an object even at the greatest distance at the same time he is capable to learn all about the psychical side of the person concerned and to detect the qualities of the character and the mental development in the world of okocho without any effort the same can be said of course about the material side and he can fathom the past the present and the future once he has established the communication between his spirit and the one of a person with respect to our kosher a variant of psychometry is psychography but it is of little importance to a magician which results from what i just have said through the connecting link not only the sender of a letter can be detected in all phases of his existence but the object itself can serve to establish the contact with the respective person influencing him mentally or physically and psychically from these arguments it has become patent that psychometry is nothing else but a sub-variety of clairvoyant which has already been dealt with in a previous chapter memory suggestion as we know memory is an intellectual property possessed by every human being whose normal five senses are intact but at the same time the memory is the receiver of thoughts and ideas from the mental and consequently from the akasha world as well we know that all thoughts and ideas are transferred to the okosho and that the memory thanks to its receptive quality does call back these ideas from the okosha and the mental sphere to the consciousness being quite at home in the okosha the magician is capable to influence the memory in a direct or an indirect way the direct way is to reinforce the memory by means of the corresponding element or the electromagnetic fluid or by mere influence on the subconsciousness with the help of the imagination but when working on the memory he can if he wishes so wipe out or weaken or diminish certain ideas and impressions in the consciousness and consequently in the memory by means of his imagination the indirect way of influencing the memory is to do so indirectly with the help of the akosha principle the magician seeing everybody's train of thoughts and pictures in the okoshow can evidently make them fade away destroying the connection between the pictures in okosha and the person concerned with the help of the imagination because the magician has the possibility of depriving every person of the memory in this manner he may be worn seriously against misusing this strong power nobody who is aspiring to ethical development will be persuaded to do a deed like this the magician will certainly utilize this faculty only when he wants to weaken or to wipe out anyone's bad experiences or occurrences which did leave deep impressions on the person's memory the magician can do all the good in the world by a facing a deep sorrow or a disappointment a person cannot get over he can experiment with it in his own life as well provided he did once suffer from mental shocks or bitter disappointments perhaps before his magical development which keep on coming back to his memory such pictures will never enter his memory again once they have been wiped out in our but if he does manage to master these remembrances by his will by self-suggestion or other methods there is no need of a drastic interference with okocho to have these pictures wiped out for good and all the pathologic loss of memory can be explained by the fact that the connection with the mental world and therefore with okocho two became paralyzed from time to time but this condition is already a disharmony an illness a mental disturbance if it did occur as the result of different causes such as a shock and the like working in the occur in the same way as the memory can be influenced and certain remembrances be wiped out with the help of okocho which i explained in the previous chapter the magician is capable to obliterate not only certain ideas and recollections but also certain causes which are registered in the okosha and turn out as influences of the fate on himself or on other people provided he has got the correct motivation supposing he wipes out a cause which the subject did create himself he has to establish another cause in place of the one he wiped out which is destined to have a corresponding effect on the fate of the person in question this interference in man's life must not happen for frivolous reasons whether the magician himself or other people be concerned the magician can intervene in such a manner only if he can take the full responsibility for his action before the divine providence wiping out a cause and creating a new one whether a favorable or an unfavorable one is best done with the help of an electromagnetic vault a practice which has been described in detail under the head of physical training in the ninth step there are some more methods yet but all of them are based on the willpower and the respective imagination and the magician can determine them after his own free will the fact that a magician can change fate wiping out its cause and with it the sins as well since so far as regarded in the religious way four sins are nothing but moral views of religions has been pointed out by our lord jesus christ when he said to whom i forgave the sins they will be forgiven forever long-distance impregnation of rooms i talked previously already about the impregnation of a room in which the magician himself happens to be and i also recommended several implements such as the magic mirror combined with a fluid condenser one fact i did not mention up to now is that the magician can impregnate a room at a distance too there are two ways to do so firstly the magician does visit the room in his spirit or in his astral body performing the desired impregnation there with the help of his imagination here of course hold good the same instructions i did give in the chapter concerning the room impregnation the second possibility is linking this room to the room the magician is living in with the help of okocho so that the two rooms are becoming one room in the okosha in consequence of thus connecting the two rooms the greatest distance will of course be bridged whatever the magician is impregnating his own room with is naturally passing over to the other room too irrespective of its distance messages through the air this kind of transmission is in general use in the orient and mainly in tibet between magicians and adepts if the distance however great it be between a person or a room has been bridged through the akasha principle thus spanning time and space a person communicated in this condition with somebody is able not only to read and transfer the thoughts but also to produce and to receive physical manifestations by conveying the electromagnetic fluid to these two bridged poles which are already linked in orchestra in this manner sentences spoken in the magician's room can be heard physically quite distinctly also in the room connected to the one of the magician through the occur if now the distant person does answer in his room he can be heard in the magician's room as clearly as if the sender were there personally it is essential to produce the electromagnetic fluid in the exact way i described in the chapter about the vault except that it does not adopt the shape of a ball but the one of a room such an electromagnetic orchestra combination allows words and sentences to be spoken and transferred to the greatest these messages can be heard or perceived by persons who are neither initiated nor magically trained this method can be materialized physically to such a degree that it can produce even a material effect the point here therefore is not so much to transmit ideas but physical words a fact which is known in science as wireless transmitting and receiving the ether in which the vibration waves of the words are moving is the akasha principle and the electricity necessary for it in our case is the electromagnetic fluid the magician does know of course from experience that whatever science has produced in the physical way no matter whether by electricity magnetism warmth and so on can be accomplished with the help of magic too in this manner it is possible to transfer not only words and sound waves but also pictures visible consequently materialized pictures produced by imagination in such a magically prepared room can be seen by people anywhere provided they are connected acoustically with the broadcasting studio that is the room in which the magician does work the modern television technique it is evident that other more transferences say of feelings smells and the like are possible by means of okosha and the electromagnetic fluid which transmit them to the greatest distance the effects of elements can be transferred in this manner likewise the material ether is by no means exhausted already and the future will teach us that one day we shall not only transmit sound waves similar to those of the wireless and pictures like those in television but also other quite different powers here is still a wide field of activity for science and i am sure that there will be a time when thermic waves that is heat will be transferred to the greatest distance through the ether here the magician can start a lot of events which could be accomplished through the ether and he will also be able to put the magic knowledge in perfect harmony with the technical arts and with chemistry based on the universal laws he would be capable to make more and greater inventions but every anticipation as far as evolution is concerned would certainly be faithful to the magician exteriorization the magician has learned in this course how to sever his mental and his astral body from the physical body and the problem therefore does not represent anything new to him what he ignores is the fact that he does not have to separate the whole mental or astral body while performing this experiment but that he can exteriorize or disconnect single parts of the body the mental and the astral body not being confined to time or space the magician will be able to transfer different parts of his body even to the farthest distance as soon as he separates these parts in the okosha with the help of imagination for example he will be able to transfer one or both of his eyes anywhere else in order to get impressions there in exactly the same way as if he were there physically without wasting force in transferring his whole mental or astral body he can do the same with his mental or psychical ears in order to hear things at unlimited distances at first he will perform it through imagination with his spiritual body only and later with his astral and his mental body in this manner he will be capable to see and to hear anywhere at the same time by means of his transferred eyes and ears without being in a state of trance or in the primary world as soon as he possesses a certain skill in the ayah practice he can try the same experiment with his hands and gradually with his feet as well he will do so mentally at first to after that in connection with his astral hands and condensing the latter with the help of the earth element he can materialize them physically it is obvious that he will be able to make himself conspicuous by these materialized hands at a distance causing knocking sounds and other noises after many exercises he can move objects too naturally a lot of spooks could be performed in this manner but a true magician will not waste his precious time with such childish tricks the faculty of writing at distance between living persons may be interpreted in this manner too supposing a skilled magician has exteriorized his mental and his astral hand with the help of imagination by thinking of the hand as being somewhere else where a piece of paper and a pencil are prepared his mental and his astral hand can seize the partner's hand at the greatest distance and give normal messages it is even possible to transfer the magician's correct handwriting by this experiment at an unlimited distance this particular feat is called by adepts writing a distance between living persons if the magician has gained a certain mastery in exteriorizing his hands and feet objects can be transferred in the same way at the greatest distance to i am going to describe in a further chapter how to make an object invisible the magician will notice that he can neither hear nor see with his physical eyes nor will he perceive anything at all that happens while exteriorizing his eyes or ears outside his body even if he kept his eyes open as to the exteriorization of other limbs the respective limb say the hand will remain lifeless cataleptic until the mental or astral limb has been reconnected with the body magic of becoming invisible in many fairer tales the story goes that a sorcerer has made himself invisible and that there is a peculiar ring which makes people invisible if they twist it round their finger many books describe talismans and gems granting the bearer the gift of invisibility and give instructions in this line too but nothing of the kind is reliable nor of any use for real practice on the other hand based on the universal laws and on what we have learned up to now we shall try to prove that from the magic point of view making invisible is a matter of fact to start with we have to distinguish between a mental or spiritual an astral orb psychical and a physical invisibility making the mental body that means the spirit invisible has no particular value but it is nevertheless possible that situations will occur in life where this practice could be useful suppose the magician wants to transfer himself mentally or psychically somewhere and he does not wish to be perceived by beings of some kind or by the skilled senses of anybody else he can utilize the mental invisibility take example by a guru who wants to visit his scholar mentally in order to check him thus made invisible the master will be quite near to the scholar without being noticed by the scholar even if he had already fully developed his senses furthermore a magician could attend to the evil works of the so-called black magicians in order to learn everything about their doings or if necessary to perform a certain influence without being noticed by these black magicians and their beings there may be other more conditions in life where it will be advisable to resort to making invisible oneself mentally or astrally becoming mentally invisible is very simple and it is accomplished by filling the mental body with okocho from head to toe the mental body will instantly vanish out of any being's sight since okosho is without any color and without any vibration if the spirit of a magician should perform any act on one of the mental planes this would be registered in the akosha principle and in spite of being invisible he could be found out in consequence of his activity by means of clairvoyance to prevent this the magician has to wrap his whole body with a black cover as soon as he has filled his mental body with okocho it does not matter whether this cover has the shape of a ball or of an egg he must not forget to seclude himself from all underneath his feet as well as above his head completely with okosha before going somewhere else in this condition of being invisible he ought to concentrate on the fact that his activity should be neutralized by the yokoso that means it should not be written into the okosha that is leave no traces at all this concentration is necessary for otherwise the magician must fear that though rather illegibly several new causes might be registered in the okosha the magician is fully responsible for every action he is though invisible carrying out in the mental world fate is no longer able to do him any harm because he has become the master of okocho master of his fate hence forward he is merely subject to the divine providence should he misuse his knowledge for evil deeds it would be the divine providence that would punish him instead of fate the divine providence would give him so to speak the cold shoulder and he would have to live on as a lonely individual forsaken in the universe the only possibility of relying on the divine providence would be lost forever which to be sure of it would be worse than any curse such a magician would be doomed to destruction and he can easily realize what that would mean from the magical point of view provided one is proficient enough in making and becoming invisible in mental wandering the same procedure can be also used in sending out the astral body here as well the practice of loading the whole personality with okocho is very much in line with the loading of the mental and the astral body together the other measures are the same as previously described from the magic standpoint it is also possible to make invisible on the material plane but here invisibility is not produced by okocho but by means of the light filling the physical body with light it must be in harmony with the intensity of the light prevailing at that moment if the accumulation of light was stronger than necessary one would not become invisible but transparent and bright similar to the sun shining white without and within physical invisibility is very difficult to be produced it requires years of training and practice and hardly anybody but a depth of higher if not the highest ranks can execute such an operation correctly supposing this great skill of making invisible his mental and his astral body eventually his physical body two the magician is in a position to bring about the disappearance of any material object another way to do this is the transmutation of an object from the solid into the astral form by means of imagination in connection with okocho the object vanishes instantly from the site of any person whose magic senses have not sufficiently been developed an object transformed in the astral form can be transferred by the astral body of any entity or of the magician himself to any distance the magician or the entity performing this transference at last has the task of re-transferring the object from the astral condition into its physical form this kind of object transference is often practiced by creatures of spiritualistic mediums provided the point is a phenomenon based on an unmistakable materialization although such things are extremely rare but whatever planetary and extraplanetary intelligences may be able to perform all this can also be done by the magician who is acquainted with the universal laws and has made good progress in his development there is still one method of making invisible i mean the deviation of the senses which is practiced in all kinds of hypnosis and in that form of suggestion in which entities produce a number of vibrations corresponding to that of the light in the physical body thus affecting invisibility some more instructions referring to this problem will be found in my book practice of magical evocation practices with elements a great number of possibilities are offered to a magician who wishes to specialize more particularly in the use of the elements provided he has materialized that is condense the element with which he is working in such a manner that the elemental power has become a real physical power being perfect in doing so he can through condensation of the earth element in his body produce such an invulnerability of his body that it resembles to that shown by the indian farcas in their performances he is capable to run pointed objects through his muscles without feeling the slightest pain or losing a tiny drop of blood to say nothing of a scar left farca's insensitivity to pain when lying on a nail board is to a certain extent brought about by auto suggestion but a magician produces the same effect much faster with the help of the earth element he is indeed able to cure big cuts on his own or any other person's body directly with the help of the earth element without leaving a scar behind a gaping wound which normally would require a surgeon's aid can really be healed in a few minutes the earth element which he is condensing outside of his own person enables him to condense every thought every impression every being whether deceased or not embodied to such a degree that it becomes visible to the eyes of a completely untrained person and can even be photographed the magician has the great advantage of being able instantly to paralyze anybody man or animal even his deadly enemy by the extremely quick projection of the earth element there are some more possibilities of employing this element but i hope that the above remarks may be sufficient meanwhile the water element projected and condensed very strongly in itself helps the magician to stand the greatest heat without his body being scorched or burned projected into the hands the element permits the magician to hold red hot coals or irons without any damage being done to his hands he could even stand smiling in the middle of a blazing stake and nothing at all would happen to him let me draw your attention to the biblical event where the young man in the red-hot oven remained unharmed john the favorite disciple of our lord is said to have been immersed in a boiler with burning oil and no harm was done to him either the magician will now see that events like these are not only legendary traditions but they did really and truly take place and such apparent miracles can be performed by mastering the elements every kind of fire regardless of its extension can be extinguished with the help of the projected and condensed water element the magician can of course perform such almost miraculous feats with the air element two in the same or a similar manner with the help of the fire element the magician is able to stand the greatest cold if he does accumulate this element in himself the llamas in tibet can with the help of the concentrated fire element produce an enormous heat in their bodies so that they can in no time dry wet towels spread on their bodies in the depth of winter this experiment is known in tibet under the name of tumo any kind of combustible material can be lit with the help of the outwards projected fire element the bible describes similar occurrences where stakes soaked with water were set on fire by means of the fire element there is no doubt that a plant for example a tree can be made to die down through the projection of the fire element did not our lord jesus christ make dry up the leaves of a fig tree in order to give tokens of his power he did consider the same law performing the projection with the help of a magic word quabbler which indirectly caused the fire element to carry out his command backed by the universal laws respecting the mastery of the elements the perfect magician will bring about an amount of other magic performances with the aid of the elements levitation phenomena levitation means the abolition of the law of gravitation based on the universal laws the magician has found out that the power of gravity depends on the magnetic attraction of the earth the gravity of the own body can be abolished in two ways firstly through constant loadings or accumulations of the air element the primary quality of this element is realized to such a degree that man feels light as a feather and as rising and floating in the air like a balloon the second method demands the mastery of the electromagnetic fluid by accumulating the magnetic fluid in the body to such a degree of density as corresponds to the weight of the body that means the attractive power of the earth the effect of the gravity will be neutralized altogether in this condition of loading the magician will hardly touch the ground and he can even move on the surface of the water quite sure regardless of its depth condensing the magnetic fluid more and more he can at will raise his body in the air and by means of the condensed air element or the self-produced movement of the air he can be carried on in any direction the speed of transport in the air depends entirely on his own will many of the yogis possess a remarkable ability in mastering these levitation phenomena and even in the bible we read that our lord jesus christ was walking on the surface of the sea considering what has been told here the two it seems to be quite evident that in this manner objects or even people who are not magically trained can be carried away by a magician if he wishes to do so the accumulation of the necessary magnetic fluid can be performed by the magically trained imagination or with the help of some other practices such as quabbler interference of beings or ghosts and so on the elimination of the electric fluid in the body and the increase of the magnetic fluid can take place not only deliberately but unconsciously as well for example in the cases of spiritualistic mediums and somnambulists where the electric fluid is by trance abolished and in return the magnetic fluid increased in consequence of a sudden loss of the electrical fluid moon struck people generally when asleep may be overwhelmed by the magnetic fluid many times such moonstruck people may be observed to be able to climb a wall like a fly or to move about on the most dangerous spots of a house or even on a wire rope the magnetic overloading of moonstruck subjects while being asleep can be traced back to the influence of the moon that's why sonambilism is also called moon madness in any case this condition means a disharmony a disturbance of the electromagnetic fluid and consequently a pathological state or an illness a person afflicted in this manner can be treated only by harmonizing the electric fluid which has to be increased in the sick body this summarized interpretation of the levitation phenomenon should for the present suffice to the magician although from the aforementioned arguments he might draw the conclusion that it will also be possible to produce the opposite effect that is an increased attractive or gravitational power and as a matter of fact here the result is brought about in the same manner with the electric fluid instead of the magnetic one this explanation is unequivocal if the magician takes into consideration the basic law of physics which says that like poles of two magnets repel one another just as two unlike forces attract themselves phenomena of nature the magician can with the help of the elements and the electromagnetic fluid produce such types of phenomena in the nature on a large or small scale he will however need more space in order to be able to project and condense the necessary powers so by the projection of the air element he can influence the movement of the air that is the wind or bring about pelting rain or even steady downpour by projecting the water element on the other hand he can conjure thunderstorms with the help of the electromagnetic fluid by projecting electric and magnetic volts in the air which when clashing will cause the lightning by concentration of the magnetic fluid he can draw the water element even from the greatest distance automatically making rain in this way obviously he is also able to achieve the contrary effect by stopping unwelcome rainfall or by scattering the clouds hailstorms may as well be brought about or directed elsewhere for through the elements or the electromagnetic fluid any influence whatever can be exerted on the nature this sort of weather making is successfully practiced by the tibetan llamas thus in this is in so many other ways the magician knows various methods to cause these phenomena and is able to do this with his own powers after a special training just as the tibetan llama brings about with the help of rights evocational magic of beings and tantras power over life and death a magician who is perfectly mastering the elements and the electromagnetic fluid is also master over life and death of every human being but he will never dare to menace the lives of his fellow men though he does exactly know how to induce a magical death there would be a lot of possibilities of doing so but i desist from quoting such methods in order not to lead the magician into temptation according to the universal laws a magician of illumined spirit and perfect in mastering occult faculties and powers will also be capable to raise the deceased from the dead backed by his high mystical experiences and with the help of his well-trained senses the magician can see not only the working of the elements in the body the spirit and the soul but also the effect of the electromagnetic fluid moreover he can notice the connecting bond between the material the astral and the mental body and he knows how all this can be influenced according to the universal laws it will be easy for him to restore the two connecting links by means of the elements and the electromagnetic fluid in a case where no vital organ has been destroyed the magician can restore to life provided he has been destined by the divine providence to do so he can cancel the death of persons or animals killed by an electric shock lightning or similar events all he has to do in such cases is to establish the contact with the spirit in okocho deliberately inducing the electromagnetic fluid between the spirit and the soul in order to fix the connecting link between the soul and the spirit then he has to do the same with the spirit and the soul with respect to the body thus producing the correct harmony by means of the elements and the electromagnetic fluid the deceased one is restored to life by instantaneously filling the body with the principle of light this is the synthesis of the resuscitation in the magical way as induced with the powers of the elements and the electromagnetic fluid no matter whether willpower or other methods play a role in it it is well known that higher adepts did accomplish such resuscitations before finishing the tenth step i am going once more to point out that not all of the magic faculties described here have to be likewise mastered in recognition of an obedience to the spiritual law which governs the universe i have given the magician directions of how to bring about such phenomena bordering on the miracle it is entirely left to the magician himself how far he is going to specialize in one or the other of the disciplines a perfectly skilled person an adept can execute everything and perform even greater magic phenomena than the ones i mentioned here in the light of the universal laws consequently the complete course of instruction concerning the first tarot card the one of the magician has come to an end people who have made up their minds to follow this course practically have been given the opportunity of completing their development there is no other way to render the practice more understandable than i did the description i have given here responds to the knowledge handed down up to now only in the temples of mysteries and imparted to the most selected and trustworthy scholars those who want quick results will be disappointed four sometimes these studies will spread over years but this fact will not deter the sincere scholar from penetrating the knowledge of this first initiation for this reason the first card the magician represents the gate to true initiation a great deal of people who have been smiling ironically about the problem of magic will probably have to change their minds after reading this book there are so many misconceptions about magic and so you should never forget that things are often misinterpreted magic is the most difficult knowledge on earth which has to be mastered not only theoretically but first of all practically it is much easier to attain intellectual knowledge than to become a true magician summary of all exercises of step ten one magic mental training elevation of the spirit to higher levels two magic psychic training one conscious communication with the personal god two communication with deities and so on three magic physical training several methods for acquiring magic faculties end of the tenth step epilogue by the author as i have already mentioned in the introduction to this volume this handbook is not destined to be the stepping stone in the search after wealth power and honor but it has to serve the purpose of studying man that is the microcosm in relation to the universe or the macrocosm together with their laws so the reader's opinion about magic will undergo a noticeable change and i hope he will never more degrade this ancient wisdom to sorcery and similar pieces of devilry it is understandable that each reader will judge this book from his individual point of view he who stands upon the purely materialistic position an unbeliever in religious matter ignoring supernatural phenomena and only concerned in material interests will without any doubt regard this book as sheer nonsense and i am not purpose to convert such people to any faith or to change their ideas this work has exclusively been written for those who seek the pure truth and the supreme wisdom which they will find in it indeed many times our fellow men are argued even persuaded into a special turn of mind and here we often learn by experience that the various representatives of the different ideas cherish revengeful feelings towards each other for professional jealousy or for better knowing the genuine magician will feel nothing but pity for people and creeds like that but never will he hate or despise anyone whosoever seeks god and whichever may be the way he chose to lead him toward this goal him shall be paid the due respect it is a pity but also a truth that the clergy theosophists spiritualists or whatever they are called are antagonistically inclined just as if not any path were leading to god all men seeking this path to and the union with god should always remember the words of jesus christ great master of the mystics who said love thy neighbor as thou lovest thyself this sentence ought to be a sacred command to any seeker of illumination on this spiritual path many of the beings who had to leave our material world and who had no opportunity at all on this planet to attain the true cognition in the spirit complained in the highest fears about the fact that the true knowledge reserved so long to the chosen ones in the past is not obtainable here below consequently the mysteries which have been kept as secrets for thousands of years are now revealed by the divine providence step by step to those inhabitants of this earth who honestly do long for the truth and perception evidently the benefits of perception will never come overnight they have got to be acquired in very hard labor and with many difficulties and obstructions a great number of people if not most of them will prefer to become convinced first of the truth of the rules to have faith and only then they will make up their minds to enter the path to initiation the honest magician will realize that this attitude of man is the wrong one he is convinced that one has to be trained and educated for the faith by the initiation by the mere reading of this work one can of course achieve an intellectual knowledge but not wisdom knowledge can be gained by transference but wisdom must be acquired by experience and recognition the latter depending on the spiritual maturity of the individual and this maturity again is determined by the spiritual development which is formed on the path to initiation anybody who has been reading about the tarot will know as a fact that there are 21 more cards called the great arcana beside the first tarot card which is symbolized by the magician in the egyptian mysteries being the cradle of all wisdom and each of these tarot cards again includes an initiation system apart from the 22 great arcana there are still 56 small arcana corresponding to the tarot cards likewise symbolizing small mysteries and each of these cards requires a description the divine providence will decide what and how much i shall be permitted to write and to publish about the single tarot cards having penetrated to the real inner significance of this book the reader will have arrived at the conclusion that there is neither a white nor black magic in fact there is no difference at all between magic and mysticism or sciences like that as i have mentioned at the outset any science is neither good nor bad it can however become a hindrance or a help according to the use man makes of it the opinion of the existence of black magic is to be attributed to the fact that up to now men had not the least idea of what magic is in the various chapters and in connection with the methods i repeatedly pointed out that this type of science is only destined to the most sublime purposes furthermore i have always fully shown that the magician is bound to enable his character in the course of his development to the highest degree to avoid an interruption or even worse a falling off in his rise the enoblement of the soul is going hand in hand with the rise of the development who is only keen on gaining occult faculties and powers to brag of them will do his work in vain for inscrutable other ways of the divine providence forever he who aspires after occult powers for futile motives will be led away from his path sooner or later occult faculties being only byproducts sort of a compass of the development and meant for noble purposes and for helping our fellow men consequently they are reserved exclusively to the true magician who has entered the path to initiation does not have to change his ideology as far as religion is concerned true religion is in fact nothing else but the practice of the instructions given here and any religion whatever can be brought into harmony with the present initiation system but before entering this path everyone should ask himself whether he will regard true initiation practically as his religion that is his life task which he is intent on fulfilling in spite of whatever hindrances and difficulties may be put into his way and whether he will try hard to pursue and never to run away from this path as soon as he has entered it it has to be taken for granted that an enormous almost superhuman amount of endurance and patience a tenacious willpower and secrecy regarding his progress are the fundamental conditions for all the readers desire as a perfection and who have chosen this book as their leader i sincerely wish a good success and divine blessing